01 A4d-E PDF

Operation Manual
Digital Minilabs
d-lab.2:
8060/260,
8060/803, 8060/804,
8060/270, 8060/272,
8060/157 + 8060/255
d-lab.2plus:
8060/261
8060/813, 8060/814
8060/271, 8060/273
8060/158 + 8060/255
netlab.2plus:
8060/505
Operation
Order number DD+18060A162D0
Edition 2005-05-01
Version English, 04092_01
Modification History
Version Edition Modifications

04092_00 2004-10-01 Combination of the Operation Manual – Operation
for the machines d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, and
netlab.2plus;
Update to Software Version 8.0
04092_01 2005_05_01 Update to Software Version 8.5
© 2005 AgfaPhoto GmbH. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

No part of these instructions may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any
form or by any means without prior written permission by AgfaPhoto GmbH.
AgfaPhoto is used under license of Agfa-Gevaert AG

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Contents
Contents
1 Introduction........................................................................................................................1-i
1.1 Applied Standards and Rules....................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Explanations for the Operation and Service Manual .......................................................................................1-2
1.2.1 Available Documentation.......................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2 Guideline for the User..............................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.3 Conventions.................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.3.1 Pictographs......................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.3.2 Text styles ........................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.3.3 Safety notes.....................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3 Legal Situation ...............................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 Manufacturer Information ......................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.2 Copyright ......................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.3 Warranty........................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.3.1 Liability of the Owner ..................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.3.2 Warranty and Liability .................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.3.3 Exclusion of Liability ....................................................................................................................1-8
1.3.4 Appropriate Use..........................................................................................................................................1-8
1.3.5 Inappropriate Use ......................................................................................................................................1-8
1.4 Consumables and Spare Parts..................................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 Hotline...............................................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.6 Safety Notes and Rules............................................................................................................................................1-10
1.6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.6.2 In Operation..............................................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.3 Handling of Chemicals .........................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.4 Service / Repair Routines ...................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.5 Disposal of the Machine......................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.6 Warnings and Information Labels on the Machine ...................................................................1-13
1.7 Transport, Installation, First Operation ..............................................................................................................1-22
1.8 Storage ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.8.1 Chemicals..................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.8.2 Photographic Paper ...............................................................................................................................1-22
2 General Description, Work Routines and Operation ..............................................................2-i
2.1 General Description......................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Product Description......................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.2.1 Corresponding Film Types and Images .............................................................................................2-7
2.2.2 Image Editing..............................................................................................................................................2-7
2.3 Operation Routines.......................................................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.1 Drive Bay
Applies only to d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus ................................................................................................2-8
2.3.2 Scanner
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus ....................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.3 Main computer ........................................................................................................................................2-10
2.3.4 Printer .........................................................................................................................................................2-11
2.3.5 Paper Processor.......................................................................................................................................2-12
2.3.6 Sorter...........................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.7 Densitometer ...........................................................................................................................................2-14
2.4 Controls on the Minilab...........................................................................................................................................2-15
2.4.1 Keys and Pilot Lamps............................................................................................................................2-15
2.4.2 Touchscreen Monitor ............................................................................................................................2-16
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-i

Contents d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
2.4.3 Main Breaker and Ground Fault Interrupter................................................................................. 2-17

2.5 Switching the Machine On and Off..................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.5.1 Preparations Prior to Switch-on........................................................................................................ 2-18
2.5.2 Automatic Switch-On (Timer) ............................................................................................................ 2-18
2.5.3 Switching On with the ON Key ......................................................................................................... 2-19
2.5.4 Switching the Machine On and Off with the Main Breaker................................................... 2-20
2.5.5 System Start............................................................................................................................................. 2-22
2.5.6 User Login ................................................................................................................................................. 2-22
2.5.7 The Start Screen...................................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.5.8 Log-in of Another User ......................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.9 End of Work and Shutdown................................................................................................................ 2-24
2.5.9.1 Sleep Mode...................................................................................................................................2-25
2.5.9.2 Switching the Machine Off .....................................................................................................2-25
2.6 Screen Layout and Controls on the Screen...................................................................................................... 2-27
2.6.1 Information Area..................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.6.2 Buttons....................................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.6.3 Pulldown Menus..................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.6.4 Popup Windows ...................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.6.5 Input Screens........................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.6.5.1 Entering Text ................................................................................................................................2-34
2.6.5.2 Entering Numbers.......................................................................................................................2-35
2.6.6 Reorder Keyboard
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus ................................................................................................................. 2-36
2.7 Main Menus ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-38
2.8 Calling Up Info ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-43
2.8.1 Film Drive Info
2.8.2 Printer Info................................................................................................................................................ 2-46
2.8.3 Paper Processor Info ............................................................................................................................. 2-47
2.8.4 Order Info .................................................................................................................................................. 2-48
2.8.5 Version Info .............................................................................................................................................. 2-49
2.8.6 Displaying the Error List....................................................................................................................... 2-50
2.9 Activating Help ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-51
2.10 Ejecting the ZIP .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-53
3 Changing Chemicals............................................................................................................ 3-i
3.1 Safety Information........................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Chemical Sets ................................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Changing Chemical Solutions (MSC/d-lab Chemicals) .................................................................................3-4
3.4 Mixing Replenisher Chemicals (d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box)............................................................................ 3-10
3.5 Settings and Tests for the Chemicals................................................................................................................. 3-11
4 Settings and Configurations ................................................................................................ 4-i
4.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Defining the User Interface, Defining Users, Assigning Rights ...................................................................4-5
4.2.1 Defining the User Interface ...................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.2 Defining Users and User Rights ...........................................................................................................4-6
4.2.2.1 Defining a New User ................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.2.2 Changing the Settings for an Existing User ........................................................................ 4-9
4.2.2.3 Overview: Rights, which can be Assigned to a User......................................................4-10
4.2.2.4 Defining a User as Standard User.........................................................................................4-11
4.2.2.5 Changing the User .....................................................................................................................4-11
4.2.3 Deleting a User ....................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3 Defining Paper Width, Surfaces and Cut Lengths ......................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.1 Defining Paper Widths ......................................................................................................................... 4-12
0-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.3.2 Deleting Paper Widths .........................................................................................................................4-14

4.3.3 Defining Paper Surfaces.......................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.4 Renaming Surfaces ................................................................................................................................4-16
4.3.5 Deleting Surfaces ...................................................................................................................................4-16
4.3.6 Paper Codes according to AgfaPhoto Standard ..........................................................................4-17
4.3.7 Defining Cut Lengths ............................................................................................................................4-18
4.3.8 Overview: Print Sizes ............................................................................................................................4-19
4.3.9 Deleting Cut Lengths ............................................................................................................................4-20
4.4 Entering Machine Settings .....................................................................................................................................4-21
4.4.1 Setting Date and Time..........................................................................................................................4-22
4.4.2 Setting the Timer: Start and Shutdown..........................................................................................4-23
4.4.3 Defining the Standard User ................................................................................................................4-26
4.4.4 Installing / Activating Software .......................................................................................................4-27
4.4.4.1 Activating Software ...................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.4.2 Installing Software from CD...................................................................................................4-29
4.4.5 Printer Settings .......................................................................................................................................4-30
4.4.6 Scanner Settings (Scratch Correction, Scanning Crop)
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus .................................................................................................................4-32
4.4.7 Paper Processor Settings.....................................................................................................................4-34
4.4.7.1 Setting the Replenishment Rates ........................................................................................4-34
4.4.7.2 Setting the Temperatures and Calibrating the Sensors ...............................................4-36
4.4.7.3 Calibrating the Water Pumps ................................................................................................4-38
4.4.8 Other Settings..........................................................................................................................................4-43
4.4.8.1 General settings..........................................................................................................................4-44
4.4.8.2 Settings for negative printing
(only for d-lab.2/2plus) ............................................................................................................4-45
4.4.8.3 Settings for digital orders........................................................................................................4-46
4.4.8.4 The dTFS function (digital Total Film Scanning: Image enhancement
in digital print files)...................................................................................................................4-47
4.4.8.5 Autosave settings.......................................................................................................................4-49
4.5 Adjusting the Production Balance .......................................................................................................................4-50
4.5.1 General Information Regarding the Production Balance ........................................................4-53
4.5.2 Setting the Correction Impact (for Color Negatives and Digital).........................................4-54
4.5.3 Setting Sharpness - Edges (for Color Negatives and Digital) ................................................4-55
4.5.4 Setting the Saturation (for Color Negatives and Digital) ........................................................4-56
4.5.5 Setting Sharpness - Grain (for Color Negatives and Digital)..................................................4-57
4.5.6 Area Contrast (for Color Negatives and Digital)..........................................................................4-58
4.5.7 Setting Detail Contrast (for Color Negatives and Digital).......................................................4-59
4.5.8 Brightness correction (for color negatives and digital)............................................................4-60
4.5.9 Setting Color and Density Corrections (Digital) .........................................................................4-61
4.5.10 Activating / Deactivating the Contrast Management (only for Color Negative)
4.5.11 Red-eye correction (for color negatives and digital).................................................................4-61
4.5.12 Using TFS (only for Color Negatives)
4.5.13 Panorama Identification (only for Color Negatives)
4.5.14 Color / Density Logic (TFS; only for Color Negative)
4.5.15 Setting TFS Color (only for Color Negatives)
4.5.15.1 Dominant Parameters...............................................................................................................4-66
4.5.15.2 Parameters for Artificial Light Detection...........................................................................4-68
4.5.15.3 Parameter for Shift Correction...............................................................................................4-70
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-iii

4.5.16 Setting TFS Density (only for Color Negatives)

4.5.17 Setting the Selector Logic (only for Color Negatives)
4.5.18 Setting Color and DX Corrections (for Color Negatives)
4.5.18.1 Color Corrections........................................................................................................................4-75
4.5.18.2 DX Corrections ............................................................................................................................4-76
4.6 Settings for Network Orders .................................................................................................................................. 4-78
4.6.1 Settings for Remote Orders: File Print ........................................................................................... 4-79
4.6.2 Settings for Remote Orders: Autosave ........................................................................................... 4-80
4.6.3 Settings for Network Orders............................................................................................................... 4-81
4.6.4 Settings for d-workflow........................................................................................................................ 4-82
4.7 Defining and Editing Print Configurations ....................................................................................................... 4-84
4.7.1 Defining and Editing Paper Configurations.................................................................................. 4-85
4.7.2 Defining and Editing the Backprint Configurations .................................................................. 4-87
4.7.3 Indexprint Configurations.................................................................................................................... 4-93
4.7.3.1 Importing Indexprint Layouts.................................................................................................4-93
4.7.3.2 Defining and Editing a Indexprint Configuration:...........................................................4-94
4.7.4 Defining and Editing Correction Configurations ........................................................................ 4-97
4.7.5 Defining and Editing Autosave Configurations.........................................................................4-100
4.7.6 Defining and Editing a Front Print Configuration ....................................................................4-104
4.7.7 Combiprint Configurations ...............................................................................................................4-106
4.7.7.1 Importing Combiprint Layouts............................................................................................ 4-106
4.7.7.2 Defining and Editing a Combiprint Configurations:.................................................... 4-107
4.8 Defining and Editing Order Configurations ....................................................................................................4-109
4.8.1 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Single Type...........................................4-112
4.8.1.1 Film Mask: 135, 120, 110
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus ............................................................................................. 4-112
4.8.1.2 Film Mask: File Print............................................................................................................... 4-113
4.8.1.3 Film Mask: IX240
4.8.1.4 Film Mask: Slide
4.8.2 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Package Type ......................................4-118
4.8.3 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Combiprint Type.................................4-120
4.8.3.1 Film Mask: 135, 120, 110
4.8.3.2 Film Mask: IX240, Slide
4.8.4 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Reproduction Type ............................4-123
4.8.5 Defining a Configuration as Standard Configuration..............................................................4-125
4.9 Deleting a Print or Order Configuration ..........................................................................................................4-127
4.10 Pricing Configurations............................................................................................................................................4-128
4.11 Save and Load Settings and Configurations ..................................................................................................4-129
5 Tests .................................................................................................................................. 5-i
5.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Printer Tests:Paper Balance Test (PBL) and Master Balance Test (MBL)..................................................5-2
5.2.1 Conditions for Printing an MBL and PBL..........................................................................................5-3
5.2.2 Initial PBL and MBL after the Machine Installation.....................................................................5-4
5.2.3 Daily Calibration with the MBL............................................................................................................5-5
5.2.4 Daily Calibration without MBL (Exception) .....................................................................................5-6
0-iv 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.2.5 Calibration of a New Paper Configuration in Case of Emulsion Changes

or Changes in a Paper Configuration (not Master Paper)...........................................................5-6
5.2.6 Calibrating a New Paper Configuration or Changing the Emulsion
(Master Paper).............................................................................................................................................5-7
5.2.7 Complete New Calibration.....................................................................................................................5-8
5.3 Printing a PBL Test .......................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.3.1 General Procedure.....................................................................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 PBL Test with Laser Point....................................................................................................................5-11
5.3.3 Copying Laser Points during Calibration of a Paper Configuration.....................................5-12
5.3.4 Default Setting of Maximum Densities and Calibration Factors..........................................5-14
5.3.5 When Should Maximum Densities Be Changed? .......................................................................5-15
5.3.6 Changing the Maximum Densities of a Paper.............................................................................5-16
5.3.7 Changing the Gray Balance of the Internal Densitometer.....................................................5-19
5.4 Printing an MBL Test.................................................................................................................................................5-20
5.5 Calibrating the Scanner (Pixel Correction, PIKO)
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus .....................................................................................................................................5-21
5.6 Checking the Process (Chemical control strip test)......................................................................................5-23
6 Production..........................................................................................................................6-i
6.1 Order Handling – Overview.......................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Preparations Before Production Start ................................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Print Modes..................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.2.1 Print modes and Possible Film and File Formats ..............................................................6-2
6.1.2.2 Printing without or with Preview.............................................................................................6-4
6.1.2.3 Order Configurations....................................................................................................................6-5
6.1.2.4 Changing to another print mode .............................................................................................6-5
6.1.3 Order Handling ...........................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.4 Order Tracing............................................................................................................................................6-10
6.1.5 Changing the Order Number..............................................................................................................6-10
6.1.6 Select or Change Configuration........................................................................................................6-11
6.1.6.1 Configuration Types for Print Orders...................................................................................6-11
6.1.6.2 Display of the Current Configuration ..................................................................................6-12
6.1.6.3 Changing the Configuration for the Complete Order....................................................6-16
6.1.6.4 Changing the Configuration for Individual Images of an Order
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus................................................................................................6-17
6.1.6.5 Selecting Another Configuration for the Complete Order...........................................6-18
6.1.6.6 Selecting Another Configuration for Individual Images of an Order
6.1.7 Inserting Films and Slides
6.1.8 End of Order (Automatic / Manual) .................................................................................................6-20
6.1.9 Special Print Products and Motif Groups ......................................................................................6-21
6.1.9.1 Black and White Prints.............................................................................................................6-21
6.1.9.2 Sepia Prints and Prints with Color Cast .............................................................................6-23
6.1.9.3 Reorder
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus of Black/White Films / Films Without
Extended DX Code .....................................................................................................................6-23
6.1.9.4 Portraits..........................................................................................................................................6-24
6.1.9.5 Border Prints ................................................................................................................................6-24
6.2 Preparing the Machine for Different Orders.....................................................................................................6-26
6.2.1 Changing the Paper Magazine and Loading Paper ...................................................................6-26
6.2.1.1 Removing the Paper Magazine.............................................................................................6-27
6.2.1.2 Removing the Paper..................................................................................................................6-27
6.2.1.3 Adjusting the Paper Widths....................................................................................................6-28
6.2.1.4 Loading Paper into the Magazine ........................................................................................6-29
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-v

6.2.1.5 Coding the Paper Magazine ...................................................................................................6-30

6.2.1.6 Inserting a Paper Magazine....................................................................................................6-30
6.2.2 Changing the Mirror Box
6.2.3 Changing the Film Carrier
6.3 Printing .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-33
6.3.1 Working with the Autoprint Mode
6.3.1.1 Activating the Print Mode and Selecting a Configuration ..........................................6-33
6.3.1.2 Autoprint without Preview ......................................................................................................6-34
6.3.1.3 Autoprint with Preview.............................................................................................................6-35
6.3.2 Working with Reorder Mode
6.3.2.1 Activating the Print Mode and Editing a Reorder List ..................................................6-40
6.3.2.2 Reorder without Preview .........................................................................................................6-44
6.3.2.3 Reorder with Preview................................................................................................................6-46
6.3.3 Working with Manual Positioning Mode
6.3.3.1 Activating the Print Mode.......................................................................................................6-51
6.3.3.2 Image Editing and Printing.....................................................................................................6-52
6.3.4 Working with File Print Mode ........................................................................................................... 6-55
6.3.4.1 General Information ..................................................................................................................6-55
6.3.4.2 Using dTFS: Automatic Color and Density Corrections.................................................6-57
6.3.4.3 Load Image Files from Storage Media ................................................................................6-58
6.3.4.4 Saving Digital Orders ................................................................................................................6-61
6.3.4.5 Loading a Saved Digital Order ...............................................................................................6-62
6.3.4.6 Delete the Saved Digital Order .............................................................................................6-64
6.3.4.7 Printing File Prints without Preview....................................................................................6-65
6.3.4.8 Printing File Prints with Preview ..........................................................................................6-67
6.3.5 Working with Slide Print Mode
6.3.6 Working with the Slide Film Print Mode
6.4 The Functions Image Editing and Special ........................................................................................................ 6-80
6.4.1 Image Editing........................................................................................................................................... 6-81
6.4.1.1 Activation ......................................................................................................................................6-81
6.4.1.2 Making Color and Density Corrections...............................................................................6-82
6.4.1.3 Cropping ........................................................................................................................................6-83
6.4.1.4 Image Improvement..................................................................................................................6-84
6.4.2 Special........................................................................................................................................................ 6-85
6.4.2.1 Enter and Format Text for the Exposure .............................................................................6-86
6.4.2.2 Setting a Border ..........................................................................................................................6-88
6.4.3 Saving an Image as File....................................................................................................................... 6-89
6.5 Manual red eyes correction ................................................................................................................................... 6-91
6.6 Index prints................................................................................................................................................................... 6-95
6.6.1 Index Prints in the Different Print Modes ..................................................................................... 6-96
6.6.2 Sequence and Designations of the Thumbnails ......................................................................... 6-97
6.6.3 Quantity, Size, and Aspect Ratio of the Thumbnails ................................................................ 6-97
6.6.4 Print Index Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 6-98
0-vi 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.7 Saving Images with Autosave ...............................................................................................................................6-99

6.7.1 Printing and Saving Images ............................................................................................................ 6-100
6.7.2 Save Images Only, Without Printing............................................................................................ 6-101
6.8 Network Orders ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-102
6.8.1 The Minilab in a Network ................................................................................................................. 6-102
6.8.2 Manual Start of Network Orders .................................................................................................... 6-104
6.8.3 Automatic Start of Network Orders .............................................................................................. 6-105
6.8.4 Deleting Network Orders.................................................................................................................. 6-106
6.9 Printing Price Labels (Option) ........................................................................................................................... 6-107
6.10 Saving and Displaying Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 6-108
6.10.1 Displaying Statistics........................................................................................................................... 6-108
6.10.2 Saving Statistics................................................................................................................................... 6-109
6.11 Clickrate (Option) .................................................................................................................................................... 6-110
7 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................7-i
7.1 Avoiding Problems........................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Display of Error Messages..........................................................................................................................................7-2
7.3 Activating Help for Error Messages ........................................................................................................................7-3
7.4 Problems During Scanning
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus ........................................................................................................................................7-3
7.5 The Machine Fails to React to Operator Inputs.................................................................................................7-4
7.5.1 Resetting the Machine with the Stop Button................................................................................7-5
7.5.2 Resetting the Machine with the ON key..........................................................................................7-6
7.6 Procedure if an Error Occurs .....................................................................................................................................7-8
7.6.2 Procedure for Unsolved Errors ..............................................................................................................7-8
7.6.3 Screen Remains Gray for More Than 3 Minutes after Reset.....................................................7-9
7.6.4 Image Processing Errors.......................................................................................................................7-10
7.6.5 Paper Processor and Printer Errors...................................................................................................7-11
7.6.6 Printer Errors.............................................................................................................................................7-12
7.6.7 Other Errors...............................................................................................................................................7-12
7.7 Removing a Paper Jam
Applies to d-lab.2 ..........................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.7.1 General procedure..................................................................................................................................7-13
7.7.2 Paper Jam in the Printer ......................................................................................................................7-15
7.7.3 Paper Jam in the Transport Unit (TU) ..............................................................................................7-16
7.7.4 Paper Jam in the Transfer Positions Transport Unit (TU) and Print Engine (PE)..............7-20
7.7.5 Paper Jam in the Print Engine (PE) ..................................................................................................7-21
7.7.6 Paper Jam between Transport Unit (TU) and
Lane Distributor (LD)..............................................................................................................................7-23
7.7.7 Paper Jam in the Lane Distributor (LD) ..........................................................................................7-24
7.7.8 Paper Jam between Lane Distributor (LD) and
Sheet Transfer (ST)..................................................................................................................................7-25
7.7.9 Paper Jam in the Paper Processor....................................................................................................7-26
7.7.10 Paper jam between dryer and paper outlet..................................................................................7-27
Applies to d-lab.2plus/netlab.2plus ..........................................................................................................................7-28
7.8.3 Paper Jam in the Feeder Unit FU......................................................................................................7-31
7.8.4 Paper Jam in the Transfer Positions between Feeder Unit FU and Print
Machine PM..............................................................................................................................................7-35
7.8.5 Paper Jam in the Print Machine PM ...............................................................................................7-36
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-vii

7.8.6 Paper Jam between the Feeder Unit FU and Sheet Distributor SD..................................... 7-38
7.8.7 Paper Jam in the Sheet Distributor SD .......................................................................................... 7-39
7.8.8 Paper Jam between Sheet Distributor SD and Sheet Transfer ST........................................ 7-40
7.8.9 Paper Jam in the Paper Processor ................................................................................................... 7-41
7.8.10 Paper Jam between dryer and outlet unit .................................................................................... 7-42
8 Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 8-i
8.1 Safety Instructions........................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Maintenance Routines – Schedule and Overview ...........................................................................................8-2
8.3 Daily Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................................8-8
8.3.1 Cleaning the APS Film Carrier
8.3.2 Cleaning the Drive Rollers in the Film Carrier
8.3.2.1 In the Running Machine ..........................................................................................................8-10
8.3.2.2 When the Machine is Off.........................................................................................................8-10
8.3.3 Cleaning the Film Brushes
8.3.4 Running a Process Check in the Paper Processor ..................................................................... 8-11
8.4 Weekly Maintenance Routines............................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.4.1 Cleaning the Film Carrier
8.4.2 Cleaning the Film Takeup
8.4.3 Cleaning the Film Chute
8.4.4 Remove Paper Dust
Applies to d-lab.2 ...................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4.4.1 Transport Unit (TU) .....................................................................................................................8-14
8.4.4.2 Single sheet buffer (SR) and sheet bridge (SB)................................................................8-15
8.4.4.3 Print engine (PE): Remove Paper Dust ...............................................................................8-16
8.4.4.4 Lane distributor (LD): Remove Paper Dust and Deposits .............................................8-19
8.4.4.5 Sheet Transfer (ST)......................................................................................................................8-20
Applies to d-lab.2plus and netlab.2plus ............................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.5.1 Feeder Unit (FU) ..........................................................................................................................8-21
8.4.5.2 Sheet Stocker (SR) and Sheet Bridge (SB).........................................................................8-23
8.4.5.3 Print Machine (PM) ....................................................................................................................8-24
8.4.5.4 Sheet Distributor (SD): Remove Paper Dust and Deposits ..........................................8-27
8.4.5.5 Sheet Transfer (ST)......................................................................................................................8-28
8.4.6 Paper Processor: Cleaning the CD Feed Unit, Tank Crossovers, and the
Squeegee Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 8-29
8.4.7 Checking the Solution Levels............................................................................................................ 8-33
8.4.8 Cleaning the Chemical Filters........................................................................................................... 8-34
8.4.9 Cleaning the Filters in the ASTOR and Water Inlets................................................................. 8-35
8.4.10 Cleaning the Densitometer Calibration Plate ............................................................................. 8-36
8.4.11 Lane shifter (LS): Cleaning the transport belt.............................................................................. 8-38
8.5 Monthly Maintenance Routines........................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.5.1 Cleaning the Exposure Filters
8.5.2 Checking and Calibrating the Solution Temperatures............................................................. 8-41
8.5.3 Cleaning or Replacing the Air Filters.............................................................................................. 8-41
8.5.4 Replacing the Scanner Lamp and Resetting the Operation Counter
8.5.5 Replacing the Chemical Filters......................................................................................................... 8-47
0-viii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.5.6 Cleaning the Processing Racks.........................................................................................................8-48

8.5.7 Cleaning the Dryer Rack......................................................................................................................8-51
8.5.8 Clean the paper outlet (PO)................................................................................................................8-53
8.6 Maintenance Routines Every 6 Months.............................................................................................................8-57
8.6.1 Cartridge feeder: Cleaning the Mechanism and Light Barriers
8.7 Maintenance When Required................................................................................................................................8-57
8.7.1 Removing the Dust from the Lens
8.7.2 Back Printer: Replacing the Ink Ribbon.........................................................................................8-58
8.7.3 Emptying the Effluent Tanks ..............................................................................................................8-60
8.8 Spare Parts and Accessories ..................................................................................................................................8-62
9 Technical Data ....................................................................................................................9-i
9.1 Machine versions ..........................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.2 Complete System..........................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.3 Main Computer ..............................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4 Prescanner / Scanner
9.5 Printer ................................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.6 Paper Processor .............................................................................................................................................................9-8
9.7 Heat Emission.................................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.8 Operating Conditions................................................................................................................................................9-10
9.9 Storage and Transport ..............................................................................................................................................9-10
9.10 Consumables and Operating Materials..............................................................................................................9-10
10 Environmental Protection and Disposal ..............................................................................10-i
10.1 Handling of Chemicals.............................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Legal Regulations...................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.2 Disposal......................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.2.1 Exhausted Processing Solutions ...........................................................................................10-1
10.1.2.2 Liquid Residues ...........................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2.3 Chemical Containers.................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2.4 Chemical Filters..........................................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Energy Saving Hints ..................................................................................................................................................10-2
11 Machine Shutdown............................................................................................................11-i
11.1 Machine Shutdown (Down Time up to 2 Weeks)...........................................................................................11-1
11.2 Machine Shutdown (Down Time longer than 2 Weeks)..............................................................................11-2
11.3 Resuming Operation .................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.4 Final Machine Shutdown.........................................................................................................................................11-4
11.5 Deinstalling the Machine .......................................................................................................................................11-4
12 List of Abbreviations and Glossary ....................................................................................12-1
13 Index...............................................................................................................................13-1
14 Appendix ..........................................................................................................................14-i
14.1 Conformity Declaration............................................................................................................................................. 14-i
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-ix

0-x 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 Applied Standards and Rules....................................................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Explanations for the Operation and Service Manual .......................................................................................1-2
1.2.1 Available Documentation.......................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2 Guideline for the User..............................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.3 Conventions.................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.3.1 Pictographs......................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.3.2 Text styles ........................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.3.3 Safety notes.....................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3 Legal Situation ...............................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 Manufacturer Information ......................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.2 Copyright ......................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.3 Warranty........................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.3.1 Liability of the Owner ..................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.3.2 Warranty and Liability .................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.3.3 Exclusion of Liability ....................................................................................................................1-8
1.3.4 Appropriate Use..........................................................................................................................................1-8
1.3.5 Inappropriate Use ......................................................................................................................................1-8
1.4 Consumables and Spare Parts..................................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 Hotline...............................................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.6 Safety Notes and Rules............................................................................................................................................1-10
1.6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.6.2 In Operation..............................................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.3 Handling of Chemicals .........................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.4 Service / Repair Routines ...................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.5 Disposal of the Machine......................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.6 Warnings and Information Labels on the Machine ...................................................................1-13
1.7 Transport, Installation, First Operation ..............................................................................................................1-22
1.8 Storage ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.8.1 Chemicals..................................................................................................................................................1-22
1.8.2 Photographic Paper ...............................................................................................................................1-22
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-i

Introduction d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
1-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.1 Applied Standards and Rules

The machine is in compliance with the requirements of the standards and rules listed
below:
98/37/EG:
Machine Directives
73/23/EWG:
Directive for Low Voltage
89/336/EWG:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (according to Modifications 91/ 263/EEC and 2/31/EEC)
EN 60950:
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
EN 60825-1:
Safety of Laser Equipment
EN 55022:
Information Technology Equipment – Radio interference – Limits and Methods of
Measurements
EN 55024:
Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Standard - Limits and Methods of
Measurements
EN 61000-6-2:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Basic Standard; Immunity Standard for
Industrial Areas (IEC 61000-6-2:1999, modified)
EN 61000-3-2:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limit Values - Limit Values for Harmonic
Emissions (IEC 61000-3-2:2000, modified)
EN 61000-3-3:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limit Values – Limitation of voltage
changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low voltage supply networks for
equipment with a current <= 16 A per conductor, which are not subject to any special
connection conditions (IEC 61000-3-3:1994 + A1:2001)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-1

1.2 Explanations for the Operation and Service Manual

1.2.1 Available Documentation
The complete Operation and Service Manual comprises of several documents (see
table below).
Operation Manuals Owner Photo- Technician

Assistant
Operation ●
Installation ● ●
Service Manuals Owner Photo- Technician

Assistant
Repair ●
Parts List ● ●
Circuit Diagrams ●
Preinstallation ●
The customer receives the “Preinstallation” instructions when the machine is ordered.
The Operation Manuals “Installation” and “Operation” are included with the machine
shipment. The “Operation” folder includes a CD with the complete Operation Manual
(except circuit diagrams).
All other sections of the Operation and Service Manual can be ordered from AgfaPhoto.
The Operation Manuals “Installation” and “Operation” must be kept around the machine
to ensure that all users have access to these instructions.
The Operation Instructions section "Operation" applies to the following machines:
Machines with gas laser:
d-lab.2 Type 8060/260
d-lab.2plus Type 8060/261
Machines with solid state laser:
d-lab.2 select Type 8060/803 and Type 8060/804
d-lab.2 basic Type 8060/270 and Type 8060/272
d-lab.2 (70mm) Type 8060/157 + 8060/255
d-lab.2plus select Type 8060/813 and Type 8060/814
d-lab.2plus basic Type 8060/271 and Type 8060/273
d-lab.2plus (70mm) Type 8060/158 + 8060/255
netlab.2plus basic Type 8060/505
1-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.2.2 Guideline for the User

Operation / Service Manual Contents
Preinstallation The owner takes care of the listed preinstallation measures and returns the
checklist to AgfaPhoto no later than two weeks prior to the installation date.
Installation The machine is delivered by a forwarding company.

This “Installation” section of the Operation Manual describes the transport to the
operation site, as well as the installation and implementation of the machine.
The machine is installed by an AgfaPhoto authorized technician and put in
operation.
Operation The “Operation” section of the Operation Manual includes all important
information required to ensure operation:
Chapter 1:
Notes on the Operation Manual, legal notes, safety notes, transport and storage.
Chapter 2:
Introduction of the components, functions and controls of the machine, help
function and information.
Chapter 3:
Description of the mixing process for chemicals.
Chapter 4:
Prior to production the Minilab must be set up to meet the requirements of the
laboratory (machine settings) and the order handling (print configurations).
Chapter 5:
Description of the tests, which ensure the production quality.
Chapter 6:
Step by step description of the order handling.
Chapter 7:
Description of possible problems, which may be solved by the customer.
Chapter 8:
Description of the required maintenance routines on the machine.
Chapter 9:
Listing of the technical specifications of the Minilab.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-3

Operation / Service Manual Contents

Operation (continued) Chapter 10:
Description of measures for environmental protection and the disposal of the
machine.
Chapter 11:
Description of measures for closing down a machine.
Chapter 12:
Explanation of the abbreviations and special terms used in these instructions.
Chapter 13:
Key Word Index
Chapter 14:
Appendix
1.2.3 Conventions
1.2.3.1 Pictographs
The symbols used in the instructions have the following meaning:
Operating steps
Result of the operating step
This symbol is used for warning notes.
Special tools
1.2.3.2 Text styles

The following text passages are emphasized by bold print / italic print in this manual:
1. Screen designations
Example: Pressing OK will validate the displayed text and close the dialog window.
2. Button designations
Example: Press the Reorder button to edit reorders.
3. Italic print is used for reference to chapters or paragraphs.
Example: see paragraphs Menu Overview and Screen Structure on the following
pages.
1-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.2.3.3 Safety notes

The following “keywords” are used in these instructions and on machine labels:
Note
Indicates additional information on the respective subject or the possibility of operating

errors.
CAUTION!
This indicates a potential danger which may result in medium or minor personal injuries
or property damage.
WARNING!
Indicates a possible risk involved with a product which in case of non-observance may
result in severe personal injuries or even death.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-5

1.3 Legal Situation

The operation of the machines is ruled by the appropriate regulations for the place of
installation in force in the country concerned.
This Operation Manual includes an EU Conformity Declaration (CE) about the applying
harmonized standards (see Appendix).
The warning notes in these instructions as well as the warnings and instructions on
machine labels must be observed by all means.
Non-observance may be hazardous to your health, and may result in damage on
equipment and buildings: injuries, electric shocks, fire.
Manufacturer and Service will not assume any responsibilities for accidents and damage
resulting from inappropriate operation.
1.3.1 Manufacturer Information

AgfaPhoto GmbH
PO box 900151
D-81536 München, Germany
1.3.2 Copyright
Copies of photographs, negatives and other pictures must not be made without the
permission of the author. Under normal conditions, the copyright is the property of the
photographer. The person who orders the copy is not always the author of the material.
1-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.3.3 Warranty
1.3.3.1 Liability of the Owner
Warranty and availability clauses are subject to the following conditions:
– The Minilab is only operated by persons who participated in the detailed AgfaPhoto
training and are able to proof this.
– The required power supply for the operation of the Minilab, as well as chemicals and
other consumables must be provided according to the instructions.
– All instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the Minilab as given by
AgfaPhoto must be followed.
– Maintenance of the machine must be performed in compliance with the instructions
given by AgfaPhoto.
– The use of other wear and tear parts or spare parts than the original parts by AgfaPhoto
results in immediate termination of warranty, availability and guaranty claims.
1.3.3.2 Warranty and Liability

The equipment has been built and tested in compliance with the standards and rules as
listed in the section Applied Standards and Rules, and left the factory in perfect and safe
working condition. To keep this condition and guarantee an operation without any risks,
the user must observe the notes and warnings in this Operation Manual. Owner and user
will be liable and must ensure that all safety features and devices, as well as the
conditions in the machine environment are provided and followed in a suitable measure.
The general terms and conditions of sales and delivery of the AgfaPhoto GmbH apply as a
matter of principle. The owner receives these terms at the time of contract conclusion or
before.
Warranty and liability claims in case of personal injuries and property damage are
excluded if they are the result of one or more of the following causes:
– improper use of the Minilab;
– incorrect assembly, operation, handling or maintenance of the Minilab;
– non-observance of notes in the Operation Manual with respect to transport, storage,
assembly, switch-on, operation, and maintenance of the equipment;
– high-handed changes on the Minilab;
– inadequate monitoring of assemblies of the
Minilab, which are subject to wear and tear;
– incorrectly made repairs;
– catastrophic cases that are due to external impacts and force majeure.
A correct and safe operation of the equipment also requires correct transport, correct
storage, correct installation and assembly, as well as careful operation and service.
Guaranty regulations are up to the countries. For information refer to the sales contract or
the warranty certificate.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-7

1.3.3.3 Exclusion of Liability

AgfaPhoto tested the contents of this Operation Manual regarding the correspondence
with the described hardware and software. However, deviations cannot be excluded
completely and AgfaPhoto will not accept a guarantee for complete correspondence. The
information in this Operation Manual is checked and revised in regular intervals and the
required corrections will be included in the following editions.
We reserve the right to technical changes.
1.3.4 Appropriate Use

Applies to d-lab.2/2plus
The d-lab.2/2plus is a digital minilab
– to print negative films, slides, and images from digital sources on photographic paper,
and
– to save digital data on digital storage media.
Applies to netlab.2plus
The netlab.2plus is a digital minilab
– to print images from digital sources on photographic paper, and
– to save digital data on digital storage media.
The Minilab must only be used for purposes described in these instructions and in
combination with the components and consumables recommended and/or admitted by
AgfaPhoto. Further use outside these specifications is considered as inappropriate use.
AgfaPhoto will not be liable for any damage resulting from inappropriate use.
The appropriate use also includes:
– the observance of all notes in the Installation and Operation Instructions;
– the performance of inspection and maintenance routines.
The equipment must only be operated by qualified professional staff. Qualified personnel
in accordance with this Operation Manual are persons specially trained by AgfaPhoto for
the operation of the equipment.
1.3.5 Inappropriate Use

Inappropriate use (misuse) will be:
– any application not corresponding to the afore mentioned appropriate use or use
outside the specifications;
– the nonobservance of the instructions in the Operation Manual;
– the nonobservance of the safety rules;
– if problems which may affect the safety are not immediately solved before normal
operation is resumed (operation of the machine in a condition, which is not correct
regarding functional and safety aspects);
– any unauthorized changes on the equipment.
1-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.4 Consumables and Spare Parts

Consumables and spare parts are available via the Sales Organization responsible for the
country in which the Minilab is operated. A listing of addresses is enclosed with the
shipment of the Minilab and can be called up in the Internet
(http://www.AgfaPhoto.com).
1.5 Hotline
During installation of the Minilab the AgfaPhoto Service Technician will also inform the
customer about the hotline number of the country in which the Minilab is operated.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-9

1.6 Safety Notes and Rules

1.6.1 General
A principle condition for safe handling and correct operation of the Minilab is the
understanding of safety notes and safety rules. This manual includes the important
information for safe operation of the equipment. The Operation Instructions, especially the
safety notes must be observed by all persons working on the Minilab.
Furthermore all rules and regulations regarding the prevention of accidents at the
operation site must be followed.
The minilabs are available with the following laser types:

d-lab.2 Type 8060/260
d-lab.2 (70mm) Type 8060/157 + 8060/255
d-lab.2plus (70mm) Type 8060/158 + 8060/255
In order to prevent damage caused by the laser beam, the latter is encapsulated in the
machine so that the whole machine can be classified as Laser Class 1 Product.
The laser beam cannot hit the operator when the Minilab is operated under normal
conditions, not even when the machine doors are open.
Structure of the laser classification within the machine:
Complete machine: Laser Class 1
Argon laser or solid state laser respectively: Laser Class 2
Color laser recorder: Laser Class 2
Print Engine, PE (d-lab.2) or
Print Machine, PM (d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus)
respectively: Laser Class 2
The above-mentioned components have labels attached (see Warnings and Notes on
Machine Labels in this chapter).
WARNING!
Never remove or open covers on the machine as this may be dangerous.
A laser beam of class 2 may be accessible after the removal of covers.
1-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.6.2 In Operation
Do not operate the machine without the covers and panels. Persons who open or remove
covers expose themselves to dangerous voltages or run other risks.
Do not cover or block the venting openings in the housing: this may result in overheating
of individual components.
No objects or liquids should get into the machine through the venting openings: this may
result in fire or electric shocks.
Do not squeeze the power cable, and install it in such a way that no one can step on the
cable.
Avoid excessive generation of dust as this may damage the internal components.
1.6.3 Handling of Chemicals
CAUTION!
In the working area of the machine there are some slightly poisonous, irritating
and caustic substances. Observe the following rules:
The owner (employer)

– has to elaborate operation instructions for the handling of dangerous substances, and
− provides for the instruction of his staff at least once a year;
– ensures sufficient ventilation: The air in industrial workrooms should be exchanged at
least eight to ten times per hour.
All photographic developers contain substances, which may irritate the skin, the mucous
membrane and the eyes, and which may cause allergic skin reactions affecting very
sensitive persons. For this reason, avoid long or repeated skin contact, especially with
developer solutions.
For all jobs where photographic processing solutions may splash, e.g. preparing and
pouring chemical solutions, cleaning processing racks:
− Wear protective gloves and change them every day, if possible; rinse all solutions that
get on your skin with plenty of fresh water.
– Wear an apron / protection clothes and clean them after use.
− Wear protection goggles: If in spite of this, splashes do get into your eyes, wash them
immediately with plenty of water, pulling apart the eyelids. Then consult an oculist!
Store chemicals and mixed processing solutions in a safe place.
Collect leaking chemicals immediately and dispose of these chemicals. The above
regulations must be observed.
Mind chemical residues in the boxes (Easy Paper Box).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-11

1.6.4 Service / Repair Routines
WARNING!
Observe the following points before starting service and repair work:
– Replace fuses only by the same type of fuse (value, switch-off characteristics).
– Please respect the country-specific safety precautions.
– Be sure to switch off the machine before starting any service and repair work.
− The machine is equipped with high-voltage carrying and fragile components. For this
reason, the following work must only be performed by authorized service technicians:
− repairs on electrical components,
− maintenance jobs / removal of parts and covers not described in the operation
folder.
− Use original AgfaPhoto spare parts: only these parts have been tested for their safety
and usability.
− When replacing electrical components: observe the data given in the circuit and
wiring diagrams.
− At the end of all service / maintenance work: check the general function of the
machine as well as the correct condition of the safety devices.
1.6.5 Disposal of the Machine

The machine must be disposed of as industrial waste.
Consumables, chemicals, and spare parts must be disposed of in compliance with the
applying country-specific regulations.
1-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.6.6 Warnings and Information Labels on the Machine

Make sure the following labels are attached and are clearly visible. Replace missing
labels or those which are hard to read.
The warning labels and notes 1 to 4 (see figures below) are visible after opening the
Printer side door and pulling out the exposure station (d-lab.2: print engine, PE; d-
lab.2plus/netlab.2plus: print machine, PM).
d-lab.2 with gas laser (Type 8060/260)
Legend:
9, 10 8 Label inside
Label outside
2
1
3 6, 7
4
5
2 11
14
4
12, 13
G_GG201_4g
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-13

d-lab.2 with solid state laser

d-lab.2 select: Type 8060/803 and Type 8060/804
d-lab.2 basic: Type 8060/270 and Type 8060/272
d-lab.2 (70mm): Type 8060/157 + 8060/255
Legend:
Label outside
2
1
6, 7
11
3
2
14
4
12, 13
G_GG201_4f
1-14 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1
d-lab.2plus with gas laser (Type 8060/261)
Legend:
Label outside
2
1
11
3 6, 7
4
5
2 15
14
4
12, 13
G_GG101_4g
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-15

d-lab.2plus with solid state laser

d-lab.2plus (70mm) Type 8060/158 + 8060/255
Legend:
Label outside
2
1
11
6, 7
5
15
3
2
14
4
12, 13
G_GG101_4f
1-16 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1
netlab.2plus with solid state laser (Typ 8060/505)
Legend:
8 Label inside
Label outside
2
1
11
6, 7
5
15
3
2
14
4
12, 13
G_GG101_4fb
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-17

No. Label Meaning

This label warns the user from exposure to laser radiation. It
gives the technical specifications of the laser used in the
machine (output intensity, wavelength, and laser class).
G_SH202
This label warns the user about opening the laser module and
exposure to laser radiation.
The laser beam which may escape from the open laser module
can be dangerous for the eyes.
2
G_SH201
1-18 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

No. Label Meaning

Machines with gas laser: This label warns the user not to look into the laser beam.
d-lab.2 Type 8060/260
d-lab.2plus Type 8060/261 Laser class as well wavelength and power of the laser radiation
are specified.
G_SH204g

d-lab.2 select
Type 8060/803 and Type 8060/804
d-lab.2 basic
3 Type 8060/270 and Type 8060/272
d-lab.2 (70mm)
Type 8060/157 + 8060/255
d-lab.2plus select
Type 8060/813 and Type 8060/814
d-lab.2plus basic
Type 8060/271 and Type 8060/273
d-lab.2plus (70mm)
Type 8060/158 + 8060/255
netlab.2plus basic
Type 8060/505
G_SH204f
This label warns the user about opening the laser module and
thus lose the adjustment.
4
The laser module is a pre-adjusted unit. Once the laser module
G_SH203 is out of adjustment, the machine is out of order.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-19

No. Label Meaning

This label warns the user about the risk of injuries by rotating
components (pulling, squeezing).
5 Do not touch these components when the machine is on and
keep the door closed.
G_SH205
This label indicates that the dryer assembly is hot during

operation and must not be touched before it has cooled down.
G_SH211
This label indicates that the dryer assembly is quite heavy. Do

not drop it on your feet. Watch your fingers during removal and
installation to avoid squeezing and bruising.
G_SH212
This label warns the user about sharp blade which may cut the
user when touched.
Do not reach into the cutting unit during operation. Do not
8 touch the cutting blades either when the machine is off.
G_SH206
This label indicates that the scanner lamp gets very hot during
operation and must not be touched before it has cooled down.
Risk of burning!
G_SH213
1-20 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

No. Label Meaning

This label indicates that the lamp switch must not be pressed
if the scanner lamp is not in operating position. Non-
observance may result in damage or even destruction of the
exposure filters.
10
G_SH214
Type label with CE certification

The type of the minilab is listed as the type number:
d-lab.2 Type 8060/260
G_SH_TYP260 (d-lab.2) d-lab.2 basic Type 8060/270 and Type 8060/272
11 d-lab.2 (70mm) Type 8060/157 + 8060/255
d-lab.2plus (70mm) Type 8060/158 + 8060/255
The CE certification means that the machine is in compliance

with all applying EC Regulations.
The given voltage-, fuse- and frequency values for single-phase
and three-phase connections are listed.
This label informs the user to read the installation instructions

before connecting the machine to power.
12 Installation errors may result in personal injuries by electric
shock or in machine damage when the machine is connected
to power.
G_SH208
This label warns the user about the risk of injuries by electric
shock in case of open covers.
13
G_SH210
This label identifies the main switch or main breaker.

14
G_SH209
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-21

No. Label Meaning

This label refers to the Operating Instructions (this
documentation) regarding the type plate position (see position
11).
15
1.7 Transport, Installation, First Operation

Transport, installation, as well as first operation should be organized and handled by an
AgfaPhoto authorized Service Technician.
See separate “Installation“ instructions for detailed information for individual subjects.
1.8 Storage
1.8.1 Chemicals
Chemicals should be stored and prepared according to the manufacturer’s information
and advice.
1.8.2 Photographic Paper

All photographic papers must always be stored in a cool and dry place.
The best storage temperature is between +2 ºC and +10 ºC.
Opened packages have to be stored at a relative humidity of 50-60%.
Storage at 20 ºC for several days is possible without any problems.
Storage temperatures above 30 ºC should be avoided as they will cause visible changes
after only a few days.
1-22 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation General Description, Work Routines and Operation
2 General Description, Work Routines and Operation 2
2.1 General Description......................................................................................................................................................2-1

2.2 Product Description......................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.2.1 Corresponding Film Types and Images .............................................................................................2-7
2.2.2 Image Editing..............................................................................................................................................2-7
2.3 Operation Routines.......................................................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.1 Drive Bay
Applies only to d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus ................................................................................................2-8
2.3.2 Scanner
2.3.3 Main computer ........................................................................................................................................2-10
2.3.4 Printer .........................................................................................................................................................2-11
2.3.5 Paper Processor.......................................................................................................................................2-12
2.3.6 Sorter...........................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.7 Densitometer ...........................................................................................................................................2-14
2.4 Controls on the Minilab...........................................................................................................................................2-15
2.4.1 Keys and Pilot Lamps............................................................................................................................2-15
2.4.2 Touchscreen Monitor ............................................................................................................................2-16
2.4.3 Main Breaker and Ground Fault Interrupter .................................................................................2-17
2.5 Switching the Machine On and Off .....................................................................................................................2-18
2.5.1 Preparations Prior to Switch-on ........................................................................................................2-18
2.5.2 Automatic Switch-On (Timer).............................................................................................................2-18
2.5.3 Switching On with the ON Key .........................................................................................................2-19
2.5.4 Switching the Machine On and Off with the Main Breaker ...................................................2-20
2.5.5 System Start .............................................................................................................................................2-22
2.5.6 User Login..................................................................................................................................................2-22
2.5.7 The Start Screen......................................................................................................................................2-23
2.5.8 Log-in of Another User..........................................................................................................................2-24
2.5.9 End of Work and Shutdown ................................................................................................................2-24
2.5.9.1 Sleep Mode...................................................................................................................................2-25
2.5.9.2 Switching the Machine Off.....................................................................................................2-25
2.6 Screen Layout and Controls on the Screen......................................................................................................2-27
2.6.1 Information Area.....................................................................................................................................2-28
2.6.2 Buttons .......................................................................................................................................................2-30
2.6.3 Pulldown Menus .....................................................................................................................................2-31
2.6.4 Popup Windows ......................................................................................................................................2-32
2.6.5 Input Screens ...........................................................................................................................................2-34
2.6.5.1 Entering Text ................................................................................................................................2-34
2.6.5.2 Entering Numbers ......................................................................................................................2-35
2.7 Main Menus..................................................................................................................................................................2-38
2.8 Calling Up Info ............................................................................................................................................................2-43
2.8.2 Printer Info ................................................................................................................................................2-46
2.8.3 Paper Processor Info..............................................................................................................................2-47
2.8.4 Order Info...................................................................................................................................................2-48
2.8.5 Version Info...............................................................................................................................................2-49
2.8.6 Displaying the Error List.......................................................................................................................2-50
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-i

General Description, Work Routines and Operation d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
2.9 Activating Help ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-51

2.10 Ejecting the ZIP .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-53
2-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.1 General Description

2
Applies to d-lab.2
The d-lab.2 comprises of four main components:
1 Main Computer
1 (separate, but integrated in the scanner
housing), controls the general work process
and generates the image exposure data.
The monitor (touchscreen) for the operation of
the machine is connected on the main
computer.
2 Scanner
digitizes the negatives and slides and
transmits corrections and exposure values.
3 Printer
2
prepares the paper and transports it to the
print engine (PE) and to the Paper Processor.
The integrated laser exposes the paper, the
back printer provides for the printing of
various data on the back of the paper.
4 Paper Processor with Dryer and Sorter
develops and dries the paper and stacks the
finished prints in the connected sorter or on
the tray for large print formats.
G_GG204
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-1

9 10
8
6 11
3
2
12
7
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1 22 21
G_GG201_2 (Fig. shows d-lab.2)
1 Door to power supplies 14 Right hand door on the Paper Processor (snap lock),
2 Touchscreen central water tank, shut-off taps / filter for water and
3 Main computer ASTOR tank
4 Film feeder with a cleaning brush 15 Lower panel of the Paper Processor; replenisher tanks
5 Scanner lamp and filter wheel 16 Docking station
6 Film take-up 17 Lower left hand door on the Paper Processor; drain taps
7 Film carrier for chemicals (machine tanks) and overflow tanks
8 Wet section with racks, crossovers, chemical filters 18 Printer front door; lens / CCD, transport unit (TU), lane
9 Paper outlet (PO) with integrated densitometer distributor (LD) with chemical control strip box
10 Tray for large print formats 19 Door for right hand paper magazine
11 Main breaker 20 Film collecting box
12 Order sorter 21 Door for left hand paper magazine
13 Dryer 22 Printer side door; print engine (PE) and laser module
2-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Applies to d-lab.2plus
The d-lab.2plus comprises of four main
2
components:
1 1 Main Computer
(separate, but integrated in the scanner
housing), controls the general work process
and generates the image exposure data.
The monitor (touchscreen) for operation of
machine and drive bay for loading digital
image files of different storage media are
connected on the main processor.
2 Scanner
digitizes the negatives and slides and
transmits corrections and exposure values.
2
3 Printer
print machine (PM) and to the Paper
Processor. The integrated laser exposes the
paper, the back printer provides for the
printing of various data on the back of the
paper.
3
G_GG104
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-3

9 10
8
6 11
3
2
12
1 7
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22 21
G_GG101_2 (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus)
1 Drive bay 14 Right hand door on the Paper Processor (snap lock),
2 Touchscreen central water tank, shut-off taps / filter for water and
3 Main computer ASTOR tank
4 Film feeder with a cleaning brush 15 Lower panel of the Paper Processor; replenisher tanks
5 Scanner lamp and filter wheel 16 Docking station
6 Film take-up 17 Lower left hand door on the Paper Processor; drain taps
7 Film carrier for chemicals (machine tanks) and overflow tanks
8 Wet section with racks, crossovers, chemical filters 18 Printer front door; lens / CCD, feeder unit (FU), sheet
9 Paper outlet (PO) with integrated densitometer distributor (SD) with chemical control strip box
10 Tray for large print formats 19 Door for right hand paper magazine
11 Main breaker 20 Film collecting box
13 Dryer 22 Printer side door; print machine (PM) and laser module
23 Door to power supplies
2-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The netlab.2plus comprises of three main
2
components:
1 1 Main Computer
controls the general work process and
generates the image exposure data.
The monitor (touchscreen) for operation of
machine and drive bay for loading digital
image files of different storage media are
connected on the main processor.
2 Printer
print machine (PM) and to the Paper
Processor. The integrated laser exposes the
2 paper, the back printer provides for the
printing of various data on the back of the
paper.
G_GG104b
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-5

5 6
4
7
3
2
8
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
18 17 16
G_GG101b _2 (Fig. shows netlab.2plus)
1 Drive bay 11 Lower panel of the Paper Processor; replenisher tanks

2 Touchscreen 12 Docking station
3 Main computer 13 Lower left hand door on the Paper Processor; drain taps
4 Wet section with racks, crossovers, chemical filters for chemicals (machine tanks) and overflow tanks
5 Paper outlet (PO) with integrated densitometer 14 Printer front door; feeder unit (FU), sheet distributor (SD)
6 Tray for large print formats with chemical control strip box
7 Main breaker 15 Door for right hand paper magazine
9 Dryer 17 Printer side door; print machine (PM) and laser module
10 Right hand door on the Paper Processor (snap lock), central 18 Door to power supplies
water tank, shut-off taps / filter for water and ASTOR tank
2-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.2 Product Description

2
2.2.1 Corresponding Film Types and Images

The following film types and images can be printed quickly and simply on a Minilab:
d-lab.2/2plus: – Black/white and color negative films, formats 135, 120, 110, APS;
APS only color negative films
– Black/white and Color slides (mounted, 5 x 5 cm)
– Reversal film strips, formats 135, 120/220, Black/white and Color
(optional)
– Digital images of the formats: ".jpg" (also JPEG2000 and progressive
compression), ".bmp" or ".tif" (also with LZW compression)
netlab.2plus: – Digital images of the formats: ".jpg" (also JPEG2000 and progressive
compression), ".bmp" or ".tif" (also with LZW compression)
Digital images can be transmitted to Minilab via the following means:

– via storage media: diskette, Zip, CD-ROM/DVD or memory cards (PCMCIA, Compact
Flash, SmartMedia, Memory Stick, SD/MMC memory card)
– via network (Workstation)
Note
The customer is responsible for the organization of network and/or workstations and
for the connection.
2.2.2 Image Editing

Apart from this, the Minilab offers a great variety of image editing options:
– Color and density corrections
– Cropping
– Image improvement:
– Area contrast, detail contrast
– Sharpness
– Saturation
– Special: colored text and borders
– Red eye correction (option)
All modifications are calculated in the main computer. The image on the screen is
refreshed immediately (does not apply to red eye correction).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-7

2.3 Operation Routines

The operator enters the required settings and inserts a film or slide or loads the image
data to be printed.
The Minilab then activates the following routines:
– Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus
Scanning of the image (prescan and mainscan, for negatives and slides; not required
for digital images)
– Image editing, if requested
– Calculation of the exposure data
– Paper cutting
– Paper transport
– Paper exposure
– Distribution of the paper to the tracks of the Paper Processor
– Paper development
– Paper drying
– Paper stacking in the sorter or on the tray for large print formats
2.3.1 Drive Bay

Applies only to d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus
G-GG133
The drive bay includes several drives for the loading of digital files from storage media:
– Zip diskette
– CD-ROM/DVD
– Memory cards (PCMCIA, Compact Flash/MicroDrive, Smart Media, Memory Stick, SD
MMC memory card)
2-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.3.2 Scanner
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus
2
After making all necessary settings for a the print order the operator inserts the film
through the film feeder into the negative carrier.
1 Lamp 4 Film drive

2 Exposure filters 5 Lens
3 Mirror box 6 CCD area
dalbr133
While the film is transported through the negative carrier and into the film takeup, the
prescanner determines the exposure data for each negative of the film (prescan).
After the main computer has calculated the correction data, the negatives are digitized:
The film is pulled out of the film takeup and the negatives are positioned one by one in
the negative carrier and exposed. Three color separations per negative are exposed on the
CCD by means of the color filter wheel (mainscan; approx. 2,000 x 3,000 pixels). A fourth
exposure with infrared light is used for the scratch correction.
The processing of slides is similar with the following differences:
– Mounted slides are individually inserted via slide carrier, reversal film strips are
inserted via the film carrier of the corresponding size negative film (135, 120/220).
– The color filters used for slide scanning are different from the negative filters.
Slides are automatically detected
– in case of mounted slides when the slide carrier is mounted,
– and in case of reversal film strips when the print mode Slide (see Working
with slide print mode in Chapter 6) is selected.
In both cases the minilab automatically switches to the slide filters.
Note
The slide carrier for mounted slides and slide filters are available as an option.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-9

2.3.3 Main computer
G_PC713_1 (Fig. shows netlab.2plus)
The main computer calculates exposure data for the image based on digitized image data
and prescan data (of negative films and slides; only d-lab.2/2plus) and image data (digital
images), as well as corrections, if applicable, and sends this data to the Printer.
2-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.3.4 Printer
Applies to d-lab.2 2
1 Paper magazine left (8 inch magazines)
2 Paper magazine right (12 inch magazines)
10
3 Sheet gear (SG)
4 Single sheet buffer (SR)
6 5 Sheet bridge (SB)
6 Transport unit (TU)
7 Print engine (PE)
8 Laser
9 Lane distributor (LD)
10 Sheet transfer (ST)
9
5
3
8 2
1
7 4
G_GG209 (Fig. shows d-lab.2)
Applies to d-lab.2plus/netlab.2plus
1 Paper magazine left (12 inch magazines)
10
2 Paper magazine right (12 inch magazines)
3 Switching Gear (SG)
6 4 Sheet Stocker (SR)
5 Sheet Bridge (SB)
6 Feeder Unit (FU)
7 Print Machine (PM)
8 Laser
9 Sheet Distributor (SD)
10 Sheet Transfer (ST)
9
5
3
8 2
1
7 4
G_GG109e (Fig. shows netlab.2plus)
The Printer cuts the paper and transports it to the exposure station (print engine or print
machine, 7), there the laser beam exposes the paper, which then continues through the
transport section (transport unit or feeder unit, 6) to the lane or sheet distributor (9). There
the back print is applied.
The lane or sheet distributor (9) distributes the prints on the tracks of the Paper Processor.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-11

2.3.5 Paper Processor

1
G-GG702 (Fig. shows d-lab.2)
The exposed paper runs through the machine tanks (1) of the Paper Processor, which
contain the chemical solutions developer (DEV), bleach-fix (BX), and stabilizer (STB), and
afterwards through the dryer (2).
2-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.3.6 Sorter
2
3
1
After drying, the prints up to a certain size (see below) exit via the print chute (1) into the
sorter (2) where they are sorted by orders and stacked in buckets. Larger prints are put on
the tray for large prints formats (3).
Maximum sizes for deposit in sorter buckets:
10“ Sorter: prints up to 254 mm (10") in length
6“ Sorter: prints up to 152 mm (6") in length
Special cases:
– If an order exceeds the capacity of a bucket (55 prints for sizes up to 13x18 cm (5x7"),
43 prints for sizes bigger than 13x18 cm), the sorter moves on to the next bucket, i.e.
the prints of one order may be in two or more buckets.
– Splices in the paper rolls are cut separately and the respective pieces of paper are
deposited in the print order stack.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-13

Splices in paper rolls
Note
For technical reasons some of the paper rolls come with splices. In compliance with
ISO 1009 the maximum number of splices in a roll length of
– 79 / 91,5 m: 1 splice
– 158 / 183 m: 2 splices
This information applies to Sensatis (Splendix) paper. The relations for other papers are
similar. Only lengths used in the d-lab family are listed here.
To compensate for the paper loss due to splices 30 cm of paper are added per splice. In
AGFACOLOR paper rolls the splices are marked with oblong holes which initiates the
required blank paper transports in the Printer.
2.3.7 Densitometer
G_GG116 (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus)
The densitometer (1), installed above the dryer, is used for automatic machine and paper
calibration. For this purpose it measures the MBL and PBL tests printed in the machine
(see Tests, Chapter 5).
2-14 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.4 Controls on the Minilab

2
2.4.1 Keys and Pilot Lamps
1 ON key
2 Timer lamp
3 STOP key (film stop key))
1
2
3
G-GG212_2 (Fig. shows d-lab.2)

1 ON key
2 Timer lamp
1
2
G-PC713_2 (Fig. shows netlab.2plus)
ON key (1)
If the machine is shut down by the menu command End of work > Shutdown, it remains
in timer mode until the next automatic startup. If you want to work before the timer starts
the machine again automatically, press the ON key to switch on (see End of Work and
Switching the Machine Off in this chapter, as well as Setting the Timer in Chapter 4).
Furthermore the ON key can be used for a reset while the machine is running (see
Reset via the ON key in Chapter 7).
Timer lamp (2)
The timer lamp lights up if the machine is in timer mode after shutdown via End of
work > Shutdown.
STOP key (film stop 3; only d-lab.2/2plus))
If a film jam occurs or you assume a film jam, you can press the film stop key to stop the
scanner immediately. Film scanning stops, the order is canceled, and the machine is
reset. The reset popup is shown on the screen with the button Yes. Press this button only
if there is no more paper in the Printer (otherwise this may cause a paper jam).
See Problems During Scanning in Chapter 7.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-15

2.4.2 Touchscreen Monitor
G_GG113
The operation of the Minilab is menu-supported via touchscreen monitor. All functions
are activated by pressing the touch-sensitive buttons on the screen.
(See Screen Layout and Controls on the Screen in this Chapter.)
Specifications:
– 15 inch screen
– SVGA resolution 1,024 x 768 pixels
– Screen-refresh frequency > 75 Hz
The customer can choose between an LCD Monitor (flat panel monitor, type 8060/341)
and a CRT Monitor (type 8060/340; see Ordering Aid in the Pre-Installation section of
the Service Manual).
2-16 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.4.3 Main Breaker and Ground Fault Interrupter

2
Main breaker (1) and ground fault interrupter (2) are located on the side of the Minilab
next to the sorter.
Both switches remain always on for normal operation of the Minilab. The main breaker
must only be switched off
– for some maintenance work (see Maintenance, Chapter 8),
– for various routines when changing the chemicals (see Changing Chemicals,
Chapter 3),
– for complete shutdown of the machine (see Machine Shutdown, Chapter 11).
The ground fault interrupter (GFI) remains always on.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-17

2.5 Switching the Machine On and Off

There are several ways to switch on the Minilab:
– automatically via the integrated timer:
The machine switches on automatically at the set time (see Setting the Timer in
Chapter 4) (standard method).
– manually via the ON key (if the machine is off and in timer mode)
– manually via the main breaker (if the machine was switched off via the main breaker)
The machine can be switched off:

– manually via End of work > Shutdown; the machine is then in timer mode (standard
method)
– automatically, if no inputs are made within an adjustable time after switching on
(included for incorrect timer settings, e.g. startup on holidays; the automatic switch-off
function is disabled as soon as an input is made after switch-on).
– manually via the main breaker (exception; only in emergencies or if required for
operational reasons; see Switching the Machine On and OFF with the Main Breaker
in this chapter)
2.5.1 Preparations Prior to Switch-on

– Insert loaded paper magazines.
– Only applies to d-lab.2/2plus
Insert film carrier and mount the matching mirror box.
Otherwise the machine cannot start up correctly, and an error message may be displayed.
2.5.2 Automatic Switch-On (Timer)

The Minilab starts automatically at certain times if
– these staring times have been defined in the timer settings (see Setting the Timer
in Chapter 4),
– the machine has been switched off via End of work > Shutdown (see End of work
and Shutdown in this chapter),
– the main breaker has not been switched off.
2-18 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.5.3 Switching On with the ON Key

2
If the machine is switched off and if it is in timer
mode (see Setting the Timer in Chapter 4), it
can be switched on with the ON key:
Press the ON key (1).
G_PC713_3 (Fig. shows netlab.2plus)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-19

2.5.4 Switching the Machine On and Off with the Main Breaker
CAUTION!
Only use the main breaker in emergencies to switch off the machine.
In normal operation always use the routine End of work > Shutdown to switch
off the machine (see End of Work and Shutdown in this chapter); do not switch
off the main breaker (1)!
If for technical reasons it is necessary to switch off the machine completely, e.g. for
longer down times (see Chapter 11), for some maintenance routines (see Chapter 8)
or for changing the chemicals (see Changing chemicals in Chapter 3), shut down the
machine first as described in End of Work and Shutdown in this chapter, and then switch
off the main breaker.
If the machine is switched off with the main breaker without shutdown, this may
– (applies only to d-lab.2 with gas laser, Type 8060/260 and d-lab.2plus with gas laser, Type
8060/261)
reduce the service life of the blue/green laser considerably (failure of after-cooling).
– cause problems with the main computer; the operating system may have to be
reinstalled,
– cause paper jams if not all prints have left the Paper Processor.
If the machine was switched off via the main breaker wait at least one minute before you
switch on again. Otherwise the hard disc of the main computer may get damaged.
2-20 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Switch on the machine:

Switch on the main breaker (1) 2
Switch off the machine:

Shut down the machine as described in End
of Work and Shutdown in this chapter.
Do not switch off the main breaker (1).
The ground fault interrupter (2) remains
always on.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-21

2.5.5 System Start

After manual or automatic switch-on the chemical solutions and the dryer are heated up.
During this phase various windows screen pop up on the screen; they indicate:
– progress of warm-up (actual and nominal temperatures of solutions and dryer)
– remaining time until the individual modules are ready for operation
– various information about the progress of the machine initialization
– error messages, if applicable
(see Chapter 7, Troubleshooting, for remedies for occurring errors)
The machine is ready for operation after the chemical solutions and the dryer have
reached the nominal temperatures.
2.5.6 User Login

If a standard user with automatic login has been defined in the machine settings
(see Defining a Standard User in Chapter 4), user login is not necessary here: After the
warm-up the start screen is displayed (see next section Start Screen).
Otherwise the Login screen is displayed.
If an operator, who has to enter his or her Password, has been defined as standard user in
the machine settings, the name is already shown but the password must still be entered.
If no operator has been entered as standard user in the machine settings, the user name
must be selected and the password must be entered:
Select user name if necessary

Type the password if necessary
The start screen will be displayed.
2-22 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.5.7 The Start Screen

2
m0
After automatic or manual login of a user the start screen is displayed. A menu bar with
five main menus is displayed along the lower edge (see Main Menus in this chapter).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-23

2.5.8 Log-in of Another User

Press End of work in the menu bar.
Press Change user.
The Change user login screen is displayed.
Press Logout.
The present user is logged out.
Note:
After Logout was pressed the machine can
only be operated again with login of a user. By
this function the machine can be protected
form unauthorized use, e.g. during breaks.
Press the name of the respective user in the

list of names (use the arrow keys to scroll, if
necessary).
Press Password and type the password (four
characters).
Press Login:
If the new user has another language
assigned in the machine settings, all texts
072 will now be displayed in this language (see
Defining Users and Assigning Rights in
Chapter 4).
2.5.9 End of Work and Shutdown

Depending on the set-up in machine settings, the machine can be
– completely switched off or
– partly switched off (set to sleep mode) via menu command (see below).
Note
The Minilab switches off automatically if no further entries were made within an
adjustable time after startup (see Setting the Timer in Chapter 4).
2-24 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.5.9.1 Sleep Mode

2
In sleep mode scanner, Printer and Paper Processor are switched off, the main computer
remains on for the set time. This allows e.g. checking of statistics (on site or via remote
access).
The sleep mode can be activated for any weekdays as desired (see Setting the Timer in
Chapter 4).
2.5.9.2 Switching the Machine Off
Note
Any negative carrier may be in the machine
when it is switched off.
Press End of work in the menu bar.

Press Shutdown.
The Shutdown screen opens.
The preset settings for the next automatic switch-on (date, time) for this day are shown on
the top right, and for switch-off top left (see Setting startup and shutdown times
(Timer) in Chapter 4).
If the displayed settings should not be valid

for the next automatic switch-on (startup):
Press Change Timer.
In the following screen enter date and
time for the next start, if necessary
switch the timer on or off and confirm
with OK.
Press Next Login.
Select the user for the next login from
the listing.
If the sleep mode should be deactivated for the
next automatic switch-off:
Press Sleep mode
Note
041 The time for the automatic shutdown cannot
be changed here. If the Sleep mode has been
activated in the presettings, it cannot be
activated here.
These settings can be changed in the Startup
settings screen (press the buttons Settings >
Machine settings > Startup; see Setting
startup and shutdown times (Timer) in
Chapter 4).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-25

Note
These modifications apply to the next start
only. Permanent modifications can be made
via the machine settings (see Setting the
Timer in Chapter 4).
If any prompts come up, answer them:

In case of unfinished APS orders answer the
query whether they should be saved. Orders
that are not saved are lost.
In case of orders that are not priced confirm
the warning messages. Finished orders will
also be saved if they have not been priced.
Performing daily maintenance
(see Daily Maintenance Work in Chapter
8 and refer to the note below).
Press OK.
If the sleep mode is activated, the Minilab is shut down but the main computer remains
on until the set switch-off time. The switch-off time for the main computer is displayed.
If the sleep mode has not been activated, the Minilab will be shut down and switched off.
CAUTION!
Do not switch off the machine with the main breaker (see Switching the
Machine On and Off with the Main Breaker in this chapter).
Note
To avoid problems during the next startup we
recommend the following procedure:
After switching off

check if there is enough water in the
water tank.
check the effluent tanks and empty
them if necessary.
2-26 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.6 Screen Layout and Controls on the Screen

2
046a
The screen is divided into different areas:

Information area (1):
This includes:
– (1-1) the area for messages
– (1-2) the buttons i, ?, Stop
– (1-3) the status bar
Active screen (2):
Depending on the function that has been called up, the screen shows buttons, image
views and/or information blocks.
Menu bar with five main menus (3)
Note
The term button in these instructions refers to the touch-sensitive field on the
touchscreen. Pressing on the buttons starts the respective function.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-27

The areas (1) and (3) are displayed in every screen; the menu bar (3), however, is disabled
in some work situations (e.g. if a problem occurred which must be solved before work can
be continued).
Note
Only one screen is active at a time; it is not possible to open several screens at the
same time.
2.6.1 Information Area
infobar
The information area includes several buttons, the status bar, and a message area.
Buttons:
Displays the Status information screen (see Calling Up Info in this chapter).
Displays context related help function for all screens and error messages (see Calling
Up Help in this chapter).
If the machine no longer reacts to operator inputs, a software reset can be initiated via
this button (see Reset With the Stop Button in Chapter 7).
The buttons i, ?, Stop are always accessible during operation. Info and help screens can
be reached any time.
2-28 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2
paperinfo1
paperinfo2
The status bar shows:
– Name of the current screen.
– Remaining length, width, and surface of the paper in the inserted magazines
– Information if the same laser point has been adjusted for both papers or if they are
different (see Copying of laser points for calibration of a paper configuration in
Chapter 5). If the same laser point is adjusted for both papers an equal sign is
displayed in the paper roll symbol
– Date and time
The message area displays:

– Information, warnings, requests
– Error messages
Note
All information, warnings, prompts, and error messages are saved in the error listing.
Access to the error listing is provided by pressing the buttons i and Error list (see
section Error List Display in this chapter).
Depending on the type of message ist appearance may have different consequences:
− The operator can continue working without confirmation or action.
− An error must be repaired before working can be continued
(see Troubleshooting, Chapter 7).
− Some messages can be ignored several times until the machine forces the operator to
react.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-29

2.6.2 Buttons
Depending on the type of button pressing them starts the following actions:
i, ? and Stop
see above, section Information Area
in the menu bar: call up the submenu

others: to start, interrupt or stop an action
open the pulldown menu (see below, Pulldown Menus)
open the input screen to enter texts or numbers (see below, Input Screens)
switching on or off, or
activating or deactivating a function
scrolling through the pulldown menus
– entries selected in a pulldown menu can be shifted to another menu (select

entry/press, then press arrow button)
– The sequence of entries in a pulldown menu can be changed (select entry/press and
move it up or down with the arrow keys)
– Change values step by step (e.g. corrections for image processing)
move all entries included in a pulldown menu to another menu
2-30 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.6.3 Pulldown Menus

2
When the operator touches a button that allows a selection, a pull-down menu opens. If
the complete list of entries is too long to show, the arrow keys are displayed for scrolling.
Select an entry:
Press the respective entry in the menu.
311
Confirm the selection (only required if the ok

button is displayed above the pulldown
menu; see screen on the left):
Press ok.
022_type
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-31

2.6.4 Popup Windows

Popup windows are opened in the active screen if a confirmation or an action by the
operator is required:
– Reset popup (only d-lab.2/2plus)
Comes up after the film stop key (STOP key on the scanner housing) has been pressed.
(See Problems During Scanning in Chapter 7.)
– Error popup
Appears in case of wrong operator entries, consistency errors and system errors. These
errors must be repaired immediately to be able to continue working (see Display of
Error Messages in Chapter 7).
If several errors occur at the same time, the error popup windows shows arrow buttons
which allow scrolling through the messages.
054
– Warning popup
Comes up if data could be lost, e.g. if changes were made in a screen and the screen is
then left with Clear.
– Info popup
Operator prompting; queries when changing to a different screen, indication of still
running processes.
2-32 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

– Question popup 2
Safety prompt; appears e.g. if a configuration is to be deleted. Depending on the
question different buttons may be displayed.
066
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-33

2.6.5 Input Screens

2.6.5.1 Entering Text
047
If the operator presses a button, which requires the input of text (alphanumeric
characters), an input screen opens automatically showing a
− Keyboard layout
Inputs by pressing the keys
The language for the character set (special national characters) can be set up
individually for each user (see Defining Users and User Rights in Chapter 4).
− Display area (blue field) and if applicable a button above the keyboard layout. Here the
entered characters are displayed. This way the user can check right away how much of
the entered text will appear in a pulldown menu (width of the display area) or in a
button.
− OK key to terminate the input and return to the previous screen.
2-34 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.6.5.2 Entering Numbers

2
600
If the operator presses a button, which requires the input of numbers an input screen
opens automatically showing a
– Numeric keypad layout
Input by pressing the keys
– Display field
– OK key to terminate the input and return to the previous screen.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-35


011
Reorder lists can be entered via the image of a reorder keyboard on the touchscreen (see
Working in Reorder Print Mode in Chapter 6). The function of the individual keys is
explained in the following table.
Keys Functions
YMCD Color / density corrections: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Density
ACT, DCT, SHP Corrections: Area contrast (ACT), Detail contrast (DCT), Sharpness (SHP)
SAT , Correction: Saturation (SAT)
Comma to separate the frame numbers
0 to 9 Entry of numbers
- For the input of negative corrections: Minus
For the input of frame numbers: Hyphen
A, X Letters for DX code
Column-wise navigation in the reorder list
In reorder list: line-wise navigation
After pressing a line in the configuration column: scrolling through the list of configurations
OK Completing an input in a reorder list
Pulldown menu during configuration: accept selection and close the pulldown menu
DEL Deletes one position in the frame number field, e.g. 1A-3A, 13A
Deletes the complete number in the PpF field (prints per frame)
Inactive in the configuration field and in the correction field. Wrong entries in the correction
field are corrected by reentry; if no correction is desired, 0 must be typed in.
2-36 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

dlabb005
To speed up the handling of reorders and corrections (YMCD), it is recommended to use

the optional reorder keyboard: type 8070/700 (ABC Code 5KXZN).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-37

2.7 Main Menus
m0
The main menus are activated via the menu bar at the bottom of the screen. The menu
bar is displayed on all screens. The main menus can always be called up with the
following exceptions:
– a popup window is open
– the help screen is open
Menu functions which cannot be accessed are faded (gray) in the screen. Menu functions
cannot be accessed if
– the logged-in user is not permitted to use this function (see Defining Users and
User Rights in Chapter 4),
– the required additional software has not been installed or enabled (e.g. pricing).
– the respective function is not available in the minilab.).
2-38 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

m1
– The menu Print mode offers access to all available functions for image editing and
printing (see Production, Chapter 6) (grayed out functions are inactive).
m2
– Via the Settings menu country and user-specific parameters, machine settings and
settings for digital orders can be entered, print and order configurations can be defined
and prices can be entered for the pricing of orders. Settings can be saved and loaded
again (see Settings and Configurations, Chapter 4).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-39

m3
− View the Test menu various tests for machine testing and calibration can be started
before and during production (see Tests, Chapter 5).
This menu also provides access to the service functions (see Service Manual
“Repair”).
2-40 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

m4
− The Pricing menu allows pricing of orders and printing of price labels if the pricing
software has been enabled and the label printer connected (available as option, see
Pricing Settings in Chapter 4, Printing Price Labels (Option) in Chapter 6, as well as the
operating instructions included with the label printer).
Furthermore statistic programs can be called up via this menu (daily counter and total
counter for prints, index prints, orders, scanned negatives (only d-lab.2/2plus), paper
consumption; see Saving and Displaying Statistics in Chapter 6).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-41

m5
– Via the End of work menu the machine is switched off completely or partly (sleep
mode) (see End of Work and Shutdown in this chapter).
Furthermore another user can log in via this menu (see Login of Another User in this
chapter).
Further menus can be called up with i and ?:

− Status information (see Calling Up Info in this chapter)
– Help (see Calling Up Help in this chapter)
2-42 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.8 Calling Up Info

2
Information can be called up in all screens with the i button:
Press the i button in the information area:

The screen Status information opens.
052_dlab (Fig. shows d-lab.2)
052_netlab (Fig. shows netlab.2plus)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-43

The screen shows the operating hours of the scanner lamp and the machine (computer)
(counter reset for operating hours of the scanner lamp: see Replacing the Scanner
Lamp and Counter Reset in Chapter 8).
The screen shows the operating hours the machine (computer).
Further information is shown in separate screens:

– Film drive Info (only d-lab.2/2plus), Printer Info and Paper Processor Info
are called up by touching the respective assembly in the figure
– Order Info, Version Info, Error list
are called up by pressing the buttons with the respective names
(see following pages).
Note
If the user logged in as user Service one more button is displayed: Service.
If an error occurred the affected module is shown in red.
Press the button on the module to localize

the error more precisely:
The following screen then shows the
defective component in red (see example
on the left).
Press Back to exit the screen.
067_red (Fig. shows d-lab.2/2plus)
2-44 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


2
Call up:
Press the button on the film drive module in
the Status Information screen:
The Film drive Info screen opens.
064
Displayed are:
− Graphic representation of the film drive
− If an error occurred the affected part of the film drive is shown in red.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-45

2.8.2 Printer Info

Call up:
Press the button on the Printer module in
the Status Information screen:
The Printer Info screen opens.
067 (Fig. shows d-lab.2/2plus)
Displayed are:
− Graphic representation of the paper drive with the number of prints in the individual
stations.
− Information about the paper in the paper magazines: paper configuration, width,
remaining length.
− If an error occurred the affected part of the Printer is shown in red.
2-46 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.8.3 Paper Processor Info

2
Call up:
Press the button on the Paper Processor
module in the Status Information screen:
The Paper Processor Info screen opens.
065 (Fig. shows d-lab.2)
Displayed are:
− Graphic representation of the solution tanks and the dryer, also showing the number of
prints currently running through.
− Order numbers of the orders in the Paper Processor.
− Time remaining until the last print is exited.
− Actual / nominal temperatures of the solutions and the dryer.
− If an error occurred the affected part of the Paper Processor is shown in red.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-47

2.8.4 Order Info

Call up:
Press the Order Info button in the Status
Information screen.
The Order Info screen opens.
069
Display of the number of orders not yet printed:
– APS reorders
– Network orders
− Orders stored for file prints (backup)
2-48 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.8.5 Version Info

2
Call up:
Press the Version Info button in the Status
Information screen:
The Versions Info screen opens.
063
Displayed are:
− Current versions of the installed software
− Current versions of the installed firmware
− Serial number of the hardware
− License ID of the machine
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-49

2.8.6 Displaying the Error List

All messages displayed in the information field are saved in the error list.
Press in this order:

i
Error list
The Error list screen opens.
062
If the error list should only display the errors,

which occurred after the last start or reset:
Deactivate Show all errors.
If a message in the error list is not shown
completely:
Touch the message.
The complete text appears in the field below
the error list.
Deactivate Show all errors.
If a message should be removed from the list:
Select the message and press Remove
selection.
Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting for the repair of errors.
2-50 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.9 Activating Help

2
The help function can be called up in all screens with the ? button:
Press the ? button in the information field:

The Help screen opens.
051
The help screen shows a presentation of the screen in which the ? button was pressed, as
well as other buttons.
Using the help function for the activated screen

In the screen press the subject for which you
want help (button, field, list, etc.).
The help text is displayed.
Press the arrow ( ) in the help text to go
back to the original screen.
Press the arrow right of the help text to
scroll through the help text.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-51

Further help
In the help screen
Press Help index to call up the help index.
The press the keyword in the alphabetical
listing to call up the corresponding help text.
Press Error Help Index to call up the
alphabetic list of the error messages.
Documentation
offers access to the Operation section of the
Operation Manual (not yet implemented)
Exit from the Help screen

Press Close
to go back to the screen in which ? was
pressed.
Note
In the help window, i and Stop are accessible, but not the menu bar.
2-52 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2.10 Ejecting the ZIP

2
A ZIP disc inserted in the drive can be ejected when the ejection button on the ZIP drive
is pressed or by input of the respective command.
Can be called up from any screen:

Press the i button in the information area:
The screen Status information opens.
Press Eject Zip:
The ZIP disc is ejected.
052_dlab (Fig. shows d-lab.2)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 2-53

2-54 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Changing Chemicals
3 Changing Chemicals
3.1 Safety Information ........................................................................................................................................................3-1

3
3.2 Chemical Sets.................................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Changing Chemical Solutions (MSC/d-lab Chemicals)..................................................................................3-4
3.4 Mixing Replenisher Chemicals (d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box)............................................................................3-10
3.5 Settings and Tests for the Chemicals.................................................................................................................3-11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 3-i

Changing Chemicals d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
3-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

3.1 Safety Information

CAUTION!
Less poisonous, irritating, and caustic substances.
3
All photographic developers contain substances, which may irritate the skin, the mucous
membrane and the eyes, and which may cause allergic skin reactions affecting very
sensitive persons. For this reason, avoid long or repeated skin contact, especially with
developer solutions.
Whenever you work with chemicals:
– Wear protection gloves und if possible change them daily.
– Wear an apron / protection clothes and clean them after use.
– Wear protection goggles.
– Wash any chemicals which splashed on your skin immediately with fresh water.
– If, in spite of these precautions, splashes do get into your eyes, wash them
immediately with plenty of water, pulling apart the eyelids. Then consult an oculist!
– Observe the safety instructions on the chemical packages.
Store new chemicals in a safe place, the same applies to exhausted chemicals until their
disposal. Mind chemical residues in the boxes (Easy Paper Box).
Observe the regulations for environmental protection (consider the disposal information
on the chemical packages; also see Chapter 10).
Collect leaking chemicals immediately and dispose of these chemicals. The above
regulations must be observed.
Remove chemical splashes on the covers of the Minilab immediately (they may cause
stains).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 3-1

For some steps in during the changing of chemicals, the tank section cover of the Paper
Processor must be opened.
CAUTION!
Risk of injuries if you unlock the opened cover accidentally or carelessly (by
pressing PUSH) and the cover closes.
The tank section cover must only be opened if required by the work situation!
When opening the cover make sure it engages in the open position.
To avoid paper jams only open the cover if there is no paper in the Paper Processor (for
information whether there is paper in the Paper Processor or not, press the i button – see
Paper Processor Info in Chapter 2).
Open the cover:

Open the top cover until it engages (only
engages in vertical position).
Close the cover:
Support the cover with one hand.
Press (PUSH) to unlock the cover.
Close the cover
dlab2595 (Fig. shows d-lab.2/2plus)
3-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

3.2 Chemical Sets

The minilabs d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, and netlab.2plus work with the following two chemical
kits:
– Chemicals for first or new mixing of chemical processing solutions: MSC/d-lab 3
chemicals
– Color Developer (CD)
– Bleach-fix (BX)
– Stabilizer (SB)
The MSC/d-lab chemicals are delivered as concentrated solutions and must be mixed
first (diluted) by the operators. The tanks for these processing solutions (machine
tanks) are located in the Paper Processor below the top cover of the tank section.
– Replenisher chemicals: They are used to replenish automatically the above mentioned
chemicals during production.
The replenisher chemicals are offered in the d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box. The box is inserted
in the machine and the mixing process then starts automatically.
Two types of the d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box are available (see below).
The MSC/d-lab processing solutions in the machine must be changed
– after longer down periods of the machine (several weeks and longer);
– in case of production problems, which are the result of chemical problems, e.g.
contamination of the processing solutions.
The replenisher chemicals must be replaced when they have been used up. One
preparation is sufficient for about 100 m2 of color negative paper (1 m2 of paper
corresponds to approx. 65 prints, size 10x15 (4x6”)).
Note
AgfaPhoto papers and AgfaPhoto chemicals are adapted to produce optimum results.
Therefore we recommend to use only AgfaPhoto papers and MSC/d-lab chemicals.
Order numbers (ABC Codes) for MSC/d-lab chemicals

MSC/d-lab tank CD for 2 x 18.5 liters:
contains concentrate for two CD tank fillings 5HX5G
MSC/d-lab tank BX for 2 x 18 liters:
contains concentrate for two BX tank fillings 5HX7L
MSC/d-lab tank SB for 12 x 11-12.5 liters:
contains concentrate for three SB tank fillings 5HX8N
Order number (ABC code) for the d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box:
d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box for 110 m² (2 boxes) 5KPGL
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 3-3

3.3 Changing Chemical Solutions (MSC/d-lab Chemicals)

1 Wet section
1 2 LED docking station
3 Drain taps for machine tanks
4 Docking station
5 Replenisher tanks
6 Water tanks
6
5
4
3
2
Note
Mixing the MSC/d-lab chemicals for first machine operation is explained in the
Installation folder. If the machine is put back in operation after a longer down time
(more than two weeks, see Chapter 11) mix the chemicals also as described in the
Installation folder.
CAUTION!
Whenever you work with chemicals observe the Safety Information at the
beginning of this chapter!
The chemical tank solutions (developer – CD, bleachfix – BX, stabilizer – SB) are changed
in several steps:
1. Prepare the machine tanks (drain the old chemicals, clean the tanks, and check the
hoses).
2. Remove the chemical filters.
3. Mix the MSC/d-lab chemicals.
4. Insert the new chemical filters.
Afterwards
– the replenisher chemicals must be mixed (see Changing Replenisher Chemicals
(d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box)) in this chapter);
– various settings must be entered or checked
(see Settings and Tests for Chemicals in this chapter);
– tests must be made (see Settings and Tests for Chemicals in this chapter).
3-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

WARNING!
Only work with liquids if the machine is switched off (main breaker off). This is to
avoid short circuits and electric shock by splashing or leaking chemicals, and
splashing or leaking water.
When you change chemicals only switch on the machine if this is required for the 3
type of work.
Only operate the machine with closed Paper Processor cover.
1. Preparation of machine tanks
Note
When working on the machine tanks (open Paper Processor cover): To make sure that
no chemistry splashes on the machine, we recommend to fasten the plastic covers
(splash guard) of the accessory box on the machine. Remove possible chemical
splashes on the covers of the Minilab immediately (they may cause stains).
Keep containers, which can be closed, for

collecting the old chemicals and the
cleaning water (capacity 2 x 20 liters each
for developer – CD and bleachfix – BX,
50 liters for stabilizer – SB).
Shut down the machine as described in End
of Work and Shutdown in Chapter 2 and
switch off the main breaker.
Open the door bottom left side on the Paper
Processor.
Connect a hose on all taps on the right (1),
one after the other, open the tap and drain
the old solution into the container.
Close all taps (1), close the door.
dlab2601
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 3-5

Remove the bottom panel in the middle of

the Paper Processor (loosen the screw).
Fill the replenisher tank with water until the
lower level sensors are covered to avoid the
request for Easy Paper Box connection.
Open the cover of the tank section; make
sure that the cover engages in vertical
position.
1 Remove all crossovers and put them aside.

Do not stack the crossovers so as not to
damage the rollers and paper guide surfaces.
Check if the lock of the racks (on the rear
edge of the tank section) is closed.
Then fill all machine tanks (1) with warm
water (approx. 30 °C) until the solution level
reaches the level of the overflow.
Insert the crossovers again:
Mind their positions (colored markings).
Close the tank section cover:
Close the cover.
G_GG703
Check the hose positioning (behind the
Paper Processor doors or panels bottom left,
bottom center, and top left):
no leakage, sharp bends or squeezing.
The hoses must be free of air bubbles
(bubbles in the hoses result in incorrect
calibration of the pumps and thus in
problems in the production).
Switch on the machine (main breaker) and
run it for approx. 10 minutes to rinse the
circulation system and flush out any possible
chemical remainders.
Shut down the machine via End of work >
Shutdown and switch off the main breaker.
3-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Open the door bottom left side on the Paper

Processor.
Connect a hose on all taps on the right (1),
one after the other, open the tap and drain 3
the cleaning water completely into the
container.
Close all taps, close the door.
Keep the cleaning water safely until its
disposal.
Note
Empty the replenisher tanks only after the
machine has started up with chemicals,
otherwise the request to connect an Easy
Paper Box comes too soon.
2. Removing the chemical filters

position.
Remove the chemical filters and put them in
a lab tray.
Remove the used filter cartridges from their
holders and keep them safely until their
disposal.
dlab2510
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 3-7

3. Mixing the MSC/d-lab chemicals

The MSC/d-lab chemicals are mixed directly in the machine tanks.
Attach the splash guard.

Remove all crossovers and put them aside.
Check if the lock of the racks (on the rear
edge of the tank section) is closed.
Fill the machine tanks with warm water
(approx. 30 °C) about half-way up:
SB1 – SB4: approx. 6 liters each;
BX and CD: approx. 9 liters each.
Fill the concentrated solutions in the tanks
or via funnel in the filter opening, according
to the following sequence:
- Stabilizer (SB)
- Bleachfix (BX)
- Color developer (CD)
CD SB1 SB3 Bleach-fix and developer consists of two or
BX SB2 SB4
dlab2512 (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus) three components, respectively, A, B (C). Add
the components in the sequence A – B (– C).
CAUTION!
To prevent contamination of the
chemicals against the paper transport
direction, the tanks must be filled in the
above mentioned order. In case of
contamination problems occur in
production.
Fill the machine tanks then with warm water

(approx. 30 °C) until the solution level
reaches the level of the overflow.
3-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4. Inserting chemical filters

Take the chemical filter cartridges from the
accessory box, rinse them in water to flush
out any loose fibers, and mount them on the
holders. 3
Insert the cartridges in the respective
openings according to the colored labels.
It may be necessary to turn the filter rods a
little so that the filters sit correctly.
dlab2510a
Close the cover.
Switch on the machine.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 3-9

3.4 Mixing Replenisher Chemicals (d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box)

Note
Use for all three minilabs (d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, and netlab.2plus) the d-lab.2 Easy Paper
Box (Order number: 5KPGL)!
d-lab.3 replenisher chemicals cannot be used!
Open the flap top right on the front side pf

the Paper Processor (snap lock).
Fill the central water tank until the upper
one of the two float sensors is activated or
the overflow indicator sticks out of the tank.
Close the flap again.
Open the docking station.
Remove the empty Easy Paper Box and, if
applicable, remove the splash guard.
Attach the new splash guard (included in the
Easy Paper Box shipment), then insert the
Easy Paper Box in the docking station with
the label facing up.
Close the docking station and switch on the
machine (main breaker).
The replenisher chemicals are now mixed
automatically. This is indicated by the constant
lighting of the LED on the machine panel left of
the docking station. During this procedure the
docking station is locked mechanically.
Note
There must always be a box present in the
docking station (to reduce oxidation at the
input nozzles):
After the LED switched off, either insert a

new (full) box as described above or leave
the old (empty) box in the docking station
until the user receives a message requesting
a new box.
1
G_GG124 (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus)
3-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

3.5 Settings and Tests for the Chemicals

– Set the nominal values for replenishment rates and temperatures, calibrate the water
pumps (see Paper Processor Settings in Chapter 4).
– For chemical tests see Checking the Process in Chapter 5. 3
– For machine Calibration; see Printer Tests: Paper Balance Test (PBL) and Master
Balance Test (MBL) in Chapter 5.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 3-11

3-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Settings and Configurations
4 Settings and Configurations
4.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Defining the User Interface, Defining Users, Assigning Rights ...................................................................4-5
4.2.1 Defining the User Interface ...................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.2 Defining Users and User Rights ...........................................................................................................4-6 4
4.2.2.1 Defining a New User ....................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.2.2 Changing the Settings for an Existing User.........................................................................4-9
4.2.2.3 Overview: Rights, which can be Assigned to a User......................................................4-10
4.2.2.4 Defining a User as Standard User.........................................................................................4-11
4.2.2.5 Changing the User .....................................................................................................................4-11
4.2.3 Deleting a User........................................................................................................................................4-11
4.3 Defining Paper Width, Surfaces and Cut Lengths..........................................................................................4-12
4.3.1 Defining Paper Widths..........................................................................................................................4-12
4.3.2 Deleting Paper Widths .........................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.3 Defining Paper Surfaces.......................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.4 Renaming Surfaces ................................................................................................................................4-16
4.3.5 Deleting Surfaces ...................................................................................................................................4-16
4.3.6 Paper Codes according to AgfaPhoto Standard ..........................................................................4-17
4.3.7 Defining Cut Lengths ............................................................................................................................4-18
4.3.8 Overview: Print Sizes ............................................................................................................................4-19
4.3.9 Deleting Cut Lengths ............................................................................................................................4-20
4.4 Entering Machine Settings .....................................................................................................................................4-21
4.4.1 Setting Date and Time..........................................................................................................................4-22
4.4.2 Setting the Timer: Start and Shutdown..........................................................................................4-23
4.4.3 Defining the Standard User ................................................................................................................4-26
4.4.4 Installing / Activating Software .......................................................................................................4-27
4.4.4.1 Activating Software ...................................................................................................................4-27
4.4.4.2 Installing Software from CD...................................................................................................4-29
4.4.5 Printer Settings .......................................................................................................................................4-30
4.4.7 Paper Processor Settings.....................................................................................................................4-34
4.4.7.1 Setting the Replenishment Rates ........................................................................................4-34
4.4.7.2 Setting the Temperatures and Calibrating the Sensors ...............................................4-36
4.4.7.3 Calibrating the Water Pumps ................................................................................................4-38
4.4.8 Other Settings..........................................................................................................................................4-43
4.4.8.1 General settings..........................................................................................................................4-44
(only for d-lab.2/2plus) ............................................................................................................4-45
4.4.8.3 Settings for digital orders........................................................................................................4-46
4.4.8.4 The dTFS function (digital Total Film Scanning: Image enhancement
in digital print files)...................................................................................................................4-47
4.4.8.5 Autosave settings.......................................................................................................................4-49
4.5 Adjusting the Production Balance .......................................................................................................................4-50
4.5.1 General Information Regarding the Production Balance ........................................................4-53
4.5.2 Setting the Correction Impact (for Color Negatives and Digital).........................................4-54
4.5.3 Setting Sharpness - Edges (for Color Negatives and Digital) ................................................4-55
4.5.4 Setting the Saturation (for Color Negatives and Digital) ........................................................4-56
4.5.5 Setting Sharpness - Grain (for Color Negatives and Digital)..................................................4-57
4.5.6 Area Contrast (for Color Negatives and Digital)..........................................................................4-58
4.5.7 Setting Detail Contrast (for Color Negatives and Digital).......................................................4-59
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-i

Settings and Configurations d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
4.5.8 Brightness correction (for color negatives and digital) ........................................................... 4-60
4.5.9 Setting Color and Density Corrections (Digital) ......................................................................... 4-61
4.5.11 Automatic red eyes correction (for color negatives and digital).......................................... 4-61
4.5.15.1 Dominant Parameters...............................................................................................................4-66
4.5.15.2 Parameters for Artificial Light Detection...........................................................................4-68
4.5.15.3 Parameter for Shift Correction...............................................................................................4-70
4.5.18.1 Color Corrections........................................................................................................................4-75
4.5.18.2 DX Corrections ............................................................................................................................4-76
4.6 Settings for Network Orders .................................................................................................................................. 4-78
4.6.1 Settings for Remote Orders: File Print ........................................................................................... 4-79
4.6.2 Settings for Remote Orders: Autosave ........................................................................................... 4-80
4.6.3 Settings for Network Orders............................................................................................................... 4-81
4.6.4 Settings for d-workflow........................................................................................................................ 4-82
4.7 Defining and Editing Print Configurations ....................................................................................................... 4-84
4.7.1 Defining and Editing Paper Configurations.................................................................................. 4-85
4.7.2 Defining and Editing the Backprint Configurations .................................................................. 4-87
4.7.3 Indexprint Configurations.................................................................................................................... 4-93
4.7.3.1 Importing Indexprint Layouts.................................................................................................4-93
4.7.3.2 Defining and Editing a Indexprint Configuration:...........................................................4-94
4.7.4 Defining and Editing Correction Configurations ........................................................................ 4-97
4.7.5 Defining and Editing Autosave Configurations.........................................................................4-100
4.7.6 Defining and Editing a Front Print Configuration ....................................................................4-104
4.7.7 Combiprint Configurations ...............................................................................................................4-106
4.7.7.1 Importing Combiprint Layouts............................................................................................ 4-106
4.7.7.2 Defining and Editing a Combiprint Configurations:.................................................... 4-107
4.8 Defining and Editing Order Configurations ....................................................................................................4-109
4.8.1 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Single Type...........................................4-112
4.8.1.1 Film Mask: 135, 120, 110
4.8.2 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Package Type ......................................4-118
4.8.3 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Combiprint Type.................................4-120
4.8.3.1 Film Mask: 135, 120, 110
4-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.8.3.3 Film Mask: File Print .............................................................................................................. 4-122

4.8.4 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Reproduction Type............................ 4-123
4.8.5 Defining a Configuration as Standard Configuration............................................................. 4-125
4.9 Deleting a Print or Order Configuration ......................................................................................................... 4-127
4.10 Pricing Configurations........................................................................................................................................... 4-128
4.11 Save and Load Settings and Configurations ................................................................................................. 4-129
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-iii

4-iv 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.1 Overview
All settings are called up via the Settings menu in the main menu bar at the bottom of
the screen. The menu bar is accessible in all screens.
Note
Functions not available for the netlab.2plus are shown in gray in the corresponding
screens. 4
Note
The settings and configurations explained in this chapter can only be made by a user
who has the rights and permissions for Machine settings, Configurations, and Edit
pricing (see Defining Users and User Rights in this chapter).
Functions not available are shown in gray in the corresponding screens.
Note
As long as there is still paper in the paper drive of the Paper Processor only the print
configurations can be called up in the Settings menu.
Information about the current processing status can be checked any time:
Press the i button in the information area.

Touch the desired assembly in the opening
screen.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-1

Pressing the Settings button opens a menu with five options:
m2
– Print configurations
Set up print configurations for production including all sub-configurations.
A print configuration is a block of settings (sub-configurations). It includes all
parameters required to print a certain print product of a certain original (paper,
backprint, index print, etc.).
– Machine settings
Adjust the machine to the user’s needs and the lab’s requirements.
– Pricing settings
Input of all prices (pricing software + label printer optional).
– Save settings
All settings will be saved: machine settings, print configurations and pricing settings
(hard disk of the PC, Zip, or diskette) (Data backup)
– Load settings
You can select between loading of print configurations, machine settings, and/or
pricing settings (in case of data loss caused by computer problems).
4-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Note
The language of the screens on the Minilab
depends on the logged in user. Therefore we
recommend to make the settings in the
following sequence:
Define the standard for the user interface

(country-specific settings: language,
measuring systems, etc.; see Setting the 4
User Interface in this chapter).
Define a user: enter a name for every
operator of the laboratory, define a password
and assign access rights (see Defining a
New User in this chapter).
Make all other changes as required.
Settings, configurations Call-up via the buttons see sections

Date and time Settings Setting date and time
Machine settings
Date/Time
Timer, switch-on and off times, Settings Setting startup and shutdown times
Holidays and company holidays Machine settings (Timer)
(calendar) Switch on
Country specific settings (user Settings Setting the user interface
interface) Machine settings
User interface
Defining a user with password, Settings Defining users and user rights
language, user rights Machine settings
User manager
Defining a standard user Settings Defining a standard user
Machine settings
Switch on
Printer settings Settings Printer settings
Machine settings
Printer
Scanner settings Settings Scanner settings (scratch correction,
(only d-lab.2/2plus) Machine settings scanning crop)
Scanner
Paper Processor settings Settings Paper Processor settings
Machine settings
PP replenishment,
PP temperature,
PP pumps
(PP = Paper Processor)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-3

Settings, configurations Call-up via the buttons see sections

Installing / activating software Settings Installing / activating software
Machine settings
Software
Other settings: Machine / lab Settings Other settings
identification, presettings for orders Machine settings
Other settings
Setting the production balance Settings Setting the production balance
Machine settings
Production balance
Settings for network orders Settings Settings for digital orders (network
Machine settings orders)
Network orders
Import of layouts for combi-prints Settings Importing index print layouts
and index prints Machine settings Importing combi-print layouts
Index print layout
Combi-print layout
Defining paper width, surfaces and Settings Defining paper width, surfaces and
cut lengths Machine settings cut lengths
Surface
Paper settings
Cut length
Print configurations: Settings Defining and editing print
creating sub-configurations Print configurations configurations
Paper
Back print
Index print
Correction
Autosave
Front print
Combi-print
Print configurations: Settings Defining and editing order
combining sub-configurations with Print configurations configurations
order configurations: Single, Package, Order
Combi-print, Reproduction.
If the pricing + label printer option is Settings Pricing settings
available, set up price categories. Pricing settings
Creating a backup copy of the Settings Saving and loading settings and
settings and configurations Save settings configurations
4-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.2 Defining the User Interface, Defining Users, Assigning Rights
4.2.1 Defining the User Interface

The settings of the user interface offer various country-specific settings, such as language
for the screens, character set for the on-screen keyboard, format for date and time, etc.
Therefore we recommend to make the settings for the user interface first. If then the users 4
are set up, these parameters are already preset (see Defining Users and User Rights in
this chapter).
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
User interface
The screen User interface, settings opens.
Select the data for the user-specific settings:
Press Language
and select the required language from the
list. Available languages are German,
English, French, Italian, Spanish, Polish
(without help screens and texts), Japanese,
Chinese (simplified), and Korean..
Press Keyboard
and select the desired language (character
set) for the keyboard on the touchscreen (see
Input Screens in Chapter 2) from the list
(languages as above).
Beep touch
activate/deactivate by pressing
If the function is activated, a beep comes
038 when you press a button.
Press one after the other and select the
desired format from the list:
Measur. system
Temperature
Decimal sign
Num. separator
Time format
Separator (below time format)
Date format
Separator (below date format)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-5

Note
The standard corresponding to the selected language is suggested automatically.
The selected date and time formats appear in the timer settings and in the back print
(see Timer Settings in this chapter and/or Defining and Editing Back Print
Configurations in this chapter).

a.m.
p.m.
and select the respective term from the list.
Note
If the 24-hour format was selected, the buttons
for a.m. and p.m. cannot be activated.
Press Save.
Modifications become effective only after
saving.
4.2.2 Defining Users and User Rights
Note
The settings for the User interface must be set up before, since they are required for
the user-specific settings (see Setting the User Interface in this chapter).
Any number of users can be defined, at least two users are necessary.
– Administrator with user rights for all functions, except Service
– Service with unrestricted rights:
all functions + Service
4-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.2.2.1 Defining a New User

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
User manager
The User screen opens. 4
Press New.
305
The User manager screen opens.

Press Password
Type the password (max. 4 numbers) for the
new user.
Press Repeat.
Type the password again for confirmation.
Note
The entered passwords cannot be read or reset
anywhere outside this screen! If you forget the
password for a user the corresponding settings
cannot be changed any more!
036_neu
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-7

Press the buttons Language and Keyboard

one after the other if you want to change the
suggested setting for the new user and
select the desired language (preset are the
settings made under User interface – see
Defining the User Interface in this
chapter).
Beep touch (if the function has been
activated, an acoustic signal comes with
every operator input or keystroke).
Press the button, if you want to change this
setting for the new user.
Preview freq.
Press and select the frequency from the list.
Frequency in which the images are moving
in the preview for Autoprint, Reorder, and
File print (see Working with Print Modes
Autoprint / Reorder / File print in Chapter 6).
Presetting: 3 seconds.
Assigning user rights:
Press the buttons for the user rights you
want to assign to the user (see Overview:
Rights, which can be Assigned to a User in
this chapter).
Press Save as.
Enter the user name, (max. 20 characters),
special characters are not allowed:
„ / \ [ ] : ; | = + * ? < >)
4-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.2.2.2 Changing the Settings for an Existing User

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
User manager
The User screen opens. 4
Select the user you want to change the
settings for.
Press Edit.
305
The User manager screen opens.

If you want to change the password:
Press Old password and type the current
password.
Press Password and type the new password
(max. 4 characters).
Press Repeat and type the new password
again for confirmation.
Note
The entered password cannot be read or reset
anywhere outside this screen! If you forget the
password the corresponding settings cannot be
changed any more!
If you want to change the settings press

036 Language and Keyboard one after the
other, and select the desired language
and/or character set from the list.
Press Beep touch, if you want to change
that setting.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-9

Change user rights:

Press the respective button to change the
settings (also see below: Overview:
Rights, which can be Assigned to a User).
Press Save.
This saves the changes under the
corresponding user name.
Note
If you press Save as the changes can be saved under a new user name. This is used to
define a new user; the settings for user under which Edit was activated, will not be
changed!
Enter the name of the new user, (max. 20 characters, special characters are not allowed
„ / \ [ ] : ; | = + * ? < >).
Note
Modifications become effective only after the next user login.
4.2.2.3 Overview: Rights, which can be Assigned to a User

Rights Button Description
Print modes Autoprint (only d-lab.2/2plus) D&P (develop and print: prints of negatives and slides)
Slide print and/or reversal First order (prints of mounted slides or reversal film)
film
(only d-lab.2/2plus)
Reorder (only d-lab.2/2plus) Reorder (prints of negatives)
File print Digital orders (image files loaded from storage media)
Preview using preview in the print modes Autoprint, Reorder, File print
Manual positioning Negatives that cannot be handled in Autoprint/Reorder mode:
(only d-lab.2/2plus) single negatives, strips without space detection.
Network orders File print (remote), Autosave (remote), Network orders from a
workstation
Settings Configurations Create / modify order configurations incl. sub-configurations
Machine settings Change the settings
Pricing Edit Pricing Create / edit pricing configurations
Test Test MBL (Master Balance Test), PBL (Paper Balance Test), Remote
Service
4-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.2.2.4 Defining a User as Standard User

See Defining a Standard User in this chapter.
4.2.2.5 Changing the User

See Login of Another User in Chapter 2. 4
4.2.3 Deleting a User

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
User manager
The User screen opens.
Select the user to be deleted from the list.
Press Delete.
305
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-11

4.3 Defining Paper Width, Surfaces and Cut Lengths

For the machine to detect which width and surface a paper inserted in the magazines has,
these parameters must first be defined on the machine and set up accordingly on the
paper magazines. The paper magazines are set up by slide switches (see Paper
Magazine Codes in Chapter 6), the set up in the machine is explained below.
The definition of cut lengths specifies the lengths in which the paper has to be cut.
Widths and surfaces are combined in paper configurations (see Defining and Editing
Paper configurations in this chapter). And in the order configurations these are then
combined with the cut lengths (see Defining and Editing Order Configurations in this
chapter).
4.3.1 Defining Paper Widths

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Paper settings
The screen Paper settings opens.
If you want to define a new paper width
press New.
If you want to change the code for an
existing paper width, select the desired
paper width (configuration) from the list and
press Edit.
310
4-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

090
Another Paper settings screen opens.

The buttons Switch 1 to Switch 4 define the code for the paper width. For the AgfaPhoto
standard code refer to the table in Paper Codes according to AgfaPhoto Standard in this
chapter. It is also possible to use other codes. However, make sure that the same code,
which is defined here, is set on the paper magazine for the respective width (see Paper
Magazine Codes in Chapter 6). Otherwise errors occur in production.
As required the switches Switch 1 to

Switch 4 can be switched on or off.
A switch is on if the slide on the paper
magazine is closed;
switch off means the slide on the paper
magazine is open.
Press Save as.
Type the name for the new paper width
or
press Save
(this option is only displayed if the screen
was called with Edit).
Up to 15 different paper width can be defined (the combination where all switches 1–4
are off cannot be used).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-13

4.3.2 Deleting Paper Widths

Settings
Machine settings
Paper settings
Select the configuration to be deleted from
the list and press Delete.
Press OK.
4.3.3 Defining Paper Surfaces

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Surface
The Surface configurations screen opens.
If you want to define a new surface
configuration press New.
If you want to change an existing surface
configuration select the configuration to be
changed from the list and press Edit.
306
4-14 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Surfaces screen opens.

Press PFDF surface and select the desired
entry from the list
Pulldown menu with the PFDF (Photo
Finishing Data Format) standardized surfaces
(important for network orders), e.g. Glossy,
Fine grained, Silk.
020
The buttons Switch 5 and Switch 6 define the code for the paper surface. For the
AgfaPhoto standard code refer to the table in Paper Codes according to AgfaPhoto
Standard in this chapter. It is also possible to use other codes. However, make sure that
the same code, which is defined here, is set on the paper magazine for the respective
surface (see Paper Magazine Codes in Chapter 6). Otherwise errors occur in production.
As required the switches Switch 5 and

Switch 6 can be switched on or off.
A switch is on if the slide on the paper
magazine is closed;
switch off means the slide on the paper
magazine is open.
Press Save as.
Enter the name of the new surface
configuration.
Or
press Save.
(This option is only displayed if the screen
was called with Edit.)
Up to four different surfaces can be defined (independent of width and cut length).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-15

4.3.4 Renaming Surfaces

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Surface
The Surface configurations screen opens.
Select the surface to be renamed from the
list and press Rename.
Enter the new name.
Press OK.
306
4.3.5 Deleting Surfaces

Settings
Machine settings
Surface
Select the surface to be deleted from the list
and press Delete.
Press OK.
4-16 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.3.6 Paper Codes according to AgfaPhoto Standard

The paper magazines have four slides for the paper width coding (slide 1–4) and two
slides for paper surface coding (slide 5 and 6). This allows coding of 15 paper widths and
four surfaces (the combination with all slides 1–4 open cannot be used).
The table shows the AgfaPhoto standard for the codes. Other codes can also be used,
however, each combination can only be used once.
The slides 1–6 correspond to the switches 1–6 in the screen Paper settings and Surfaces. 4
Their meaning is:
switch on / slide on paper magazine closed
■ switch off / slide on paper magazine open
* see following page
Switch / slide 1 2 3 4 5 6
Paper width
3.25 inch (82 mm) *
3.50 inch (89 mm)
3.75 inch (95 mm)
4.00 inch (102 mm)
4.50 inch (114 mm) *
4.75 inch (120 mm)
5.00 inch (127 mm)
6.00 inch (152 mm)
6.50 inch (165 mm)
7.00 inch (178 mm)
8.00 inch (203 mm)
8.25 inch (210 mm)
8.50 inch (216 mm)
10.0 inch (254 mm)
11.0 inch (279 mm)
12.0 inch (305 mm)
Surface
Glossy
Matt
User defined 1
User defined 2
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-17

* Paper width 3.25 inch (82 mm) and 4.50 inch (114 mm)
As there are only 15 different switch/slide combinations for 16 different paper width, only
15 of the 16 available paper width can be set at the same time. Therefore the same code
has been used in the AgfaPhoto standard for the two above mentioned widths. If you keep
the AgfaPhoto standard only one of these two width can actually be used.
If you want to use both widths, the code of another paper width must be used for one of
these two widths, e.g. the code for paper width 89 mm. But in this case the paper width
89 mm can no longer be used.
4.3.7 Defining Cut Lengths

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Cut length
The screen Setting of cut lengths opens.
Press New cut length and
enter the cut length (range 89–457 mm).
Press Save.
070
The defined cut lengths are displayed in pulldown menus when order configurations are
created or edited (see Defining and Editing Order Configurations in this chapter).
Note
For an overview of common print formats refer to the tables on the next page. Usually
the print sizes are rounded values. To get the actual size set the value of the cut length
(paper length) in the respective table.
4-18 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.3.8 Overview: Print Sizes
Standard print formats

for paper width 82–305 mm (3.25"–12")
upper line: paper length (=print length) in mm
lower line: common format name in mm x mm
4
82 89 95 102 120 127 152 165 178 203 210 254 280 305
(3.25") (3.5") (3.75") (4") (4.75") (5") (6") (6.5") (7") (8") (8.25") (10") (11") 12"
127 127 140 152 178 178 210 248 268 305 305 178 203 203
8 x 12 9 x 13 9.5 x 14 10 x 15 12 x 18 13 x 18 15 x 21 16 x 25 18 x 26 20 x 30 21 x 30 18 x 25 20 x 28 20 x 30
--- --- --- --- 80 89 102 110 127 133 140 330 356 457
--- --- --- --- 8 x 12 9 x 13 10 x 15 11 x 16 12 x 18 13 x 20 15 x 21 25 x 33 28 x 35 30 x 45
--- --- --- --- 82 89 102 120 127 144 152 356
--- --- --- --- 8 x 12 9 x 13 10 x 15 12 x 16 13 x 18 14 x 20 15 x 21 25 x 35
120 127 133 152 165 178 --- --- --- --- ---
8 x 12 9 x 13 9.5 x 13 10 x 15 12 x 16 13 x 18 --- --- --- --- ---
246 254 285 305
8 x 24 9 x 25 9.5 x 28 10 x 30
--- 120 127 133 152 165 --- --- --- --- ---
--- 9 x 12 9.5 x 13 10 x 13 12 x 15 13 x 17 --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- 89 95 120 127 --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- 9 x 12 9 x 13 12 x 15 13 x 17 --- --- ---
Special formats (APS films)

Negative formats:
Classic 15.6 mm x 22.3 mm
High Vision 15.6 mm x 27.4 mm
Panorama 6.9 mm x 27.4 mm
Paper width
Inch mm Inch mm Inch mm Inch mm
Classic 3.25x4.6 83x118 3.5x5.0 89x127 4x6.0 102x152 5x7.1 127x182
High Vision 3.25x5.7 83x145 3.5x6.0 89x152 4x7.0 102x178 5x8.8 127x223
Panorama 3.5x9.3 83x236 3.x10.0 89x254 4x11.4 102x290 5x3.5 127x89
Classic 6x8.6 152x218 6x4.0 152x102 8x5.6 203x142 8.25x5.8 210x147

High Vision 6x10.5 152x268 6x3.5 152x89 8x4.6 203x116 8.25x4.7 210x119
Panorama 8.25x3.5 210x89
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-19

4.3.9 Deleting Cut Lengths

Settings
Machine settings
Cut length
Select the cut length to be deleted from the
list and press Delete cut length.
Press OK.
4-20 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.4 Entering Machine Settings

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
005
The screen Machine settings opens.

The screen for Machine offers the buttons for the machine settings.
The settings for User interface and User name are explained in Defining the User
Interface, Defining Users, Assigning Rights in this chapter, the functions Combi-print
layout and Index print layout are described in Importing Combi-Print Layouts or Index
Print Layouts again in this chapter; all other settings are described below.
– Settings for the automatic Startup, like workdays with start times,
1st user, calendar (holidays, company holidays)
– Various settings for the Printer
Settings for the Scanner
Scratch correction and scan crop (for negative film and slides)
– Settings for the Paper Processor
PP Replenishment: to set the replenishment rates for the chemicals
PP Temperature: to set the temperatures for the chemicals and calibrate the sensors
PP Pumps: to calibrate water pumps
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-21

– Production balance
Settings influencing the complete production, e.g. color/density corrections.
– Network orders
Settings to receive and send remote orders (File print / Autosave) and network orders.
– Installing software
Update of minilab software and release of optional software components, such as
Pricing, Statistics, Combi-print, Index print, Slide, Scratch correction, Clickrate, Red-eye
correction
– Set date/time
– Other settings
Lab name/ID for the back print, settings for the automatic end of order (only
d-lab.2/2plus) and the automatic order number, as well as settings to prevent excess
prints in case of input errors.
4.4.1 Setting Date and Time

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Date/Time
The Set date/time screen opens.
Press Date and enter the date.
Press Time and enter the time.
Press Save.
068
4-22 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.4.2 Setting the Timer: Start and Shutdown

The Minilab has an integrated timer. This timer allows setting of start and shutdown
times:
– Start times:
An individual time can be set for every weekday at which the machine then switches
on automatically. Exceptions for these settings can be entered for certain days via a
calendar function, e.g. for bank holidays or company holidays.
– Sleep mode: 4
Normally the machine is switched off via End of work > Shutdown (see End of
work and Shutdown in chapter 2). However if you define that the shutdown routine
switches the machine to sleep mode, the main computer remains on for a set time.
During this time the statistics, for example, can be checked (on site or via remote
access if the machine is integrated in a network). The main computer is then switched
off at the set time (adjustable).
– Automatic shutdown:
It is possible to have the machine switch off automatically if there is no operator
action for a given time after switching on.
The timer settings for the next start can be changed during switch-off (see End of Work
and Shutdown in Chapter 2).
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Startup
033
The Startup settings screen opens.

The start time can be entered for every day of the week in the Start column. The time
entered in the Sleep mode/shutdown column defines if the machine is switched off
completely at the end of work, or the switch-off time for the sleep mode.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-23

Setting startup and shutdown times (Timer, Sleep mode):

In the Start column press the weekday for
which you want to enter or change the
switch-on time, and enter the desired start
time or select Off for free weekdays.
Note
When entering the start times, take into
account the approx. 1 hour’s preheating of the
solutions and the dryer until the operating
temperature is reached.
Press the button for the respective weekday

in the Sleep mode/shutdown column if
you want to set a time and enter the
respective time.
If you enter a time there, the machine will

go to sleep mode after shutdown, i.e. the
main computer remains on until the set
time.
If you select Off the machine switches off

complete with the shutdown routine, i.e. the
main computer switches off as well.
Set the time after which the machine switches off again automatically if there is no operator action after
switching on
Press the Shutdown when no action
button if you want to change the setting and
enter the desired time.
If this time after switching on has passed

without any operator action, the machine
switches off again automatically.
Printer Standby after
This option is inactive (intended for future
use).
4-24 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Calendar: define free days (e.g. bank holidays, company holidays):

The machine will not be started for the days
specified in the calendar.
Press Edit calendar.
The Calendar screen opens. The current date is
marked by a circle.
Use the arrow buttons to select month and 4
year (press arrow buttons).
Press the date of the free day.
black: work days
blue: off days
Press OK.
The screen Startup settings opens.
084
Save all settings

Press Save.
All settings entered in the Startup settings
screen are saved.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-25

4.4.3 Defining the Standard User

A standard user can be defined who is logs in when the machine starts. If the option
Automatic Login is selected in addition, there is no need to enter a password.
These settings can be cancelled at shutdown and replaced by new settings for the next
startup (see End of Work and Shutdown in Chapter 2).
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Startup
The screen Startup settings opens.
Press the upper button in the Standard Login
field and select the user from the user list
that should be logged in after startup.
Activate Automatic Login if the user should
be logged in automatically after switch on,
i.e. password input not necessary.
Press Save.
033
4-26 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.4.4 Installing / Activating Software

The software of the Minilab contains some additional programs which can only be used
after special activation:
– Pricing
– Saving statistics
– Import index print layouts (to print index prints; some preset layouts are included per 4
default)
– Import combi-print layouts (to print combi-prints; some preset layouts are included per
default)
– Red eye correction
– Printing of reversal film strips
– Scratch correction for slides (mounted slides and reversal film strips)
– Clickrate
Further software can be installed from CD (e.g. update of the machine software).
Note
Prior to the software installation or activation the settings must be saved (see Save
and Load Settings and Configurations in this chapter).
4.4.4.1 Activating Software

At first the license for the desired software must
be obtained:
Call up License ID: Press in this order:
i
Version Info
The Version Info screen opens.
Note the license ID (shown on the screen
bottom left).
Order the option from AgfaPhoto, specify the
license ID.
AgfaPhoto then provides an alphanumeric code,
which must be typed in during installation (see
below).
063
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-27

Activation:
Save settings as described in the section
Save and Load Settings and Configurations
Settings
Machine settings
Install software
Select the software component to be
activated from the list.
058
Press Install:
A safety check is displayed checking
whether the settings were saved on an
external storage medium. If you press No the
operation is stopped; in case of Yes another
screen opens.
Enter the key code.
The software will then be enabled.
Afterwards the system enforces a new start.
After restart the corresponding buttons are
active and layout files can be imported.
4-28 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.4.4.2 Installing Software from CD

Save settings as described in the section
Save and Load Settings and Configurations
Insert the CD.
Settings
Machine settings 4
Install software
Load CD
Install
A safety check is displayed checking whether the
settings were saved on an external storage
medium. If you press No the operation is stopped;
in case of Yes the software will be installed. Then
the system enforces a new start.
058
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-29

4.4.5 Printer Settings

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Printer
037
The screen Printer settings opens.
General settings:
– Overlapping The value indicates by how many per cent the digitized or digital image
is calculated bigger than the paper to be exposed.
Adjustment range: 0 to 10%
Default setting: 3%
Press the button and enter the required

value.
– Master Paper
Define the paper used most frequently in the laboratory as master paper. The MBL
(Master balance test) is printed on this paper.
Press the button and select the required

paper from the list.
4-30 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

MBL/PBL settings:
– Auto-MBL
If this Auto-MBL function is activated an automatic MBL (Master Balance Test) is
executed after the machine switched on and if the previous MBL was made on the
previous day or even before. This also applies if the machine is switched off after
midnight.
4
Press the button to activate / deactivate the

function.
– Max. calibr. Cycles

(Maximum numbers of calibration cycles) This setting defines how often the MBL
(Master Balance) test and the PBL (Paper Balance) test should be repeated
automatically if the results were not in tolerance.
Adjustment range: 1 to 10
Press the button Max. calibr. Cycles and

enter the required value.
Cleaning sheet settings:
If the number of cleaning sheets is set on a value > 0 (max. 20), the corresponding
number of cleaning sheets of the selected length runs through the machine prior to the
Auto-MBL-test. This cleans possible deposits on the transport rollers in the Printer and
Paper Processor. Otherwise deposits end up on the test paper strip and result in errors
during calibration.
Press No. of prints and enter the desired

quantity.
Press the Length button and enter the
required value.
After changing the settings:

Press Save.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-31


Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Scanner
The screen Scanner settings opens.
Enter the settings:
Scratch correction (for negatives) Press
the button to activate / deactivate the
function.
Scratch correction slide (for slides;
only available if option enabled; see
Installing / activating software in this
chapter)
Press the button to activate / deactivate
the function.
031
Scratches that are caused, for example, by dust in the camera or in the film drive can be
corrected. Deep scratches and holes cannot be corrected.
Note
If the scratch correction is active, dense areas of a negative, which includes
underexposed areas as well, may show color drifts.
Depending on the extent of the scratches on the film, the printing procedure may take
very long (long computing time).
For black-and-white slides (film and mounted), the slide scratch correction must be
inactive; otherwise it results in a black-and-white print not rue to "color".
4-32 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Scanning crop / Slide crop

Preset on 98%. This value defines the
part of the scanned negative or slide to
be exposed. If the value is increased the
prints may come out with black borders
if the positioning is not perfectly
aligned (machine tolerances).
4
Press the Scanning crop or Slide crop
button and enter the required value.
If you want to reset modified values to 98%,
press the button Reset to standard.
Press Save.
The changed values and settings are saved.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-33

4.4.7 Paper Processor Settings

The following settings and calibrations must be made for the Paper Processor:
– Setup of replenishment rates
– Setup of temperatures for chemical solutions / calibration of temperature sensors
– Calibration of water pumps
4.4.7.1 Setting the Replenishment Rates

The replenishment depends on the throughput, i.e. it depends on the actually processed
paper per day. To keep the production consistent, more chemicals and water must be
replenished with a low throughput rate than with a high throughput rate. Thereby we
differentiate between normal, increased, and maximum replenishment. This means that
the normal replenishment rates are increased by the entered factor for the increased or
the maximum replenishment rate. The software calculates every day the average
throughput of the last 5 days and sets the appropriate replenishment automatically. In
case of less than 10 m2 throughput the increased replenishment and for less than 5 m2
the maximum replenishment are automatically activated (these throughput thresholds are
preset default values; they can be changed if necessary; see section Paper Processor in
Chapter 9).
If the machine is put in operation for the first time or if it was switched off for several
days, an initial value must be entered (see next page).
CAUTION!
The preset reference values are adjusted to AgfaPhoto chemicals (Easy Box 110)
and AgfaPhoto paper. Therefore we recommend to change the set values only if
these value fail to produce optimum print results.
If necessary the value can be reset to default.
Note
The replenishment rates for the individual solutions DEV (developer), BX (bleach-fix),
and STB (stabilizer) cannot be changed separately. If the replenishment rate is changed
for one solution, the other two solutions are automatically changed by the same ratio.
4-34 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
PP Replenishment settings
The Replenishment settings screen opens.
4
Change the throughput-dependent
replenishment:
Press the button for the parameter you want
to change and type the desired value.
If the machine is put in operation for the first
time, or if the machine was off for a few
days:
press the Activate normal repl. button.
A standard initial value will be set. After
calculating a new 5-day average the system
switches automatically to throughput-based
replenishment.
If you want to reset all values to standard:
Press the button Reset to default.
Once all the required settings have been
034 entered:
Press the OK button.
Press ON to restart the machine.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-35

4.4.7.2 Setting the Temperatures and Calibrating the Sensors
WARNING!
The calibration of the sensors involves a safety risk, as the tank section of the
Paper Processor must be opened while the machine is on (risk of electric shock if
liquids are spilled).
Therefore we recommend to have the temperature adjustment and sensor
calibration made by a service technician.
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
PP temperatures
The screen Paper Processor temperature
settings opens.
014
Setting the nominal values:

Check the values entered in the buttons
DEV, BX, STB (developer, bleachfix,
stabilizer) and Dryer one after the other,
press the buttons, if necessary, and enter the
respective nominal temperatures:
DEV 40 °C ± 0.3
BX 38 °C ± 3
STB 37 °C ± 3
Dryer 65 °C
4-36 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Calibrating the temperature sensors
Note
The following steps must be carried out for all three solutions (DEV, BX, STB) one after
the other!
Press Readjust DEV [Readjust BX / 4

Readjust STB].
A window with a numeric keypad opens. The
temperature of the selected solution is
indicated in the first line of the dialog field.
Open the tank section cover of the Paper
Processor, take out the chemical filter of the
respective solution (DEV / BX / STB) and
place it in a lab tray.
CAUTION!
Observe the safety instructions for the
handling of chemicals (see Safety
Information in Chapter 3).
Using a calibrated thermometer, measure

the current temperature of the processing
solution through the free opening of the
filter holder, then put the chemical filter
back in.
Enter the measured temperature value via
the numeric keypad and press OK:
The sensor calibration is executed.
Clean the thermometer.
Proceed with the same routine for the other
two solutions.
Note
The four stabilizer solutions (STB) are
connected, i.e. they have the same
temperature.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-37

Resetting the values or calibration

In case of incorrect inputs or incorrect calibration of the temperature sensors the default
values can be activated:
If necessary press Reset reference and/or

Reset calibration.
4.4.7.3 Calibrating the Water Pumps
WARNING!
The calibration of the water pumps involves a safety risk, since you have to work
with liquids while the machine is on (risk of electric shock if liquids are spilled).
Therefore we recommend to have the calibration made by a service technician.
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
PP pumps
The PP pumps settings screen opens.
015
4-38 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Calibrating the pumps
Note
The following steps must be carried out for all three pumps (DEV-W, BX-W, STB-W) one
after the other!
4
Special tools
– Graduated beaker
– Extension hose
Press DEV-W [BX-W / STB-W] and enter

the calibration volume (water supply rate,
e.g. 100 ml).
position.
Remove the cover in front of the machine
tank DEV [BX / STB] (1 screw).
Note
There are two hoses below each cover, one for
chemicals and one for water. The water hose is
always the transparent hose, the hoses for the
chemicals are colored (blue, red, or yellow).
Pull out the water hose (incl. elbow).
G_PP101
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-39

The hose is very short. Therefore increase the

length with a piece of hose of matching
diameter.
Hold the end of the hose in a graduated
beaker.
Press
Activate DEV-W pump
[Activate BX-W pump /
Activate STB-W pump].
The buttons are only active if a supply rate

has been entered for this pump.
The pump switches on and pumps the set
amount of water into the measuring cylinder
more or less accurately, always depending
on the quality of the present calibration.
Then the pump switches off again.
015
Check the supplied amount of water on the
scale of the measuring cylinder.
Press the respective button
Readjust DEV-W pump
[Readjust BX-W pump /
Readjust STB-W pump] and enter the
measured supply rate.
The calibration of the pump is executed.

Empty the graduated beaker.
4-40 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Repeat the calibration for the selected pump

to check if the calibration is correct:
Hold the end of the hose in a graduated
beaker.
Press
Activate DEV-W pump
[Activate BX-W pump /
Activate STB-W pump].
4
Check the supplied amount of water on
the scale of the graduated beaker.
Press the respective button
Readjust DEV-W pump
[Readjust BX-W pump /
Readjust STB-W pump]
and enter the measured supply rate.
Empty the graduated beaker.
Repeat the procedure if the calibration is not
correct. If it is correct proceed as described
below.
Remove the extension hose and connect the
water hose again.
Proceed with the same routine for the other
two pumps.
Mount the tank covers again (1 screw each).
Close the cover.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-41

Resetting the calibration

In case of incorrect calibration the pumps can be reset to default:
Press the button Reset to default if

necessary.
015
4-42 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.4.8 Other Settings

The production requires a number of further settings which have been combined in the
screen Other settings:
General settings:
– Lab-ID
– Laboratory name 4
– Automatic or manual allocation of order numbers
– Activate / deactivate backprint
(only for d-lab.2/2plus)

Settings for negative printing:
– Activate / deactivate automatic end of order
– Check number of prints per frame (for APS and others)
Settings for digital orders:

– Maximum number of prints for closing a digital order
– Activate / deactivate dTFS
Autosave settings:
– It is possible to define if images in Autosave (see Saving images with Autosave in
Chapter 6) are to be saved with manual corrections (see Printing in Chapter 6).
Red-eyes corrections will not be saved.
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Other settings
The screen Other settings opens.
Enter the changes as described in the
paragraphs below.
Once all changes have been made:
Press Save.
039
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-43

4.4.8.1 General settings

In the screen Other settings:
Press Lab ID and enter:
If the Minilab is integrated in a network
to receive orders (e.g. network orders) or
send orders (e.g. autosave), the entered
Lab ID must be the same number as the
one in the d-workflow program.
The Lab-ID may be used as a machine
specific identification number within a
laboratory. It can be included in the
back print.
Press Lab name and enter:
The name can be selected as desired. Can be
included in the back print.
Press Order no. and select from the list:
Manual
The operator can change the order number
displayed during processing of an order.
or
Automatic
The machine assigns the order number and it
cannot be changed.
Activate / deactivate Back print.
If this parameter is inactive no back print
will be made during printing whether it is
included in the configuration or not.
Note
The setting of this parameter has no influence
on network orders (print mode Network
order). In case of network orders the back print
is controlled by the order data created on an
external workstation.
4-44 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Activate / deactivate
Automatic end of order.
If this function is activated, the order is
automatically finished if the film length
specified in the Film length button has been
4
reached.
Press Film length.
Enter the film length after which the
function Automatic end of order should be
effective (the preset length is 400 mm).
Activate / deactivate the button
Check PpF (prints per frame).
If this function is active a warning message
will be displayed if the number of prints per
frame (PpF) entered for an order is higher
than the number defined with the Max. PpF
button.
Note
If this warning is displayed you can continue
after confirmation of the warning. The operator
input is accepted.
Press Max. PpF

and enter the desired value.
Maximum number of prints per frame which
will be printed without a warning display.
Activate / deactivate Check APS auto
copies (same functional principle as Check
PpF, however in this case for APS).
Press Max. APS cop.
and enter the desired value
(same functional principle as Max. PpF,
however in this case for APS).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-45

4.4.8.3 Settings for digital orders

Press Dig. order length and enter the
maximum number of prints allowed for a
digital order.
Presetting: 40
Possible range: 1–1000
Note
Very large orders with index prints of format
20x30 and bigger can result in errors during
index calculation if the storage limit (600MB)
is reached.
Activate / deactivate dTFS preselection

(digital Total Film Scanning: Image
enhancement in digital print files; see
)following paragraph).
Depending on the settings for
dTFS preselection the presetting for dTFS
in all corresponding screens is activated or
deactivated. The setting can be changed for
the individual orders.
4-46 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.4.8.4 The dTFS function (digital Total Film Scanning: Image enhancement in digital print files)
dTFS determines color and density corrections for digital images, to correct possible color
casts. The aim is to compensate for the characteristics of different digital cameras.
The dTFS function only influences images of digital cameras without editing. Images
which have been edited and/or generated or saved in an image processing program, will
be printed without dTFS, even when dTFS is switched on. The system detects
automatically if an image comes from a digital camera and is still untouched, or if the 4
image has been edited.
The minilab does not differentiate during detection where a digital image file comes from.
Which means, independent whether the digital image file comes from network or from a
medium inserted in a drive of the minilab, the same image detection processes are used.
Images are selected as being edited or generated by an image processing program if the
image contents meet the following criteria:
– Images with one-colored border, or with graded border in one color under the
following restrictions:
– Borders with ornaments will not be selected.
– If the images in a laboratory are sent from an image box/Workstation with SW
Version 5 and up to the d-workflow (network server accessed by the minilab), white
borders will be sent as a separate PfDF parameter, and only the minilab will
combine image and border. In this case the image files are not selected.
Colored borders are included in the image calculation at the workstation. Therefore
images with colored border will be selected.
– If borders are assigned to images via the kiosk-Software on a workstation, these
borders are included in the image information independent of their colors and the
images will be selected.
– Index prints
– Sepia prints
– Black-and-white prints
– Synthetic images, such as computer graphics or images edited with graphic programs,
if they correspond to the extensive internal search criteria.
– Images with three- monochromatic corners (not graduated). This guarantees that oval
frames, for example, will be selected.
Images edited or created with an image processing program are detected with a reliability
of 80%.
If such images are not detected by the selection criteria, they will be printed with dTFS
(always provided the presetting is "On").
It cannot be excluded that the image information in unedited images of digital cameras
corresponds to the selection criteria. These images will then be printed without dTFS.
However, chances that this occurs are only approx. 1%.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-47

Files saved with Autosave are marked to ensure that no automatic dTFS is used if these
files are printed again.
Note
If dTFS is not used, the corrections of the production balance for area contrast and
saturation are not used.
Application of dTFS
Image files have an absolute color allocation, e.g.:
RGB value corresponding color
0 0 0 black
100 100 100 gray
255 255 255 white
255 0 0 pure red
That means identical values for all three colors result in black, gray, or white.
If dTFS is active, gray shades in the image file are probably changed, i.e. a gray area in the
image file must not necessarily be gray in the print.
If you want to use dTFS, it should be activated in the settings (see Other Settings /
dTFS Presetting in Chapter 4).
If dTFS is to be used for individual file print orders only, the function can be deactivated
for individual orders (see Printing File Prints without Preview and Printing File Prints
with Preview in Chapter 6).
Network orders are printed according to the selected settings (see Settings for the
Printing of Network Orders in this chapter).
We recommend to activate dTFS
– for images taken with one camera, e.g. if the storage medium of the camera is used,
– for images of which you may assume that they have not been edited by the customer
after exposure.
4-48 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.4.8.5 Autosave settings

Activate/deactivate
Autosave with manual corr.
If this function is activated, the images are
saved with the manual corrections in the
Autosave mode, otherwise they are saved 4
without manual corrections.
Note
Red-eyes corrections are not saved.
Note
Always saved are :
- corrections, which have been defined in the
production balance, see Setting the
production balance in Chapter 4);
- corrections, which have been defined in the
order configuration (via correction
configuration; see Defining and editing
correction configurations in Chapter 4).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-49

4.5 Adjusting the Production Balance

Basic settings for different parameters, which are important for the production, e.g. Detail
/ Area contrast, Sharpness – edges / Sharpness – grain, Saturation, Color corrections, etc.
The settings are to be made separately for film (color negatives, black-and-white
negatives) on the one hand and digital sources on the other hand. The settings have no
effect on slides.
After changes in the settings the machine executes an automatic restart of the program.
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Production balance
The screen Select production balance opens.
If the production balance is to be adjusted
for film material (color negatives and
black&white negatives), press Color
negative.
If the production balance is to be adjusted

for digital material, press Digital.
Press Digital.
Confirm the selection with OK.
102
4-50 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


When you select Color negative the Production balance screen opens.
079
The screen offers settings for:

– Correction impact
– Sharpness – edges
– Saturation
– Sharpness – grain
– Area contrast
– Detail contrast
– (Total Film Scanning)
– Panorama identification
– Contrast management
– Color / Density Logic
– TFS Colour (Dominant Parameters, Artificial Light Detection, Shift Correction)
– TFS Density
– Selector logic (detection of incorrectly exposed negatives and stickers)
– DX corrections
– Color corrections
– Brightness correction
– Red-eye correction (only available if the option is activated; see Installing /
Activating Software in this chapter)
The adjustment options and their meaning are explained below in detail.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-51

Applies to d-lab.2/2plus and netlab.2plus

When you select Digital the screen Production balance digital opens.
103
The Screen offers settings for:

– Correction impact
– Sharpness – edges
– Saturation
– Sharpness – grain
– Area contrast
– Detail contrast
– Color corrections
– Density corrections
– Brightness correction
– Red-eye correction (only available if the option is activated; see Installing /
Activating Software in this chapter)
The adjustment options and their meaning are explained below in detail.
4-52 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.5.1 General Information Regarding the Production Balance

We recommend to make changes in the production balance only if it is clear, after a
longer observation period and sufficient production experience, that the complete
production must be corrected in one direction.
We recommend to have parameters modified only by experienced operators.
Modifications are only effective after a new start.
4
These settings are not considered in the back print as the production balance defines the
basic balance (0-value).
Correction values entered later (e.g. via correction configurations or for image
improvement) are added to this 0-value (up to ±9 maximum) and can be included in the
backprint (if selected there) – see Defining and Editing Backprint Configurations in this
chapter).
In case of color and density corrections the influence depends on the entered correction
impact (see Setting the Correction Impact (for color negative and digital) in this
chapter).
We recommend,
– to leave the parameters Area contrast, Detail contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness
in the production balance always on 0,
the parameters of the Color and Selector logic both on 1.0,
and to define the required corrections only via the correction configurations. The values
adjusted via correction configurations can be selected for the back print and thus are
easier to follow up.
Special features for file prints/digital

In contrast to negatives the image files have an absolute color allocation:
0/0/0 = black
100/100/100 = gray
255/255/255 = white
255/0/0 = pure red, etc.
The machine is adjusted in such a way (default setting) that e.g. three equal numbers on
the print actually result in gray.
Corrections can be made by correction configurations.
Furthermore in file print a pure brightness increase (density, via corrections or the dTFS
function), for example, has the effect that shadows become lighter whereas the light areas
come out only slightly lighter or almost unchanged which in turn means a contrast
reduction.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-53

4.5.2 Setting the Correction Impact (for Color Negatives and Digital)
Effect
Basic machine setup for the changes in color and density for the entire production. This
setup only has an effect on color/density corrections, i.e. in all screens with regulators for
yellow, magenta, cyan, and density.
– Presetting: 100%
– Adjustment range: 10–200%
A setting of 100% should result in a correction density step of about 0,5 D and a color
step of about 0,25 D on the paper. The parameter changes are linear: 50% halves, 200%
doubles the effect. The exact influence of the impact setting depends on the paper
gradation.
Note
We recommend to change the correction impact only once in order to adjust the fine
grading or the extent of the correction to personal requirements. All further corrections,
e.g. seasonal changes (dominant colors green or white) should not be made via the
correction impact, but via corrections made during printing. These corrections can then
be selected for the back print and thus are easier to follow up.
Making changes
Press the Impact button in the Production
balance screen or the screen Production
balance digital and enter the required
value.
4-54 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.5.3 Setting Sharpness - Edges (for Color Negatives and Digital)
Effect
This parameter specifically influences lines with strong contrast changes, i.e. changing
from light to dark at the edges (e.g. windows in a building). This increases or decreases
the impression of sharpness.
Adjustment range: -9 to +9 4
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
– Shift to + :
Changes between light and dark are increased, edges seem sharper.
– Only effective if there is sufficient contrast.
– Blurred and defocused exposures can only be improved to a certain extent.
– If this value is increased too far this may result in artifacts, e.g. thin white lines at
the light-dark changes no longer look natural.
– Shift to - :
Changes between light and dark are decreased, edges seem softer.
– A reduction by -2 to -4 may be good for portraits as this covers up for skin
blemishes.
Note
The impression of sharpness depends on the print size and the paper surface. Therefore
we recommend to set up special correction configurations, e.g. for large formats, or
cropping and enlargement with a shift towards +, or for portraits with a shift towards –
(see Defining and Editing Correction Configurations in this chapter).
Note
We recommend to adjust this parameter not in opposite direction to the sharpness -
grain parameter, or at least not too far in opposite direction.
Making changes
Press the left or right Arrow button at
Sharpness - edges in the Production
balance or Production balance digital
screen to decrease or increase the sharpness
of the edges.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-55

4.5.4 Setting the Saturation (for Color Negatives and Digital)
Effect
The Saturation slider is used for color prints to influence the color saturation.
Adjustment range: -9 to +9
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
– Shift to + :
The gradation curves become steeper which means that all colors become more
intensive.
– Exposures with many colorful areas (flowers, cars, technical pictures, product
advertising, etc.) will become even more colorful, but portraits and exposures or
moods seem unnatural.
– The detail structure (pleats in fabric, structure of a blossom) is lost.
– Shift to – :
The gradation curves become more shallow which means that all colors become
weaker.
– This may be useful for portraits and exposures of moods.
Making changes
Saturation in the Production balance or
Production balance digital screen to
decrease or increase the saturation.
4-56 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.5.5 Setting Sharpness - Grain (for Color Negatives and Digital)
Effect
This parameter has a similar effect as Sharpness - edges, however it influences all image
areas with fine structures, such as grass or hair in portraits for example.
Step width: 1 4
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
– Shift to + :
Fine details appear even sharper (e.g. spot lights in night exposures), homogenous
areas however are affected by noise, the grain may be visible.
– Shift to – :
Soft-focus effect, the noise decreases, the grain is suppressed (at values ≤ 0, e.g. -4),
the detailed structure, however, is lost.
Note
We recommend to adjust this parameter not in opposite direction to the sharpness -
edges parameter, or at least not too far in opposite direction.
Making changes
Sharpness – grain in the Production
balance or Production balance digital
screen to decrease or increase the sharpness.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-57

4.5.6 Area Contrast (for Color Negatives and Digital)
Effect
This parameter influences the contrast of large structures (cm-range). The light in the
shadows can be increased and at the same time certain light spots (e.g. faces too light by
flash exposures) can be darkened. In contrast to the gradation changes the color
saturation and sharpness are not affected.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
– Shift to + :
The contrast is reduced.
Too high values of this parameter may result in artifacts; e.g. halo effects with dark
faces in front of a gray background.
– Shift to – :
The contrast increases. E.g. light face in front of dark background: the more negative
the value, the lighter the face and the darker the background.
Extreme settings result in artifacts.
Note
We recommend to adjust detail contrast and area contrast not in opposite directions.
Making changes
Press the left or right Arrow button at the
Area contrast in the Production balance
screen to decrease or increase the detail
contrast.
4-58 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.5.7 Setting Detail Contrast (for Color Negatives and Digital)
Effect
This parameter influences the contrast effect of medium-sized structures (1–2 mm), e.g.
faces. Whereby the overall sharpness impression of the picture is influenced as well.
Step width: 1 4
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
– Shift to + :
Structures appear sharper / harsh.
– Shift to – :
Structures appear softer / flat.
Note
Extreme settings result in artifacts.
We recommend to adjust detail contrast and area contrast not in opposite directions.
Making changes
Press the left or right Arrow button at Detail
contrast in the Production balance or
Production balance digital screen to
decrease or increase the detail contrast.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-59

4.5.8 Brightness correction (for color negatives and digital)
Effect
The brightness correction can be used to influence the brightness of dark, medium, and
light image areas (shadows, mid-tones, and highlights) separately.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Effect:
– Shift to + :
the selected brightness range becomes lighter.
– Shift to – :
the selected brightness range becomes darker.
– The white reference as well as the black reference remain the same in all cases; they
are not affected by the brightness correction.
Making changes
Press the button Brightness correction in
the screen Production balance or
Production balance digital.
The Brightness correction screen opens.
Press left or right Arrow key for the required
brightness range (Shadows Mid-tones,
Highlights) to increase or decrease the
brightness.
181
4-60 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.5.9 Setting Color and Density Corrections (Digital)
Effect
Note
Color / density corrections for color negatives: see
Setting Color and DX Corrections (for color negative) in this chapter. 4
There one regulator per color pair blue–yellow, green–magenta, red–cyan and one for
density. The effect depends on the setting of the impact parameter (see Setting the
Correction Impact (for color negative and digital) in this chapter).
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Note
The corrections made here will not be included in the back print.
Making changes
color settings Yellow, Magenta, Cyan or
Density in the Production balance digital
screen to decrease or increase the colors or
density.
Note
If all three colors are moved in the same
direction and by the same extent, this has not
effect on the general color impression.
This switch activates / deactivates the contrast parameters Detail contrast and Area
contrast.
Press the Contrast management button in

the Production balance screen to activate /
deactivate the function.
4.5.11 Automatic red eyes correction (for color negatives and digital)
When taking flash shots of persons you cannot always avoid that the pupils of the eyes
come out red (depending on the exposure conditions and camera equipment). (Reflex of
the blood circulation in the retina) The red-eye correction automatically changes the pupil
color to produce a natural effect in the picture.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-61

Note
In addition to the automatic red eyes correction the minilab also offers a manual red
eyes correction. The following paragraph describes how to activate and deactivate the
automatic red eyes correction. The manual red eyes correction can be used
independent of the automatic function (see Manual red eyes correction in
Chapter 6).
Note
The function red-eye correction (automatic and manual) is only available if the option
has been activated (see Activating software in this chapter).
Go to the Production Balance screen or

Productions Balance digital and press the
button Red-eye correction to activate or
Note
The automatic red eyes correction can be generally activated and deactivated in the
production balance.
This setting can be changed again for the current order in the print modes with preview
(see Printing in Chapter 6).
It can also be overwritten by means of correction configurations (see Defining and
Editing Correction Configurations in this chapter). A correction configuration can be
assigned fix to an order configuration (see Defining and Editing Order Configurations
in this chapter) or it can be activated just for one individual order (see Changing the
Configuration for the Complete Order in Chapter 6).
4-62 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Effect
TFS (AgfaPhoto Total Film Scanning): The complete film (film strip) is scanned. This
provides additional information for every individual negative.
– It compensates for differences of various film types (film base, properties, emulsion 4
fluctuations). As a result the production is more uniform.
– The image information of the individual negative is analyzed. This allows panorama
detection and various selections, as well as a specific influence on color or density of
individual groups of motifs.
TFS …
– can be used with the factory-set presettings;
– or can be adapted to the film types (Learning TFS learns) and then used (Learning
TFS used).
If you want the learning TFS to learn (calibration)

Press Learning TFS learns to activate this
function.
079
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-63

Self-learning TFS curves:

– Learning phase: At least 20 different films of the same film type with at least six
negatives each must be scanned. The films should be exposed on different cameras if
possible.
The learning TFS is based on the DX code. As the fluctuations due to film processing
differences are stronger than the differences among film types, the best results are
obtained with films that have been processed, if possible, in an identical or at least
similar way.
During the learning phase the factory-set standard values are used.
– Only after the learning phase, i.e. from film 21 of the same type on, the film type
specific values determined during the prescan have an effect: The TFS curves are used
for logic calculations.
The dominant parameters are effective right from the first film of a type, i.e.
independent of the learning process of TFS curves.
Note
Use different films of the same type for the learning, do not use the same film 20 times
as otherwise the statistics will be falsified!
Use of the learning TFS

Press Learning TFS used to activate
/deactivate this function.
Reset of learning TFS

Press Learning TFS Reset:
The determined values for all films are reset,
i.e. all curves are deleted.
We recommend to activate this reset only if
the production quality deteriorates. Then the
learning process begins again.
4-64 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


TFS detects panorama exposures on 135-type films. The function must be activated to
print panorama sizes correctly. Otherwise the panorama prints have black bars.
Press Panorama identification, to activate

/ deactivate the function.
4

TFS: AgfaPhoto Total Film Scanning; (explanation see Using TFS (only for color
negative) in this chapter).
Press the Color / Density logic button in

the Production balance screen to activate /
079
The buttons TFS Color and TFS Density are accessible if the function is active. These
buttons call up further screens in which color and density parameters for the color and
density logic can be changed (see Setting TFS Color (only for color negative) and
Setting TFS Density (only for color negative) in this chapter.
Note
We recommend to keep this function always activated, and to switch off only for
special test purposes, e.g. test of the mixed printing.
Note
Certain parts of the logic are effective even if the regulators have not been changed.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-65


The following correction settings are accessible via the TFS Color button:
– Dominant Parameters
– Parameters for Artificial Light Detection
– Parameter for Shift Correction
Note
The TFS Color button is only active, if the color / density logic has been activated (see
Color / Density Logic (TFS; only for color negative) in this chapter).
Call up:
Press the TFS Color button in the
Production balance screen.
4.5.15.1 Dominant Parameters

Effect
Negatives with color areas deviating strongly from the average, i.e. color dominants (e.g.
red car taking up almost the complete format), are detected by TFS. The areas with a
majority of one color are not considered in the calculation of exposure data for these
negatives; this allows printing without color cast (the red car of our example remains red).
The threshold values for the detection of such color dominants can be influenced
separately for the colors magenta, blue, green, and yellow.
Adjustment range: 0.0 to +4.0
Step width: 0.1
Standard setting: 1,0
– Increasing the values:
– The detection of dominant colors decreases. Pictures with dominant colors are
probably treated as normal pictures, i.e. they may show complementary color casts.
– The uniform color trend in prints of one order is improved.
– The color balance for motifs with special exposure light improves.
– Decreasing the values:
– Color dominants are detected more reliably and the prints come out neutral.
– The uniform color trend in prints of one order also decreases.
– The color balance for motifs with special exposure light, e.g. sunset decreases as
well.
4-66 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Note
The dominant parameters are effective right from the first film of a type, i.e.
independent of the learning process of TFS curves.
Making changes 4
dominant settings in the TFS Color screen to
increase or decrease the values.
099
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-67

4.5.15.2 Parameters for Artificial Light Detection

Effect
Negatives exposed in artificial light can be detected by TFS and specifically influenced or
corrected. We differentiate:
– Exposures in warm-colored light, like the light or bulbs or candlelight: TL (Tungsten
Light)
– Exposures in neon light: FL (Fluorescent Light).
There are two parameters per exposure situation, which define the detection threshold
and the correction impact:
Parameter Function Range

TL Detection threshold for tungsten light -4.0 - +4.0
CTL Correction impact for tungsten light exposures 0.0 - +1.3
FL Detection threshold for fluorescent lamp light -4.0 - +4.0
CFL Correction impact for exposures in fluorescent lamp light 0,0 - +2,0
Step width: 0.1

Standard setting: 1.0
Threshold parameters TL and FL:
The higher the value the more exposures are detected as artificial light exposures.
Correction impact parameter
CTL (correction impact tungsten light) and
CFL (correction impact fluorescent light):
The higher the value the stronger the color correction:
– CTL: the yellow-reddish color cast is neutralized;
– CFL: the green color cast is neutralized.
The prints get a daylight-like appearance.
4-68 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Making changes
Press the right or left Arrow button for the
parameters CTL, TL, CFL or FL in the TFS
Color screen, to decrease or increase the
values.
099
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-69

4.5.15.3 Parameter for Shift Correction

Effect:
If the color density curves of a negative film are not precisely parallel to each other, the
result is a crossover color cast, i.e. an originally balanced light intensity for all colors
during the exposure results in a color cast of one color in the light image areas and a
complementary color cast in the shadows. A neutral grayscale, for example, would show a
magenta color cast in the light areas (lights) and a green color cast in the dark areas
(shadows). The shift characteristics depend on the respective film type (regarding impact
as well as color trend) and on the film process.
The shift correction is determined individually for every negative with respect to contrast
and motif. By means of this correction the neutral area of the motif can be shifted in such
a way, that the colors in the important sections of the image come out neutral, which
means that the color trend in the image is considered less disturbing. The shift correction
has no effect on negatives without a crossed-curves effect and no effect on artificial light
exposures.
The K parameter influences the impact of the shift correction.
Adjustment range: 0.0 to +4.0
Step width: 0.1
Making changes
Press left or right Arrow button at K in the
TFS Color screen to increase or decrease the
value.
099
The impact of the color correction acts in proportion to the changes in the K-value. If, for
example, the value is increased from 1.0 to 1.5, the shift correction is 50% stronger.
4-70 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


TFS allows the automatic detection of certain groups of motifs in which a selective
density correction can then be made.
We differentiate five groups of motifs which each have a parameter assigned for separate
control.
4
Parameter Function Range

DL 1 Flash shots (flash portraits or light objects in front of a dark background) 0.0–2.0
DL 2 High-contrast backlight, snow, or beach shots, landscapes with large parts of a 0.0–2.0
bright sky
DL 3 Low-contrast snow shots, gray water surfaces with overcast sky, hazy visibility, 0.0–1.4
etc.
DL 4 Persons with white clothes (e.g. wedding dress) on a green meadow, view through 0.0–2.0
trees, flowers with a green background, etc.
DL 5 Motifs with a high percentage of blue 0.0–1.4
Step width: 0.1

Higher values always result in darker prints and lower values in lighter prints, i.e. they
reduce the density (individual deviations from the standard value 1.0 are possible of
course!). This applies to all parameters.
Note
We recommend to keep the standard setting of 1.0 for all density parameters, as every
deviation from the standard value of a motif group not only means an improvement for
this group, but also entails a negative effect on other motif groups.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-71

Making changes
Press the TFS density button in the
Note
The TFS Density button is only active, if the
color / density logic has been activated (see
Color / Density Logic (TFS; only for color
negative) in this chapter).
The TFS Density screen opens:

Press left or right Arrow button at D1 [D2 ...
D5] to increase or decrease the value.
100
4-72 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Effect
TFS and the selector logic make it possible that negatives, which would result in waste
prints, can be skipped, i.e. will not be printed.
We differentiate four different categories of incorrect exposures, or error categories, which 4
are detected. The threshold values of these categories can be set individually:
Parameter selects Range Description

Selector 1 Underexposed negatives 0.0 - +4.0 Towards 0.0 more underexposed negatives are
printed.
Towards +4.0 fewer underexposed negatives
are printed.
Selector 2 Overexposed negatives -4.0 - +4.0 Towards –4.0 more overexposed negatives are
printed.
Towards +4.0 fewer overexposed negatives are
printed.
Selector 3 Fogged or partly blackened -4.0 - +4.0 Towards –4 more negatives with this problem
negatives (e.g. light leaking into are printed.
an opened camera) Towards +4.0 less negatives with this problem
are printed.
Selector 4 Label detection on the film (Twin -4.0 - +4.0 Towards –4 more negatives with stickers are
Check label) printed.
Towards +4.0 less negatives with stickers are
printed.
Step width: 0.1

Note on selector 4
The parameter is set perfectly if a negative with sticker is not printed.
Note
Certain parts of the logic are effective even if the regulators have not been changed.
Note
We recommend to proceed as follows:
– Do not change the standard settings.

– Deactivate the logic only for specific test purposes (e.g. to test mixed printing).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-73

Switching the selector logic on or off:

Press the Selector logic button in the
Production balance screen to activate /
079
Making changes
Press the TFS Selector button in the
Note
The button TFS Selector is only accessible
after the Selector logic has been activated.
The TFS Selector screen opens:

In the following TFS selector screen press
the left or right Arrow buttons at the
selectors SL1 to SL4 to decrease or increase
the value.
098
4-74 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


The Color corrections screen (see below for activation) allows the input of general
corrections. They apply to all film types.
Individual corrections can be entered additionally for each defined DX code in the
DX Configurations screen (see next page for activation). These corrections can be
saved in the DX configurations (e.g. if certain films are not printed with satisfying results 4
in spite of TFS, or if they do not correspond to the general taste in a country). During
printing the individual corrections are added to the general corrections when the
respective DX code is detected.
Separate inputs for neutral, overexposures and underexposures are possible in both
screens.
Note
The corrections are immediately effective and not only after a restart.
Note
The changes made for color and density corrections are added to the general
corrections of the basic balance. Therefore they do not show in the backprint.
4.5.18.1 Color Corrections

Call up:
Press the Color correction button in the
The Color corrections screen opens. In this
screen color and density values applying to all
films can be entered.
Enter correction values for neutral exposure,

overexposure and underexposure:
parameter to increase or decrease the value.
101
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-75

4.5.18.2 DX Corrections
Call up:
Press the DX corrections button in the
The DX configurations screen opens:
Press New
if you want to create a new
DX configuration.
or
Select a configuration from the list and press

Edit if you want to change an existing
configuration.
313
4-76 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Slope DX config. settings screen opens.

Color and density corrections for a certain film
types can be entered in this screen. Separate
inputs for neutral, overexposures and
underexposures are possible.
Press the DX code button and enter the DX
code in the following format:
123-456.
If the DX code is unknown: create a 4
backprint configuration (see Defining and
Editing Backprint Configurations in this
chapter), in which the DX code is listed, and
print the film with this backprint
configuration.
parameter to increase or decrease the
correction value for neutral exposures,
dx_conf overexposures or underexposures.
Step width: 1
Standard setting: 0
Touch Save as and enter a name for the DX
configuration.
or
Press Save if an existing configuration was

changed.
The name of the DX configuration appears in

the configuration list of the
DX configurations screen.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-77

4.6 Settings for Network Orders

Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Network orders
040
The screen Remote Orders: settings opens. It is divided into four sections:
– Remote order: File print
– Remote order: Autosave
– Network orders
– d-workflow
After the settings have been made (see

following sections):
Press Save.
4-78 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.6.1 Settings for Remote Orders: File Print

Defines an external storage site within the network, to which the Minilab saves data and
from where it loads digital data.
When File print is started the machine automatically connects to the specified computer
/ drive.
(For File print mode see Working with File Print Mode in Chapter 6.)
4
Enter the connection data in the Remote

Orders: settings screen:
Press Computer name.
Enter the name or the IP address of a
workstation in the network.
Press Resource name.
Enter the share name of the respective folder
on a specific computer.
Note
Observe:
– Enter Computer name and Resource name without "\".

– Password protection must not be activated.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-79

4.6.2 Settings for Remote Orders: Autosave

Defines an external storage site within a network to which the das Minilab copies and
saves image files if the Autosave function is active (for the Autosave functions see
Defining and Editing an Autosave Configuration in this chapter and Saving Images with
Autosave in Chapter 6).
Enter the connection data in the Remote

Orders: settings screen:
Press Computer name.
Enter the name or the IP address of a
workstation in the network.
Press Resource name.
Enter the share name of the respective folder
on a specific computer.
Note
Observe:
– Enter Computer name and Resource name without "\".

– Password protection must not be activated.
4-80 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.6.3 Settings for Network Orders

Settings for the printing of network orders. Network orders can be started automatically or
manually (see Network orders in Chapter 6).
Automatic printing of network orders: If the Automatic printing function is activated, the
minilab automatically switches to Network order printing mode during printing intervals
(no operators activities within an adjustable time) and automatically prints the waiting
orders. 4
In the Remote Orders: settings screen:

Activate / deactivate Automatic printing
On/Off.
Press Popup to start the network orders
appears after ....
Enter the time span without operator action
after which the popup for network order is to
be displayed (5 minutes are preset).
Press Popup stays active for ….
Enter the time after which the printing of
network orders is started automatically if no
operator action takes place (1 minute is
preset).
Press Maximum number of network
orders and enter the number of network
orders, which are to be loaded in one process
(highest adjustable value: 200).
Press dTFS mode and select the desired
settings (for dTFS function see The dTFS
Function (digital Total Film Scanning:
Measuring of Digital Image Sources in this
chapter).
– always On: dTFS is generally used.
Exceptions are determined by selection
criteria (see The dTFS Function (digital
Total Film Scanning: Measuring of Digital
Image Sources in this chapter). They have
the same effect here.
– always Off: All images are printed without
dTFS (no image enhancement).
– PfDF: The settings defined for dTFS in
Network orders apply.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-81

4.6.4 Settings for d-workflow

In the Remote Orders: settings screen:
Information about the PC (workstation) on which
the software d-workflow is installed (software
required for network orders):
Press d-workflow address or name.
Enter the name or IP address.
Press d-workflow Port no.
and enter a value (the standard is 5001 or
pfdfcom, if the corresponding input in the
SERVICES file exists).
dworkfl
Explanation:
PFDF (Photofinishing Data Format) is a standardized format for order data to be used in
networks.
The d-workflow Software manages the order files. It saves digital orders (images and PFDF
information) until they are called by a receiving station, e.g. the Minilab.
In network connections with several input stations, we recommend to install the
d-workflow on a PC, which is only responsible for this function, i.e. not further programs
are running on this PC.
4-82 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Conditions for this PC (as of d-workflow Version 2.5.1):

– 32-bit Windows PC
– Operating system: Windows 2000/XP
– Processor: 3 GHz
– Main memory: 512 MByte, recommended 1 GByte
4
– Hard disc 1: 40 GByte (system)
– Hard disc 2: 80 GByte (data)
– Network interface: 100 MBit/s, recommended 1000 MBit/s Ethernet adapter
Contact the Service for more information about current d-workflow Software.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-83

4.7 Defining and Editing Print Configurations

The print configuration offers various settings which are required for a certain print
product.
004
For this purpose the following configurations are defined:

– Order
(single, package, combi-print, reproduction)
– Paper (width, surface)
– Back print
– Index print (all prints of an order as thumbnails on one sheet of paper)
– Correction (color, contrast, sharpness, density)
– Autosave (automatic saving of the image files of an order on a storage medium)
– Front print (texts on the front of the print)
– Combiprint (one picture several times on one sheet of paper, in the same size or
different sizes)
Configurations of the Order type (hereinafter called order configuration;
see Defining and Editing Order Configurations in this chapter) are combinations of the
configuration types 2 to 8. Therefore these configurations are referred to as sub-
configurations, they must be set up first.
A sub-configuration can be used in any number of order configurations.
Configuration names may have 30 characters maximum, and may include the following
special characters:
- . : , ; + ! ? = ( ) _ / & % $ and blanks.
4-84 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.7.1 Defining and Editing Paper Configurations

A paper configuration consists of a paper width and surface. The cut length of the paper is
managed independently. And during setup of a order configuration it is combined with a
paper configuration (see Defining and Editing Order Configurations in this chapter).
Note
Paper configurations can only be set up if paper widths and surfaces have been defined 4
before (see Defining Paper Widths, Surfaces and Cut Lengths in this chapter).
Call up:
Settings
Print configurations
Paper
The screen Paper configurations opens. The
listing shows paper configurations created before.
Define or edit a configuration:
If you want to define a new paper
configuration:
Press New.
If you want to edit an existing paper
configuration:
Select the paper configuration to be edited
from the list and press Edit.
311
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-85

The Selector screen opens.

Press Paper setting and select the desired
width from the list.
Press Surface and select the desired
language from the list.
Paper widths and surfaces which have been

set up before are now offered (see
Defining Paper Widths, Surfaces and Cut
Lengths in this chapter).
088
The lower section of the screen displays the switch positions resulting from the selected
width and surface and which must be adjusted on the paper magazine (see Paper
Magazine Codes in Chapter 6):
Switches 1–4: paper width
Switches 5-6: surface
Switch setting:
Switch on: slide on paper magazine closed ( )
Switch off: slide on paper magazine open (■)
Note
The switch settings are defined as described in Defining Paper Widths and Defining
Paper Surfaces in this chapter. They cannot be changed here.
Press Save or Save as and enter the name.
Renaming paper configurations

Select the paper configuration that you want
to rename from the list in the Paper
configurations screen.
Press Rename and enter the new name.
Press OK.
4-86 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.7.2 Defining and Editing the Backprint Configurations

Back print configurations can be set up for individual prints as well as for index prints.
Note
The print area for the back print is 2 x 40 characters. Positions not used are filled up
with dots.
4
Call up:
Settings
Back print
The Back print configurations screen opens:
Press Film mask and select the respective
carrier:
Standard back print for back print on prints
of slides and negatives with the exception of
IX240 (APS)
IX 240 back print for back print on prints of
IX-240 films (APS)
File print back print for back print on prints

of digital files
Standard index back print for back print on
300 index prints of slides and negatives with the
exception of IX240 (APS) as well as index
prints of digital files
Standard index back print for back print on
index prints of digital files
IX240 index back print for back print on
prints of IX-240 films (APS).
Configurations created before and matching the
film carrier are displayed.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-87

Define or edit a configuration:

If you want to define a new back print
configuration:
Press New.
If you want to edit an existing back print
configuration:
Select the back print configuration to be
edited from the list and press Edit.
The Back print configurations screen opens (see figure on the following page):
Note
The film mask can also be selected in the Back print configuration screen. However,
if a different film mask is selected here and the back print configuration is then saved,
it will not be displayed in the list of the superior screen Back print configurations as
there is still another film mask selected there. It will only appear after you select the
same film mask there.
Different parameters can be selected for the back print. Which parameters are actually
available depends on the selected film mask:
4-88 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Parameters Film mask Remarks

Standard IX 240 back File print Standard IX240 index
back print print back print index back back print
print
negative number ● ● – – –
print date ● ● ● ● ● 1)
4
print time ● ● ● ● ● 1)
order number ● ● ● ● ●
number of prints ● ● ● ● ● 1)
corrections ● ● ● – – 1)
lab name ● ● ● ● ●
Manual correction ● ● ● – –
change size ● ● ● – –
change position ● ● – –
free text ● ● ● ● ●
lab-ID ● ● ● ● ●
DX code ● ● – – –
new line ● ● ● ● ● 1)
file name – – ● – –
APS-Parameters – ● – – ● 2)
Number of images – – – ● ●
with red-eyes
correction
● Parameter is available
– Parameter is not available
1) see Remarks on Some Parameters further down
2) see Special Features for IX240 (APS) Films further down
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-89

Combine a back print text by the parameters

offered in the listing and the free text:
Press parameter, and add or remove
with the arrow buttons.
If Free text was selected, press the
button of the same name and enter the
text: The list on the right shows the
number of characters which the test
uses.
The preview of the back print text and the
indication about still available blanks (dots in the
preview) are updated after any modification.
Sort the list with :
This influences the order in the back print
text.
025 A message is displayed if the total length of
80 characters is exceeded.
4-90 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Notes on some parameters

– Print date and Print time are printed in the formats selected before under Machine
settings > User interface (see Defining the User Interface in this chapter).
– Number of prints for index print always includes the index print. In case of digital
orders the size setting for an order is decisive (see Other Settings in this chapter),
i.e. how often a large order is slit and how many index prints are created.
– Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus 4
In case of index prints of APS films the number of prints per print format can be
printed additionally with number of prints H, number of prints C, number of prints
P
– With new line a new line can be started if desired. All entries in front of this
parameter will be printed in the first line, all entries behind this parameter will be
printed in the second line (maximum 40 characters each). If this parameter is not used,
the line break will be made when the first line is full.
Note
This parameter can only be used in the first line.
– Corrections (not available for index back print) prints the color and density
corrections of the correction configuration
(see Defining and Editing Correction Configurations in this chapter) plus manual
corrections. By means of this information in the back print reorders with identical
corrections are possible.
– Manual correction (not available for Index backprint) prints only manual corrections.
– There are only 8 digits available in the back print for color / density corrections
(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Density) as well as for Area contrast, Detail contrast,
Sharpness – edges and Saturation. Therefore the following abbreviations are used:
-9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9
I H G F E D C B A N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Example:
Back print: N N 2 N A N N 1
Meaning: Yellow: Magenta: Cyan: Density: Area Detail Sharpn. – Saturation:
contrast: contrast: edges:
0 0 +2 0 –1 0 0 +1
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-91

Special features for IX240 (APS) films

The on IX 240 films have optical and magnetic data tracks on which various information
an be stored (which information can be stored depends on the camera).
Superior data for photofinishing

Magnetic image data for photofinishing
Optical image data of the manufacturer
Magnetic camera image data of the customer
Optical camera image data of the customer
Panorama
Classic
__ High Vision
Superior optical data of the camera
(exposure conditions, e.g. flash)
Superior magnetic data of the camera
(exposure conditions, e.g. flash)
Superior optical data of the manufacturer
Coding:
– Two magnetic tracks on which the photographer can save data via the APS camera
(always provided this function is supported by the camera).
– Two magnetic tracks on which the photofinisher can alter or add product-specific data.
– Film tip to record film-specific information.
– Data that only applies to one negative (image title, aspect ratio, exposure data) is
recorded in the so-called negative data area.
– Some of these information options, such as e.g. print formats (High Vision, Classic,
Panorama), or even all of them, can be printed as back print text in a length up to
80 characters total.
This data cannot be influenced.
4-92 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.7.3 Indexprint Configurations

Index print configurations are used for the printing of index prints To be able to print
index prints the index print layouts must be available on a Minilab. Some layouts are
already included in the machine upon delivery. Further index print layouts can be created
on a PC/workstation with the AgfaPhoto IP Layout Software and then imported in the
Minilab.
4
4.7.3.1 Importing Indexprint Layouts
Note
Index print layouts can only be imported if the import software on the Minilab has been
activated (see Installing / Activating Software in this chapter).
Note
Only layouts of the AgfaPhoto IP Layout Software 5.08 or higher can be imported.
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Indexprint layout
The screen Import index print layouts opens.
Select Film mask (filter).
If No filter is selected all the available
layout files will be displayed in the list of
imported layouts.
If you select a film mask only those layout
files which match the film mask will be
shown.
The file extensions of the layout files refer to
the film carriers, e.g. .135, .240.
Film mask is fixed: File print
Select a Drive and in the next screen the Folder,
if necessary, in which the layout files to be
imported are stored.
092 Layout files which can be imported are
shown in the left-hand listing.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-93

Select the layout files to be imported:

Press the double-arrow to import all files, or
select individual files and press the single
arrow.
Import the selected layout files with OK.
4.7.3.2 Defining and Editing a Indexprint Configuration:

Call up:
Settings
Indexprint
The Indexprint configurations screen opens.
Select Film mask.
All configurations created before and
matching the film mask are listed.
Film mask is fixed: File print All
configurations, which were set up before, are
listed.
If you want to define a new index print
configuration:
Press New.
If you want to edit an existing index print
configuration:
Select the index print configuration to be
edited from the listing and press Edit.
304
4-94 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Indexprint configuration screen opens.

Press Layout and select the desired layout
from the list.

Available are only those layouts which
match the selected film carrier.
Press Paper config. and select the required
option from the list. 4
All paper configurations with a width
corresponding to the width of the layout can
be selected.
Press Cut length and select the required
option from the list.
All defined cut lengths will be listed.
If the paper configuration corresponds to the
width of the layout, the cut length will be
027 set to the value that is closest to the length
of the layout.
Press Indexprint and enter the desired
quantity.
The preset value is 1.
Note
If an order contains more pictures than
possible per page for the selected layout, the
system will automatically add as many pages
as necessary. The number of these pages is
independent of the settings under Indexprint.
Press Back print and select the desired back

print configuration for the index print (or off)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-95

Note
The field Layout info offers various information, such as:
– No. of images per index print

Indicates how many thumbnails can appear on one index print. Every index print
layout allows several possibilities, e.g. 20, 30, 42 (depending on the setting in the
layout program).
– No. of index prints
Number of pages required to hold all the images of an order in the index print.
– Film mask
In case of file print this is invalid.
Note
The best layout is selected automatically.
4-96 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.7.4 Defining and Editing Correction Configurations

The Minilab offers a number of possibilities to improve the image. These settings can be
combined and saved in special configurations, e.g. for certain groups of motifs, such as
snow exposures.
Call up:
4
Settings
Corrections
The Correction configurations screen opens.
Press Film type.
Correction configurations already set up for
this film type are displayed.
Select the desired film type from the list
(color negative, BW, slide or file print),
confirm selection with OK.
Film type is fixed: File print.
Correction configurations created before are
displayed.
If you want to define a new correction
configuration:
Press New.
If you want to edit an existing correction
303 configuration:
Select the correction configuration to be
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-97

The Correction configuration screen opens.

Depending on the film type different correction
possibilities are offered.
If desired, enter corrections:
Range: -9 to +9
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Density

(color / density corrections)
Area contrast and/or
L density LDT (luminance density; only
d-lab.2/2plus, film type slide)
Detail contrast and/or
L contrast LDT (luminance contrast;
only d-lab.2/2plus, film type slide)
023_datei (Example film type file print) Sharpness - edges
Saturation SAT
023_dia (Example film type slide)

If desired press Red-eyes corr. and select
the appropriate setting:
– Standard: the settings made in the
production balance apply to the
correction configuration (see Red Eyes
Correction in this chapter).
On / Off: independent of the setting in the
production balance the red-eye correction is
switched on or off.
4-98 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

L-Density LDT and L-Contr. LCT influence brightness and contrast of the slide prints
without changing the color saturation. The functions of the other corrections are
explained under Defining the Production Balance in this chapter.

4
Note
These corrections appear in the back print if corrections have been selected for back
print (see Defining and Editing Back Print Configurations / Notes on some
parameters in this chapter).
Correction configurations for prints with color cast, e.g. sepia

If you want to print using a certain color cast (e.g. sepia), you can set up a special
correction configuration for this job (see Special Print Products and Motif Groups in
Chapter 6). Prints with color cast (e.g. sepia) can only be printed from black&white
material: Set film type BW in the correction configuration.
Produce the color cast by entering a color correction and a saturation > 0 for the image to
be printed, e.g. for sepia enter
Yellow +3
Red +4
Saturation: 9
The higher the value for the saturation (range: 1–9), the stronger the color cast.
Which settings for color and saturation result in a color shade meeting the expectations
of the customer must be determined in tests with various settings.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-99

4.7.5 Defining and Editing Autosave Configurations

By means of the autosave configurations images of an order can be saved as image files
on a storage medium. The aspect ratio of the individual images is kept.
A folder is set up for every order on the storage medium:
Folder name = order name_date/time,
e.g.: 001_0308051130.
Each image file has a unique name assigned:
File name_internal image number.format,
e.g.: testprint_0001.bmp
Call up:
Settings
Autosave
The Autosave configurations screen opens.
If you want to define a new autosave
configuration:
Press New.
If you want to edit an existing autosave
configuration:
Select the autosave configuration to be
302
4-100 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Autosave configuration screen opens.

Select the type of autosave configuration
(Autosave fixed, Autosave quality or
d-workflow).
Note
The three types exclude each other. Therefore
only the buttons belonging to the selected
type are active. 4
029
If you selected Autosave fixed:

– File format
In this mode the files are always saved on the
storage medium in the format “bmp”.
Press Drive.
Local drive: only diskette is possible.
Press Quantity.
Select or enter the number of image files,
which are to be saved on the selected
medium.
The size of the saved images is
automatically adapted to the preset quantity
independent of the actual number of images
saved.
High quantity = low resolution

Low quantity = higher resolution
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-101

If you selected Autosave quality:

Press File format and select the desired
format (“.bmp“ or “.jpg“ with various
compression factors).
Press Drive.
Select a local (e.g. Diskette) or external
drive.
The directory defined in the settings for
network orders is offered (see Settings for
Digital Orders (Network Orders) in this
chapter).
029_qual
Press Resolution.
Select the desired resolution (four different
resolutions are offered).
Note
Slide prints: In case of slides printed at a size
of 20x30 or bigger, select the resolution
3000x2000 to avoid blemishes in the saved
slides.
4-102 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

If d-workflow was selected:

Press Resolution.
Select the desired resolution (four different
resolutions are offered).
Note
Slide prints: In case of slides printed at a size
of 20x30 or bigger, select the resolution 4
3000x2000 to avoid blemishes in the saved
slides.
Press File format.

Select “.bmp“ or “.jpg“ with different
compression factors.
The address of the PC where the d-workflow
is installed, must be defined before; see
029_pdm Settings for Digital Orders (Network Orders)
in this chapter.
Press CD, Internet Upload, Normal,
to activate / deactivate the respective type
of further processing.
If one of more of these options are selected,
the saved image files in the corresponding
order file are marked.
This marking allows an automatic further
processing of the files via the programs
connected with the d-workflow, e.g. writing a
CD.

In case of negatives the DX code is
transmitted to the d-workflow as part of the
file name:
File name = DX code_consecutive number
Note
PFDF (Photofinishing Data Format):
The Minilab can only return orders in the Format PFDF 4.2 to the d-workflow .
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-103

4.7.6 Defining and Editing a Front Print Configuration

By means of these Front Print configurations free texts can be exposed on the front of the
print.

Moreover, in case of IX240 films the date of the magnetic strip on the film (the date
entered via the camera) can be exposed.
Call up:
Settings
Front print
The Front print configurations screen opens.
Select Film mask (Standard front print or
IX240 front print).
Film mask is fixed: Standard front print
If you want to define a new front print
configuration:
Press New.
If you want to edit an existing front print
configuration:
Select the front print configuration to be
301
4-104 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Front print configuration screen opens.

Press Font, Size and Position one after the
other and select the desired input from the
list.
Press Free text and enter the text to be
exposed.
4
026
Press Font color to change the text color.

The Select color screen opens.
Select the color and press OK.
or
Select the color and press New.

Modify the red, green, blue color portions in
the next screen to create the desired color
and press OK twice.
Press Background color to change the color
of the background (and proceed as described
above for Font color).
080
Note
Black text background:
Create the color with the values 0 0 0 (red / green / blue) or select the available black
color for the background. The dot in the color table appears black.
Transparent text background:

Create the color with the values 1 1 1 (red / green / blue). This color is translated as
transparent. Again the dot in the color table appears black.
Press Save or Save as and enter the names.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-105

4.7.7 Combiprint Configurations

The combi-print configurations can be used for multiple printing of an image of different
sizes or the same size (passport/ID photo) on one sheet of paper. To be able to print
combi-prints the combi-print layouts must be available on the Minilab. Some layouts are
already included in the machine upon delivery. Further combi-print layouts can be created
on a PC/workstation with the AgfaPhoto IP Layout Software and then imported in the
Minilab.
4.7.7.1 Importing Combiprint Layouts
Note
Combi-print layouts can only be imported if the import software on the Minilab has
been activated (see Installing / Activating Software in this chapter).
Note
Only layouts of the AgfaPhoto IP Layout Software 5.08 and higher can be imported. To
use the possibility to change text exposures you need at least Version 5.12 of the
Layout Software, as well as Version 8.xx of the d-lab Software.
Call up:
Settings
Machine settings
Combiprint layout
The screen Import combiprint layouts opens.
Select Film mask:
If No filter is selected all the available
layout files will be displayed in the list
Importet Layouts.
If you select a film mask only those layout
files which match the film mask will be
shown.
The file extension of these layouts is “.pas”.
Film mask is fixed: No filter
Select a Drive and in the next screen the
Folder, if necessary, in which the layout files
to be imported are stored.
Layout files which can be imported are
350 shown in the left-hand listing.
4-106 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Select the layout files to be imported:

Press the double-arrow to import all files, or
select individual files and press the single
arrow.
Import the selected layout files with OK.
4
4.7.7.2 Defining and Editing a Combiprint Configurations:
Note
Combiprints cannot be priced separately. If special prices are to be defined for this, we
recommend to use a paper format which is usually not used.
The Combiprint configurations screen opens.

Select Film mask.
Configurations created before and matching
the film carrier are listed.
Film mask is fixed: File print.
The listing shows configurations created
before.
If you want to define a new combi-print
configuration:
Press New.
If an existing combiprint configuration is to
be edited:
Select the combi-print configuration to be
352
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-107

The Combiprint configuration screen opens.

Press Layout and select the desired layout
from the list.
Displayed are only those layouts which
match the film mask selected before.
Press Paper config. and select the required
All paper configurations with a width
corresponding to the width of the layout can
be selected.
Press Cut length and select the required
All defined cut lengths will be listed.
If the paper configuration corresponds to the
width of the layout, the cut length will be
set to the value that is closest to the length
of the layout.
351
If applicable press Edit text template.
On the following screen a customer text
defined in the layout, can be changed or text
can be added (see Description of Layout
Software – as of SW 5.12).
The screen Edit text templates opens.
Press on the desired text field and make the
text changes.
Press OK.
340
The Combiprint configuration screen opens
again.
4-108 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.8 Defining and Editing Order Configurations

Order configurations combine various sub-configurations and are used to produce a
certain print result of an image material (paper format, back print, probably index print
etc.). Since order configurations refer to sub-configurations these must defined before
(see Defining and Editing Print Configurations in this chapter).
A created sub-configuration can be used in any number of order configurations.
We differentiate four types of order configurations: 4
– Single
single order configuration
– Package}
Several order configurations (Single, Combi-print, Reproduction) are packed in a
package to print various formats of one image in one print pass..
– Combiprint
The combi-print configurations can be used for multiple printing of one image in
different sizes or the same size (e.g. passport/ID photo) on one sheet of paper.
– Reproduction
For digital images, this order configuration will switch off all functions of the
AgfaPhoto image enhancement so that the prints correspond exactly to the original.
This also refers to the computing of the print size. The printed image corresponds
precisely to the original: in case of deviating sizes there is a border or loss of image
information.
Application: images created with an image processing program or exposures that are
artificially falsified.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-109

Call up:
Settings
Order
The screen Order configurations - List opens.
Press Film mask
and select the required option from the list.
The corresponding configurations, which

were set up before are listed. The type of the
previously created configurations is marked
a letter in the list:
S Single
P Package
C Combiprint
R Reproduction
The standard configuration for the selected

or preset film mask is displayed in the top
078 line (see Define Order Configuration as
Standard in this chapter).
If you want to define a new order
configuration:
Press New
If you want to edit an existing order
configuration:
Select the order configuration to be edited
from the list and press Edit.
4-110 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Order configuration screen opens. The

offered setup possibilities depend on the selected
film mask.
If you want to define a new order
configuration, press Config. type and select
the desired type from the list.
Press OK.
4
022_type
Note
The configuration type can only be adjusted if a new order configuration is defined. If
an existing order is edited the tape cannot be changed.
The further procedure follows in the paragraphs below.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-111

4.8.1 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Single Type
Note
In an existing order configuration the settings for Config. type and for Film mask can
no longer be changed. If you edit an order configuration the Config. type button is
inactive. If you change the setting for the film mask the software will switch from Edit
to New: i.e. in this case you are no longer editing the selected configuration, but you
define a new configuration.
In an existing order configuration the setting for Config. type can no longer be
changed. If you edit an order configuration the Config. type button is inactive.
The possible settings in the Order configuration screens depend on the selected film
mask. Below they are described for all film carriers available for the machine.
4.8.1.1 Film Mask: 135, 120, 110

If the Order configuration screen was
called up with New: Press Config. type and
select Single.
Press Film type and select (Color negative
or BW).
Press PpF (number of prints per frame) and
enter the desired value:
preset value = 1 (range 0 to 999).
Sub-configurations (Indexprint, Backprint,
Correction, Autosave, Front print): press
the button and select the respective sub-
configuration from the list or set to Off.
If border prints are to be printed:
Press Border and enter the required
value.
Possible values: 4–60 mm
022_negsi
Presetting: 0 (for borderless).
Press Border color and select the desired
color.
4-112 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Adapt Paper config., Cut length to:

press the button and select the respective
setting.
Note
If the selected film mask is the 135FF (full
frame), two buttons each are shown for the
three parameters: for full frame (FF) and for 4
panorama (P).
The button Adjust to is only displayed with

film mask 135FF.
4.8.1.2 Film Mask: File Print

select Single.
The Film type file print is fixed and cannot

be changed.
value.
022_dpsi Possible values: 4–60 mm
color.
Press Paper config. and select the
respective configuration.
Press Cut length and select the respective
length.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-113

Activate one of the following options (the

option exclude each other; if one option is
activated, the previously active option
automatically becomes inactive):
Fit image to paper
(presetting) The complete digital image
is printed; if the image has another
aspect ratio than the paper, a white
border remains on two sides.
Fill print size
A center cropping of the digital image is
printed without a border; part of the
original image is lost if the digital
image has another aspect ratio than the
paper.
Adjust: Shorter side or
Adjust: Longer side
The original image remains the same,
the cut length is variable. One side of
the digital image is adjusted to the
paper width: either shorter side or
longer side.
Note
If a border has been selected it will be
considered in the adjustment.
Note
If set up accordingly, the Minilab calls up completely prepared network orders (image
files plus order description) during the idle times or when requested by the user, and
these orders are then printed automatically.
See Settings for Digital Orders (network orders) in this chapter and Network orders in
Chapter 6.
Prerequisites:
Order configurations corresponding to the descriptive order file must be available on
the Minilab. These are configurations for which the option File print was selected in
the Film mask box.
4-114 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


select Single.
The Film type Color negative is fixed and
cannot be changed.
4
value.
Possible values: 4–60 mm
022_apssi
color.
Adapt Paper config. and Cut length for the
sizes Classic, High Vision and Panorama:
press the buttons and select the desired
settings (see next page).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-115

Ignoring the IX240 coding of the camera
Print Sizes Aspect ratio

High Vision 16:9
Classic 3:2
Panorama 1:3
Three different print sizes can be selected and saved by the customer on an IX240 film.
The selected size is saved optically or magnetically on the associated frame. The saved
data is read on the Minilab and every negative is printed in the coded size. Prerequisite
for this is a configuration, which considers all three formats (mixed configuration), i.e.
which has different settings for each print format.
On the film always the APS full frame is exposed, no matter which aspect ratio was
selected on the camera. It is therefore possible to ignore the camera coding and print a
different size. To use this possibility three further configurations must be set up in
addition to the mixed configuration, in which the paper configurations and cut lengths for
all three formats must be adjusted equally:
– Paper configurations and cut lengths of all three sizes for High Vision (A)
– Paper configurations and cut lengths of all three sizes for Classic (B)
– Paper configurations and cut lengths of all three sizes for Panorama (C)
If now a certain format should be printed without considering the camera code, e.g. High
Vision, the corresponding configuration of the three option mentioned before must be
selected, in the example this would be configuration (A).
4-116 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


select Single.
The Film type Slide is fixed and cannot be

changed. 4
value.
022_diasi Possible values: 4–60 mm
color.
Press Paper config. and select the
respective configuration.
Press Cut length and select the respective
length.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-117

4.8.2 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Package Type

Any combination of order configurations of the types Single, Combiprint and
Reproduction. If a configuration with more than two paper widths is used for printing, the
request may come up to change the paper magazine.
Note
If the screen Order configuration Package

was called up with New: press Config. type
and select Package.
Select Film type
(for film masks 135, 110, 120: color negative
or BW;
for other film masks: the Film type is preset,
no need to select and not possible either).
Film type is fixed: File print.
Select configurations
Only order configurations are offered which
match the selected or preset film mask and
are no packages themselves (the latter
cannot be packed any further), and in which
096 PpF is not zero.
Press the desired configuration and use the
arrow keys to add or remove to the listing
Selected configurations.
4-118 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

PpF (number of prints per frame): separately

adjusted for each selected configuration.
Select the configuration and then press PpF
and enter the desired quality:
Sub-configurations Indexprint, Backprint,
Autosave: press the button and select the 4
respective sub-configuration from the list or
set to Off.
Note
The settings made here are applied; the
settings in the single configurations on which
they are based are ignored.
Press Save or Save as and enter the name
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-119

4.8.3 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Combiprint Type
Note
4.8.3.1 Film Mask: 135, 120, 110

If the screen Combiprint order
configuration was called up with New:
press Config. type and select Combiprint.
Press Film type and select (Color negative
or BW).
Correction, Autosave, Front print: press
Press Combiprint and select the desired
configuration.
022_negkp
4-120 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


The Film type Color negative or Slide is

fixed and cannot be changed. 4
configuration.
022_diakp
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-121

4.8.3.3 Film Mask: File Print

The Film type file print is fixed and cannot

be changed.
configuration.
022_dpkp
Activate one of the following options (the

options exclude each other; if one option is
activated, the previously active option
automatically becomes inactive):
Fit image to paper
(presetting) The complete digital image
is printed; if the image has another
aspect ratio than the paper, a white
border remains on two sides.
Fill print size
A center cropping of the digital image is
printed without a border; part of the
original image is lost if the digital
image has another aspect ratio than the
paper.
Press Adjust: Shorter side or
Adjust: Longer side
The original image remains the same,
the cut length is variable. One side of
the digital image is adjusted to the
paper width: either shorter side or
longer side.
4-122 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.8.4 Defining and Editing Order Configurations of the Reproduction Type

Order configurations of the Reproduction type are used to print image files without
automatic image improvement and without adaptation of the image size to the paper.
Order configurations of the reproduction type can only be defined for file prints.
The following table offers an overview about the functions which are active or inactive in
the Reproduction mode: 4
Repro mode TFS off TFS on

Paper LUT yes yes yes
Color management no yes yes
Sharpening no yes yes
Logic calculation for the individual image no no yes
Logic calculation over all images of an order no no yes
For foreseeable results the pixel size of the image file must be known as it is printed 1:1
(image size) with 400 dpi. Printing is without preview; the configuration cannot be
changed. The image is printed in the center of the paper.
If the image file is
– too big with respect to the paper size, the image is cut.
– to small with respect to the paper size, the image gets white borders.
– approx. 3 times smaller than the paper size, image processing artifacts may occur.
Note
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-123

If the screen Order configuration

reproduction was called up with New: press
Config. type and select Reproduction.
The Film mask is automatically set on File

print. This setting cannot be modified.
Press Back print and select the desired
configuration or set to Off.
Press C paper config. and select the desired
configuration.
022_dprep
Press C cut length and select the respective

length.
4-124 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.8.5 Defining a Configuration as Standard Configuration

For each film mask (netlab.2plus: only File print mask possible) a single or another order
configuration must be defined as standard configuration. This configuration is shown in
the first position in the configuration list and is used automatically:
– after the start,
after changing the film carrier, 4
– after changing the print mode.
How to call up and define a configuration as

standard:
Settings
Order
Press Film mask and select the required
option from the list:
The corresponding order configurations,
which were set up before are listed.
The corresponding order configurations,
which were set up before are listed.
Select the desired order configuration and
press Edit.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-125

Press Standard,
to define the configuration as standard.
Confirm the message on the screen.
022_dpstd
Note
If you want to change the standard configuration, activate the button of the order
configuration which is to be the new standard. A deactivation in the active standard
configuration is not possible.
4-126 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.9 Deleting a Print or Order Configuration

Note
Sub-configurations can only be deleted if they are not used in a higher configuration.
If you want to delete a configuration, which is used in a higher configuration, e.g.
– a sub-configuration in any order configuration, or 4

– a single order configuration in a package order configuration,
the sub-configuration in the higher configuration must first be replaced by another one
(see Defining and Editing Order Configurations in this chapter).
Call up:
Settings
Desired configuration type
If necessary, select Film mask or Film type.
Press the configuration to be deleted in the
listing.
Press Delete.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-127

4.10 Pricing Configurations

Optional accessory:
Pricing Software and Label Printer
m2
The buttons Pricing settings in the Settings menu and Order pricing in the Pricing
menu are only active if the customer bought a license and the software has been
activated (the software is included in the Main-Software; see Activating Software in
this chapter).
All data, which is needed for the price calculation and the printing of price labels, is then
defined under Pricing settings. Similar to the print configurations, sub-categories are
created here and combined to form superior price categories.
Together with the license, AgfaPhoto also provides an Operation Manual, which explains
all functions.
Order numbers for the pricing label printer with software license to activate the pricing
function:
Type ABC Code

Pricing unit (CE/TÜV) 8506/181 B7256
Pricing unit (UL) 8506/182 B9M81
Pricing unit, Software License 8060/400 5HUBE
4-128 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.11 Save and Load Settings and Configurations

We recommend to save the settings in the following cases:
– after the first machine startup and the setup of customer configurations.
– after major modifications of settings and/or configurations.
– at regular intervals, e.g. after a PBL.
– prior to the installation of a software update. 4
– to transfer configurations to other Minilab systems.
Save settings:
Settings
Save settings
Select the drive (symbol) / directory (arrow)
(required memory space: approx. 6 MB).
All files of the drive / directory are listed on
the left side; on the right side the existing
backup files are listed. The file name
indicates what has been saved.
Press Save or Save as.
021
Load settings:
Settings
Load settings
Select the data to be loaded (machine
settings, print configurations, pricing):
Press the button(s).
Select a medium, and a directory if
necessary, and the file name of the saved
settings.
Press Load.
030
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 4-129

4-130 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Tests
5 Tests
5.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Printer Tests:Paper Balance Test (PBL) and Master Balance Test (MBL)..................................................5-2
5.2.1 Conditions for Printing an MBL and PBL ..........................................................................................5-3
5.2.2 Initial PBL and MBL after the Machine Installation.....................................................................5-4
5.2.3 Daily Calibration with the MBL............................................................................................................5-5
5.2.4 Daily Calibration without MBL (Exception)......................................................................................5-6
5.2.5 Calibration of a New Paper Configuration in Case of Emulsion Changes or 5
Changes in a Paper Configuration (not Master Paper)................................................................5-6
(Master Paper).............................................................................................................................................5-7
5.2.7 Complete New Calibration.....................................................................................................................5-8
5.3 Printing a PBL Test .......................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 PBL Test with Laser Point....................................................................................................................5-11
5.3.3 Copying Laser Points during Calibration of a Paper Configuration.....................................5-12
5.3.4 Default Setting of Maximum Densities and Calibration Factors..........................................5-14
5.3.5 When Should Maximum Densities Be Changed? .......................................................................5-15
5.3.6 Changing the Maximum Densities of a Paper.............................................................................5-16
5.3.7 Changing the Gray Balance of the Internal Densitometer.....................................................5-19
5.4 Printing an MBL Test.................................................................................................................................................5-20
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus .....................................................................................................................................5-21
5.6 Checking the Process (Chemical control strip test)......................................................................................5-23
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-i

Tests d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
5-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.1 Overview
m3
Tests are used to calibrate the machine. Perform test regularly before and during
production to ensure a uniform high quality of the production.
– Paper Balance Test (PBL)
– when creating a new paper configuration
– when changing an existing paper configuration (e.g. changing paper type)
– when inserting a paper with a new emulsion number
See Printer tests: Paper Balance Test (PBL) and Master Balance Test (MBL) in this
chapter.
– Master Balance Test (MBL)
to compensate for system fluctuations (in chemicals, Printer, etc.) and to balance their
influence on all paper configurations (see Printer Tests: Paper Balance Test (PBL)
and Master Balance Test (MBL) in this chapter.
Minor system fluctuations can quickly be compensated for by the fast MBL test
(FastMBL) (see Printing an MBL Test in this chapter).
Scanner calibration (pixel correction, PIKO); see Calibrate Scanner (pixel correction,
PIKO) in this chapter.
– Control strips to check the chemicals of the Paper Processor (Paper Processor test);
see Checking the Paper Process (Paper Processor test) in this chapter.
All the above tests can be called up via the main menu Test.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-1

5.2 Printer Tests:Paper Balance Test (PBL) and Master Balance Test (MBL)
Prior to production start the machine must be calibrated. Only if Printer and Paper
Processor are perfectly calibrated good prints will come out.
The purpose of the Printer calibration is to adapt the individual elements of the Printer –
print engine, paper and paper processing with respect to each other.
Test prints are exposed for the calibration; these test prints show a 13-step grayscale
(ranging from minimum to maximum density). The densities of the individual steps are
measured with the densitometer integrated in the Minilab. The Printer prints test prints
with updated, newly adapted Printer settings until the grayscale comes out neutral.
We differentiate two types of Printer calibrations:
– The Paper Balance test (PBL) refers to a paper configuration. For this paper
configuration the Printer is to be adjusted for a neutral print of the grayscale. The
determined calibration data is saved and loaded whenever this paper configuration is
used.
Furthermore this test is used to adjust the maximum intensity of the laser for the three
color channels (red, green, blue); (for further information: see PBL Test with Laser Point
in this chapter).
– The Master Balance test (MBL) refers to all paper configurations. The MBL is printed on
the so-called master paper. This is the paper that is used most frequently in the lab.
And the Printer must be adjusted to print a neutral grayscale with this paper
configuration. However, the determined calibration data in this case will be used for all
paper configurations.
The purpose of the MBL is to compensate for system fluctuations (in chemicals,
Printer, etc.).
Based on the changes, which were determined on the master paper between the last
and the current MBL, all other paper configurations (PBL data) are adapted. So, any
change in the MBL influences all paper configurations.
Therefore the MBL offers a possibility to use only one test to compensate for the
system fluctuations for all paper configurations.
(How to define the master paper see Printer Settings in Chapter 4.)
Note
All paper configurations, which are used for production, must be calibrated with a PBL
test.
A PBL must only be printed after a valid MBL!
A paper configuration is defined by width and surface of a paper (see Defining and
Editing Paper Configurations in Chapter 4).
5-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Note
If the Minilab is used for the printing of high-quality professional work, the machine
may be switched to the professional mode. In this mode the tolerances for a successful
PBL/MBL are closer. These are the tolerances referring to color spread and the visual
densities of the individual steps of the grayscale (with the exception of minimum and
maximum densities).
But switching to professional mode also entails longer calibration times as it needs
more cycles (test prints) to reach values which are in tolerance.
Only the AgfaPhoto Technician can switch to this mode. 5
5.2.1 Conditions for Printing an MBL and PBL

– The last order must have been terminated.
– No paper is permitted in the paper drive of the Printer and Paper Processor.
– There must be enough paper in the magazine for the two tests (approx. 3 m).
– The chemical solutions must be on nominal temperature.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-3

5.2.2 Initial PBL and MBL after the Machine Installation

Proceed with the following steps:
Use the factory-defined paper configurations
or create the required configurations (see
Defining and Editing Paper Configurations in
Chapter 4).
Define the master paper (see Printer
Settings in Chapter 4):
Usually the machine comes with a factory-

set master paper for the first startup.
After a new software installation without

data transmission from a previous version,
automatically that paper will be entered as
master paper, which is used for printing the
first PBL.
Check if the settings are correct (see
Printer Settings in Chapter 4); if
necessary define another paper as
master paper (the most frequently used
paper in the lab).
If the master paper is changed an MBL
will be printed automatically.
Print a PBL (see Printing a PBL Test in this
chapter):
make sure to use the master paper;
activate with laser point.
Print an MBL (if this was not done
automatically as described above in the
previous paragraph) (see Printing an MBL
Test in this chapter).
Print a PBL with laser point for all other
papers to be used. This must be done right
after an MBL was printed, to ensure that the
machine is in the same condition for both
tests.
Now the Printer is calibrated for all papers: The production can be started.
We recommend to save the database after a PBL was printed for all papers. By this it is
possible to load the values back into the machine, if necessary,
(see Save and Load Settings and Configurations in Chapter 4).
5-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.2.3 Daily Calibration with the MBL

In the following print operation the MBL is the means to keep the production stable and
uniform. It is used to compensate for the fluctuations of the system (chemicals, Printer,
etc.).
We recommend to print the MBL directly after machine startup, and additionally once or
twice during the day (every 3 to 4 hours).
For an MBL the master paper must always be inserted.
Note
If selected an MBL is automatically printed upon machine startup (see Printer 5
Settings / Auto-MBL in Chapter 4).
However, if an Auto-MBL is to be printed after machine startup, the master paper must
be inserted the night before.
By means of an MBL the master paper is calibrated again. All other papers are then
automatically adapted according to the master correction.
Conditions for a successful print routine:
– Only print a PBL for a paper, e.g. because of a new emulsion, if a successful MBL was
printed just before. In other words, a PBL is only printed in a calibrated machine.
– Observe the rules for calibration of the master paper in case of emulsion changes or
changing the master paper as explained in the section Calibrating a New Paper
Configuration or Changing the Emulsion (master paper) in this chapter.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-5

5.2.4 Daily Calibration without MBL (Exception)

In case of a daily calibration without MBL all used paper configurations must at least be
calibrated once with a PBL. Thereby you can use the test routine without laser point (with
the exception of the first time).
The daily calibration without MBL is only recommended in the following case:
– When using paper types, which are quite different, at the same time, e.g. papers of
different manufacturers. In this case the MBL corrections cannot show exactly the
same effect for all papers.
A daily calibration based on PBL (without MBL) only makes sense in the following case:
– Only one or only very few paper configurations are used.
If you use several paper configurations the daily calibration with MBL is more efficient.
5.2.5 Calibration of a New Paper Configuration in Case of Emulsion Changes or Changes in a Paper
Configuration (not Master Paper)
The following steps are required (further
information see Printing a PBL Test and
Printing an MBL Test in this chapter):
Print an MBL:
This provides for a calibrated condition of the
machine.
Print the PBL right after the MBL:
with laser point for new paper
configurations or for changes in the
paper configuration,
without laser point in case of
emulsion changes.
Note
If you are aiming at an extremely high print quality, the PBL should be printed with
laser point even in this case. However, the calibration process will then take longer
(approx. 10 minutes per paper configuration).
To ensure this high print quality the paper can be recalibrated with a PBL with laser
point about once every month.
Generally the use of a permanently higher print quality and the additional time
required for the calibration must be analyzed.
If quality problems occur in spite of a successful PBL (without laser point), a PBL with
laser point must be printed.
5-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


(Master Paper)
Calibrating the master paper in case of emulsion changes

The following steps are required (further information see Printing a PBL Test and
Print the MBL on the previous (old)

emulsion:
This provides for a calibrated condition of the 5
machine.
Right afterwards print a PBL with laser
point for the master paper with the new
emulsion.
Calibration of a new paper configuration as master paper (= defining another paper configuration as master
paper)
Print an MBL on the previous master paper:

This provides for a calibrated condition of the
machine.
Change the definition of the master paper.
And right afterwards print a PBL with laser
point on the new master paper.
Note
If the old emulsion was used up before an MBL could be printed, the calibration of the
new paper can only be started with a PBL. Usually this requires a complete new
calibration (see Complete New Calibration in this chapter).
Without this new calibration there may be a deviation between the master paper and
all other papers. If this is the case, a complete new calibration is required.
In the following cases a new calibration is probably not required:

– The last MBL with the old emulsion was made no more than a few hours ago.
– The production during the last hours was stable and excellent quality.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-7

5.2.7 Complete New Calibration

If the prints on the different papers in use are too different we recommend to calibrate
again.
Print an MBL on master paper.

Directly afterwards print a PBL without laser
point for all papers other than the master
paper.
After manipulations on the laser module (e.g. repair, exchange, modified adjustments) or
after changing the chemicals a new calibration is recommended. In this case proceed as
follows:
Print an MBL.
Right afterwards print a PBL with laser point
for all paper configurations starting with the
master paper.
5-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.3 Printing a PBL Test
5.3.1 General Procedure

Test
Start PBL
The screen PBL for paper configuration opens.
Select the paper configuration for which the
PBL test is to be printed. 5
Select the paper configuration of which the
laser points should be copied (see
Copying Laser Points during Calibration of a
Paper Configuration in this chapter).
If you do NOT want to copy the laser points
from another configuration, press the button
Copy laser points from to select the option
OFF (then indicated on the button).
Press PBL.
Note
The input in the menu Settings > Machine
settings > Printer settings > Max. calibr.
075 Cycles (Maximum number of calibration
cycles) defines how often a PBL should be
repeated automatically if the values are not in
tolerance after the first or further attempts (we
recommend to keep the default value).
The Print PBL screen opens.

Press Emulsion no.
Enter the emulsion number (not compulsory;
only for information, it is not evaluated).
The emulsion number is printed on the paper
bag.
Press Tolerance: step width 0.1 mm
Input option for hand-measured paper width
deviations from the coded width (useful for
border prints)
(step width 0.1 mm).
If necessary press with laser point to
activate or deactivate the function (see
PBL Test with Laser Point in this chapter).
097
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-9

Enter the required maximum densities

(Dmax red, Dmax green, Dmax blue), if
necessary, or accept the default settings (see
Basic Settings of Maximum Densities and
Calibration Factors as well as Defining New
Maximum Densities for a Paper in this
chapter).
Enter the required calibration factors
(calibr.fact. red, calibr.fact. green,
calibr.fact. blue) or accept the default
settings (see Change Gray Balance of the
Internal Densitometer in this chapter).
Note
The settings for maximum densities and
calibration factors are only effective if the
option with laser point has been activated.
Press Start.
Note
After a successful PBL/MBL a message is displayed indicating that the obtained
maximum densities deviate by more than 0.25 from the nominal value (Dmax). The
following causes are possible:
– The paper (e.g. a new paper emulsion) with the other sensitivity is used, or the laser
point has been copied from a paper with a sensitivity quite different to the paper in
use; in these cases a PBL with laser point is required.
– The entered nominal values (Dmax) cannot be reached on the paper (e.g. if papers are
used which are not suitable for laser exposure).
– The Printer
– The chemicals
See restrictions listed under Changing the Maximum Densities of a paper in this
chapter.
5-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.3.2 PBL Test with Laser Point

The PBL test with laser point adjusts the maximum laser intensities for the three color
channels (red, green, blue). The adjustment is made by providing the maximum densities
(Dmax) (see Changing the Maximum Densities of a Paper in this chapter).
The test routine adjusts the intensities by exposing the preset maximum densities on
paper without blooming effects.
If the option with laser point is selected the PBL is made in two steps:
1. Adjustment of the maximum laser intensity (maximum densities) by means of the test
prints graded densities and halo print.
2. Adjustment of the Printer to print a neutral grayscale. For this purpose the PBL test
5
print is printed several times (identical with PBL without the option with laser point).
PBL test with laser point:
– is printed automatically during first calibration of a paper, i.e. if the magazine code
indicates that a paper is used for the first time;
– must be printed when changing the paper type (the function with laser point must be
activated; see Printing a PBL Test in this chapter).
Note
On principle all PBLs (on master paper or non-master paper) can be printed with the
option with laser point without any negative effects for the print quality. Actually this
option can be used in regular intervals to compensate for slight system fluctuations
which may occur over a longer period of time. This may help to provide for a more
consistent print quality. The calibration process itself, however, takes a little longer.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-11

5.3.3 Copying Laser Points during Calibration of a Paper Configuration

During the calibration of a paper configuration there is a possibility to copy the laser
points of an existing paper configuration (source) to the paper configuration (destination)
to be calibrated.
Advantage:
Since both papers have identical laser points due to the copying, the productivity e.g.
during the printing of packages can be nearly doubled. Access to the two paper
magazines (alternating, one print from right paper magazine / one print from left paper
magazine) is therefore faster.
Disadvantage:
The maximum densities (Dmax red, Dmax green, Dmax blue) for the destination
configuration cannot be adjusted individually. The result may be differences in the
obtained maximum densities, always depending on the difference in the sensitivity of the
two paper configurations. If the maximum densities obtained on the paper of the
destination configuration deviate by more than 0.25 from the copied maximum densities
(set nominal values) of the source, a message will be displayed.
Note
Theoretically there is a possibility to copy the laser points on top of each other in case
of papers with strongly deviating sensitivities (e.g. papers of different manufacturers).
However, this may affect the obtained maximum densities (see above).
Condition for the copying of laser points: the papers must be very similar regarding the
sensitivity.
5-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Test
Start PBL
The screen PBL for paper configuration opens.
Select the paper configuration for which the
PBL test is to be printed (destination):
Select the configuration in the list: Select
paper configuration.
Select the paper configuration with the laser
points you want to copy (source): 5
Press the button Copy laser points from
and select the respective configuration.
If no paper configuration was selected, the
display reads OFF.
Note
It is not possible to copy data of another paper
to the MBL paper.
The List of copied paper groups shows which

075 paper configurations have identical laser
points. The paper configurations which are the
result of copying are listed here one below the
other.
If there is more than one group, the individual
groups are separated by a hyphen.
Press PBL.
The Perform PBL screen opens.

Enter Emulsion no., Tolerance and
calibration factors (Cal. factor red, Cal.
factor green, Cal. factor blue) (see
Printing a PBL Test in this chapter).
Press Start.
Note
There is no access to buttons for the option
with laser point and the maximum densities
(Dmax red, Dmax green, Dmax blue).
Activation of inputs are not possible in a
configuration with copied laser points.
097
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-13

5.3.4 Default Setting of Maximum Densities and Calibration Factors

Basic settings of maximum densities for Agfacolor Splendix and Agfacolor Sensatis Paper:
Dmax red = 2.3
Dmax green = 2.2
Dmax blue = 2.05
Note
Make sure to start from the basic settings for the used paper. If the wrong basic
settings are used, this may result in distinctive color fringes caused by blooming.
Default settings for calibration factors:

Calibr.fact. red = 1.03
Calibr.fact. green = 1
Calibr.fact. blue = 0.98
The default settings are optimized for the use of AgfaPhoto Sensatis and Splendix papers
and AgfaPhoto d-lab chemicals.Therefore we recommend to leave the values for Dmax
and the calibration factors unchanged.
If papers and/or chemicals of other manufacturers are used, the settings can be changed
to improve the calibration for these papers and/or chemicals and thus improve the quality
of the production (see Defining New Maximum Densities for a Paper and Change Gray
Balance of the Internal Densitometer in this chapter).
Learn in which cases the settings for maximum densities should be modified further down
in this chapter (see When Should the Maximum Densities be Changed?).
Note
The specified maximum densities (Dmax) refer to the measuring results of the internal
Minilab densitometer.
The internal densitometer has filters deviating from status A.
Therefore the values measured on an external densitometer will usually be different

from the results of the internal densitometer.
5-14 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.3.5 When Should Maximum Densities Be Changed?

An incorrect balance of maximum densities is mainly noticeable in BW pictures, in scenes
with large black areas, or in case of synthetic motifs. The following characteristics should
be optimized with the balance of the maximum densities:
a) Neutral appearance of shadows
A neutral black balance in the shadows can be obtained if the maximum densities of the
three color channels show a neutral balance in the PBL field with the highest density. This
balance depends on the paper type in use, e.g. red shadows can be corrected
– by increasing the Dmax red value,
5
– or, if the red channel is already at the limit of the laser intensity, by decreasing the
Dmax green and Dmax blue values accordingly.
b) Depth of shadows
Generally speaking: the higher the maximum densities on the PBL print the more depth in
the shadows can be obtained.
However, we do not suggest to enter maximum densities higher than 2.5, as this may
cause irregularities in the color scale around highly saturated colors especially in
synthetic motifs.
c) Neutral appearance of fringes caused by blooming effects
Fringes may appear in motifs with sharp edges and high density differences, e.g. thin
white lines of white letters on black background (black leaks into the white letters).
Especially the colored fringes look irritating. Therefore a neutral color should be adjusted
for the fringes.
Generally these fringes can be reduced by reducing the maximum density. The colored
appearance of fringes can be adjusted by variations of the respective maximum density:
Whereby a reduction
– of Dmax red results in less cyan,
– of Dmax green results in less magenta,
– and of Dmax blue results in less yellow
in the fringes.
The fringes react quite critically to the changes of the Dmax value, therefore do not use
values for ∆red, ∆green, or ∆blue that are higher than 0.05.
The adjustment of neutral fringes should be made with a suitable motif, i.e. thin white
lines or print on black background or a fine black and white crosshatch pattern.
The variations of the maximum densities for the adjustment of the fringes always results
in a compromise regarding the characteristics mentioned in item a) and b).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-15

5.3.6 Changing the Maximum Densities of a Paper

The function with laser point must be activated in the screen Print PBL. Now the
maximum densities (Dmax) for the three color channels can be entered for the selected
paper configurations. The entered Dmax values are used to determine the maximum
intensity of the laser.
Thereby the following facts should be considered:
– The maximum intensity of the laser is only determined by means of a PBL with laser
point. In case of a PBL without laser point the settings for the Dmax densities have no
effect.
– The maximum densities of the three channels are not completely independent of each
other due to the color dyes in the paper. If the maximum density of one channel is
changed this also has an effect on the maximum densities of the other channels.
– The specified Dmax values refer to measuring results with the internal densitometer.
If a paper is to be calibrated and the maximum densities of the PBL on this paper are
not as expected, an external densitometer must be used to measure this print. In this
case we recommend a device with Status A characteristics (e.g. the X-Rite
Densitometer).
Due to the deviating filters of the densitometer integrated in the Minilab, the required
nominal values (Status A) of the maximum densities cannot be entered directly in the
screen Print PBL. To determine the values to be entered proceed according to the
description on the following page.
For external measuring of the test strip always the same densitometer must be used.
5-16 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Procedure for paper calibration to new maximum densities

1. Measure the obtained maximum densities (Dactred, Dactgreen, Dactblue) on a current
PBL print on an external densitometer. Measure the field with the highest density on
the PBL print (fully right).
2. Calculate the differences with respect to the nominal external maximal densities
(Dnomred, Dnomgreen, Dnomblue):
∆Red = (Dnomred – Dactred)
∆Green = (Dnomgreen – Dactgreen)
∆Blue = (Dnomblue – Dactblue) 5
3. Read the old Dmax values in the screen Print PBL (function with laser point
activated) and add the calculated differences to these values:
Dmaxred_new = Dmaxred_old + ∆Red
Dmaxgreen_new = Dmaxgreen_old + ∆Green
Dmaxblue_new = Dmaxblue_old + ∆Blue
Enter the new Dmax values and press Start to initiate a new PBL with laser point.
4. Measure the obtained maximum densities on the first PBL print (i.e. the third test print
coming out of the machine) in the external densitometer (see 1).
5. Repeat the steps 2. to 4. until the required maximum densities can be obtained. By
experience we know this may take several cycles.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-17

Restrictions
In some cases the required maximum densities cannot be obtained:
1. Restriction by the capacity range of the maximum laser intensity
The maximum laser intensities can only be adjusted within a limited range. Thereby
we differentiate two basic cases:
a) Restriction by reaching the maximum of the possible laser intensity in a channel
E.g. on papers not suitable for laser exposure the required higher maximum
densities cannot by obtained (the color density curves of these papers will be in
saturation with low densities with the short exposure times typical for laser. Even a
theoretically infinitely increased intensity cannot produce a sufficient increase in
density.)
b) Restriction by reaching the minimum possible laser intensity in a channel
E.g. it is possible that the required low maximum densities cannot be adjusted any
more for papers with extremely high light sensitivities.
2. Restrictions of the maximum densities by fringing
Laser exposure on photographic papers is always subject to fringes caused by
blooming. The blooming increases with the increasing laser intensity, e.g. the effects
are irritating color fringes.
In case of a PBL with laser point the fringes are measured by evaluation of the halo
print (the second test print). Based on these results the fringing and thus the
maximum intensity of the laser is restricted to a photographically acceptable value. As
a consequence the reachable maximum densities can also be limited by the blooming
or fringing effects.
3. Reaction of the Minilab
If there is a restriction in one channel caused by the capacity range or by fringing, the
respective maximum density on the print is adjusted to the maximum reachable value.
5-18 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.3.7 Changing the Gray Balance of the Internal Densitometer

Correction factors (calibration factors) for the three color channels can be entered for the
selected paper in the Print PBL screen. Based on these values the gray balance of the
internal densitometer can be changed, e.g. to correct the color casts on the PBL print.
Application
– Papers of different manufacturers may contain different color dyes. According to the
spectral properties of the color dyes the measuring values of the internal densitometer
must be corrected to adapt the color reproduction of the different papers. 5
– This correction is made by means of the three calibration factors. That means, different
paper types usually require different calibration factors.
– The PBL can be adapted to produce a neutral gray for the gray shades (e.g. especially
important for BW prints).
Procedure for changing the calibration factors of a paper

The adjustment of new calibration factors for a selected paper can be made with or
without an external densitometer.
Procedure without external densitometer:
1. Print a PBL without laser point on the selected paper.
2. Determine the color cast in the grayscale on the last PBL print by means of the optical
impression (PBL is in tolerance).
3. Reduce the calibration factor of the respective color. Whereby a reduction of the
calibration factor by 0.02 results in a reduction of the density by about 2% (with 0.1 by
about 10% etc.).
4. Repeat the steps 1. through 3. until the grayscale on the last PBL print comes out
neutral.
Procedure with external densitometer:
1. Print a PBL without laser point on the selected paper.
2. On the last PBL print that was developed measure the density of a grayscale field in an
external densitometer and note the measured values. We recommend to measure the
field with medium gray density, which is directly next to the field with maximum
density (second from the right; do not take the field with the maximum density!).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-19

3. Determine the new calibration factor of a color according to the following formula:
corr_new = corr_actual x D_nom / D_act
with:
corr_new: new calibration factor
(to obtain a neutral
grayscale)
D_nom: desired density of the color
D_act: measured density of the color
corr_actual: current calibration factor.
4. Repeat the steps 1. through 3. until the grayscale comes out neutral.
Note
A PBL without laser point (function with laser point is inactive) has no influence on
the paper fog and no influence on the maximum densities. Only densities between
these two extreme values will be calibrated.
The calibration factors have no influence on the Dmax values.
5.4 Printing an MBL Test

MBL Test
Note
The input in the menu Settings > Machine settings > Max. calibr. Cycles
(Maximum number of calibration cycles) defines how often a PBL should be repeated
automatically if the values are not in tolerance after the first or further attempts (we
recommend to keep the default value).

Test
Start MBL
Note
If the master paper is not inserted when an MBL is started, the operator is prompted to
insert the master paper.
An info screen pops up during the test.

Note
If the Auto-MBL function is active an automatic MBL is executed after the machine
switched on and if the previous MBL was made on the previous day or even before (see
Printer Settings in Chapter 4). Which means that switching off after midnight and
switching on the same day immediately initiates an Auto MBL if an MBL was made
before midnight.
5-20 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

FastMBL Test
A FastMBL can be started as soon as the last print of a running order is in the Paper
Processor. Only one MBL test print will be printed and measured. A calculation and
correction of the "Master Balance" is made if the measuring results are within a certain
allowable deviation. There is no further print for checking, however, the result is added to
all papers (unless in tolerance) just as in a "normal“ MBL.
A message will be created if the results of the FastMBL are not within the expected
correction range. In this case the deviation is too high to get all measuring fields back in
tolerance with only one iteration process. In this case a "normal“ MBL must be printed to
get the production back into a neutral range.
5
Test
Start FastMBL

The pixel correction calibrates the light path of the lamp all the way to the CCD. It is
required for the following jobs:
– Balancing the pixel sensitivity of the CCD (for each single pixel).
– Defining the illumination intensity (influenced by lamp, filter, mirror box, film carrier),
e.g. in case of lamp replacement.
– To define the window of the inserted film carrier (illumination on the CCD chip).
The pixel sensitivity varies, among others, with the temperature of the CCD chip and with
brightness. For this reason, the PIKO is executed automatically in the following cases:
– Machine startup
(Whereby any film carrier may be inserted when the machine is started.)
– Film carrier change
– changing from negative film to slide and vice versa
– Major light and temperature fluctuations (light path / CCD)
Manual PIKO is only required if it was not terminated correctly. This may happen if there
were particles in the light path, e.g. paper , film, or the film carrier is not correctly
inserted.
Starting the PIKO manually

Film carrier must be inserted and empty.
Insert a film carrier (if not done before) and
remove / eject film if necessary.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-21

Note
Do not change the film carrier during a PIKO!
The PIKO is interrupted when the film carrier is changed and the exposure window is
not defined correctly. This results in wrongly exposed prints (brightness, colors) and
possibly prints with white borders.

Test
Start PiCo
m3
The pixel correction is started. Info screen inform about the calibration progress. Once the
calibration is completed the Start screen is displayed.
Note
Check the scan lamp if an automatic PIKO was triggered during production.
Note: The terms PIKO, PICO, and PiCo are different abbreviations for pixel correction,
but they all have the same meaning.
5-22 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.6 Checking the Process (Chemical control strip test)
The quality of the chemical solutions is checked by means of the chemical control strip
test. For this test the pre-exposed chemical control strip is inserted in the machine,
processed, and then analyzed. If the densities in the measuring fields of the chemical
control strip correspond to the nominal values the production can be started. If not, the
chemicals must be replaced (see Chapter 3).
To ensure the production quality, we recommend to run this test every day.
Order number of the digital chemical control strips (5x5): (ABC code) 5HWGX 5
Checking the process:
The following requirements must be met:
– the machine must be ready for operation (working temperature reached),

– and there is no order in process.
Open the Printer front door:

The control strip box is located in the lower
lane distributor (LD; d-lab.2) resp. Sheet
Distributor (SD; d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus) on
the right.
Open the lock of the control strip box and
remove the box.
G_SD701
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 5-23

1 2 In a darkroom insert the chemical control

strip in the controls strip box in such a way
that the notch is on the bottom right hand
side (smooth side – emulsion side – facing
downwards; see Figure).
If the test strip is accidentally inserted
upside down. the developed test usually
shows distinctive dirt marks (emulsion side
up) or the pre-exposed measuring fields are
fogged and cannot be evaluated any more.
2
3
dlab2608
(1) Control strip box
(2) Emulsion side / photographic layer
(3) Notch
Test
Control strip
Chemical control strip
Then a prompt pops up to insert the
chemical control strip.
Place the control strip box on the provided
holder.
Close the Printer front door and press
Continue:
The control strip is transported into the
Paper Processor and processed there.
A message indicates when the box should be
removed. Remove the box or leave it in the
machine until the next test.
Analyze the developed chemical control
strip.
A first evaluation is possible by comparing
the developed control strip with the
reference strip enclosed in the box (place
both strips side by side and compare them in
daylight conditions). Use a densitometer for
a more detailed evaluation (instructions are
dlab2195 included in every package).
If the densities in the measuring fields of the chemical control strip correspond to the
nominal values the production can be started. If not, the chemicals must be replaced (see
Chapter 3).
Professional evaluation of the tests by AgfaPhoto is also possible. Please contact the
sales organization.
5-24 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Production
6 Production
6.1 Order Handling – Overview.......................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Preparations Before Production Start ................................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Print Modes..................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.2.1 Print modes and Possible Film and File Formats ..............................................................6-2
6.1.2.2 Printing without or with Preview.............................................................................................6-4
6.1.2.3 Order Configurations....................................................................................................................6-5
6.1.2.4 Changing to another print mode .............................................................................................6-5
6.1.3 Order Handling ...........................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.4 Order Tracing............................................................................................................................................6-10
6.1.5 Changing the Order Number..............................................................................................................6-10 6
6.1.6 Select or Change Configuration........................................................................................................6-11
6.1.6.1 Configuration Types for Print Orders...................................................................................6-11
6.1.6.2 Display of the Current Configuration ..................................................................................6-12
6.1.6.3 Changing the Configuration for the Complete Order....................................................6-16
6.1.6.5 Selecting Another Configuration for the Complete Order...........................................6-18
6.1.8 End of Order (Automatic / Manual) .................................................................................................6-20
6.1.9 Special Print Products and Motif Groups ......................................................................................6-21
6.1.9.1 Black and White Prints.............................................................................................................6-21
6.1.9.2 Sepia Prints and Prints with Color Cast .............................................................................6-23
6.1.9.3 Reorder
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus of Black/White Films / Films Without
Extended DX Code .....................................................................................................................6-23
6.1.9.4 Portraits..........................................................................................................................................6-24
6.1.9.5 Border Prints ................................................................................................................................6-24
6.2 Preparing the Machine for Different Orders.....................................................................................................6-26
6.2.1 Changing the Paper Magazine and Loading Paper ...................................................................6-26
6.2.1.1 Removing the Paper Magazine.............................................................................................6-27
6.2.1.2 Removing the Paper..................................................................................................................6-27
6.2.1.3 Adjusting the Paper Widths....................................................................................................6-28
6.2.1.4 Loading Paper into the Magazine ........................................................................................6-29
6.2.1.5 Coding the Paper Magazine...................................................................................................6-30
6.2.1.6 Inserting a Paper Magazine....................................................................................................6-30
6.3 Printing...........................................................................................................................................................................6-33
6.3.1.1 Activating the Print Mode and Selecting a Configuration..........................................6-33
6.3.1.2 Autoprint without Preview......................................................................................................6-34
6.3.1.3 Autoprint with Preview.............................................................................................................6-35
6.3.2.1 Activating the Print Mode and Editing a Reorder List ..................................................6-40
6.3.2.2 Reorder without Preview .........................................................................................................6-44
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-i

Production d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
6.3.2.3 Reorder with Preview................................................................................................................6-46

6.3.4 Working with File Print Mode ........................................................................................................... 6-55
6.3.4.1 General Information ..................................................................................................................6-55
6.3.4.2 Using dTFS: Automatic Color and Density Corrections.................................................6-57
6.3.4.3 Load Image Files from Storage Media ................................................................................6-58
6.3.4.4 Saving Digital Orders ................................................................................................................6-61
6.3.4.5 Loading a Saved Digital Order ...............................................................................................6-62
6.3.4.6 Delete the Saved Digital Order .............................................................................................6-64
6.3.4.7 Printing File Prints without Preview....................................................................................6-65
6.3.4.8 Printing File Prints with Preview ..........................................................................................6-67
6.4 The Functions Image Editing and Special ........................................................................................................ 6-80
6.4.1 Image Editing........................................................................................................................................... 6-81
6.4.1.1 Activation ......................................................................................................................................6-81
6.4.1.2 Making Color and Density Corrections...............................................................................6-82
6.4.1.3 Cropping ........................................................................................................................................6-83
6.4.1.4 Image Improvement..................................................................................................................6-84
6.4.2 Special........................................................................................................................................................ 6-85
6.4.2.1 Enter and Format Text for the Exposure .............................................................................6-86
6.4.2.2 Setting a Border ..........................................................................................................................6-88
6.4.3 Saving an Image as File....................................................................................................................... 6-89
6.5 Manual red eyes correction ................................................................................................................................... 6-91
6.6 Index prints................................................................................................................................................................... 6-95
6.6.1 Index Prints in the Different Print Modes ..................................................................................... 6-96
6.6.2 Sequence and Designations of the Thumbnails ......................................................................... 6-97
6.6.3 Quantity, Size, and Aspect Ratio of the Thumbnails ................................................................ 6-97
6.6.4 Print Index Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 6-98
6.7 Saving Images with Autosave ............................................................................................................................... 6-99
6.7.1 Printing and Saving Images .............................................................................................................6-100
6.7.2 Save Images Only, Without Printing.............................................................................................6-101
6.8 Network Orders.........................................................................................................................................................6-102
6.8.1 The Minilab in a Network..................................................................................................................6-102
6.8.2 Manual Start of Network Orders.....................................................................................................6-104
6.8.3 Automatic Start of Network Orders ...............................................................................................6-105
6.8.4 Deleting Network Orders...................................................................................................................6-106
6.9 Printing Price Labels (Option) ............................................................................................................................6-107
6.10 Saving and Displaying Statistics........................................................................................................................6-108
6.10.1 Displaying Statistics............................................................................................................................6-108
6.10.2 Saving Statistics ...................................................................................................................................6-109
6.11 Clickrate (Option).....................................................................................................................................................6-110
6-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.1 Order Handling – Overview
6.1.1 Preparations Before Production Start

Prior to production start, the following routines must be completed:
– Machine and user specific settings were made (see Chapter 4).
– Order configurations have been defined (see Defining and Editing Order
Configurations in Chapter 4).
– Required maintenance is taken care of (see Chapter 8).
– Machine is switched on (see Switching On and Off in Chapter 2).
– Operator has logged in (see Login of Another User in Chapter 2).
6
– Machine is calibrated (see Chapter 5).
– Order sorter is in working position.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-1

6.1.2 Print Modes

6.1.2.1 Print modes and Possible Film and File Formats
m1
The minilab offers several print modes for the processing of various image sources (see
Print mode menu at the top of the Screen; print modes which are not available are
shown in gray).
Conventional print modes:
– Autoprint
For the printing of D&P orders (films or film strips, either with or without preview) in
the formats
– 135
color and black&white
– 135 HF (half-frame)
– APS (IX240)
only color films
– 120 sizes 4.5x6, 6x6, 6x7, 6x8, 6x9
– 110
– Reorder
For the printing of reorders (color films with extended DX code – 135 and APS/IX240,
either with or without preview).
6-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

– Manual positioning
For the printing of films without the extended DX code and for the printing of single
negatives or short film strips which cannot be printed in Autoprint mode (always with
preview, the same formats can be printed as in Autoprint).
– Slide print
For the printing of slides (of 135-type film, mounted, always with preview).
– Slide film
(Option; only available after activation (see Installing / Activating Software in
Chapter 4)
To print prints of reversal film strips (135 and 120/220 films).
Digital prints:
– File print
6
To print images of digital sources in the formats: ".jpg" (also JPEG2000 and
progressive compression), ".bmp" or ".tif" (also with LZW compression). The image
data is loaded
– from mobile data carriers or
– a drive in a PC integrated in the network
and printed on the minilab (with or without preview, as desired).
Applies to d-lab.2
The following drives are available on the main computer: Floppy disk, CD-ROM/DVD,
Zip, memory cards (PCMCIA, Compact Flash, MicroDrive, Smart Media, Memory Stick,
SD/MMC memory card).
Applies to d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus

The main computer offers a floppy disk drive, the drive bay offers drives for the
following media: CD-ROM/DVD, Zip, memory cards (PCMCIA, Compact Flash, Smart
Media, Sony Memory Stick, SD/MMC).
– Network order
For the printing of digital orders, which have been completely prepared on a
workstation. These orders are transmitted via network to the Minilab where they are
printed automatically.
The start may be either automatic to use idle times (times without operator action), or
manual, i.e. it is triggered by the operator.
See Network Orders in Chapter 6
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-3

6.1.2.2 Printing without or with Preview

In case of printing without preview, the negatives (only d-lab.2/2plus) or image files are
printed without further actions be the operator. It is not possible to switch to Autoprint
with preview while an order is running.
Printing without preview:
can be selected in the print modes Autoprint, Reorder
– can be selected in the print mode File print
– always active in the print mode Network order
During printing with preview numerous functions for image corrections and image
enhancement are offered. They have than an additional effect on the preset corrections
(see Production Balance in Chapter 4).
Dotted lines in the preview images indicate that the image format does not correspond to
the selected paper size. The print only shows the image area between the lines.
The edited images can be saved on storage media.
It is not possible to switch to a print mode without preview while an order is running.
Printing with preview:
Can be selected in the modes Autoprint, Reorder
– Can be selected in the mode File print
Always in the modes Manual positioning, Slide print and Slide film (option)
6-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.1.2.3 Order Configurations

Order configurations are settings on the machine which are used to produce a certain
print result of an image material (paper format, back print, probably index print etc.). For
each print mode you want to use at least one order configuration must be set up (see
Configuration Types for Print Orders in this chapter, as well as Defining and Editing Order
Every print mode has a standard order configuration assigned which is called up
automatically together with the print mode (see Select Order Configuration as
Standard in Chapter 4). If several order configurations are available for a selected print
mode, each one of these configurations can be selected for an order (see Choosing
Another Configuration for the Complete Order in this chapter).
6
6.1.2.4 Changing to another print mode
Only one print mode can be used at a time. It is not possible to open several windows
concurrently for different print modes.
If you change to another print mode, the default order configuration for this print mode is
automatically activated.
If a new order is started within a mode the configuration used last remains active, except
in the modes Reorder and Network order. In case of Reorder the system changes to the
default configuration after every order.
If a new order is started in the print mode File print, the configuration setting used last
will be kept (not in print mode Network order.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-5

6.1.3 Order Handling
Print modes Autoprint / Reorder / Manual positioning / Slide print / Slide Film
Mount the matching film carrier or slide
carrier (see Changing the Film Carrier in
this chapter).
Note
The slide mask must be inserted to print
mounted slides in the Slide print mode. To
print negatives or reversal film strips insert a
film mask corresponding to the film size.
Note
The machine detects the film masks and slide
masks automatically. Each change of the film
mask is followed automatically by a pixel
correction (PIKO). When changing between
reversal film mode and negative film mode
there is always a shortened PIKO, even without
film mask change.
Do not pull out the carrier during this pixel
correction!
Insert the matching mirror box

(see Changing the Mirror Box in this
chapter).
Insert the paper magazine with the required
paper (width, surface) (see Changing the
Paper Magazine and Inserting Paper in this
chapter).
Select a print mode (see Printing in the
Print Modes Autoprint / Reorder / Manual
Positioning / Slide Print / Slide Film in this
chapter).
If necessary change settings (change order
number, select or change configuration; see
Changing the Order Number and
Selecting or Changing the Configuration in
this chapter).
Activate the preview if wanted.
6-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

For Reorder create a list of the reorders.

Feed the film (film strips) or insert the single
negatives or slides / reversal film strip.
If you work with preview, make changes for
the individual prints if necessary, and print.
Without preview the printing is carried out
without further actions by the operator.
Remove the film / film strip / single
negative or slide / reversal film strip.
Insert the next film / film strip or single
negative / slide / reversal film strip and
proceed as described above.
6
Once all negatives or slides have been
printed: finish the order if there is no
automatic end of order.
Take the prints out of the sorter.
If wanted print a price label (requires
optional software and a label printer).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-7

Print mode File print
Note
Any film carrier must be inserted.

chapter).
Select print mode File Print (see Printing
in the Print Mode in this chapter).
Load the image files belonging to the order
from the data media or call up an order
saved before.
If necessary change settings (change order
number, select or change configuration;
activate / deactivate dTFS; see Changing
the Order Number and Selecting or Changing
the Configuration in this chapter).
Activate the preview if wanted.
Start printing.
If you work with preview, make changes for
the individual prints if necessary, and print.
Without preview the printing is carried out
without further actions by the operator.
The order is automatically finished once all image
files have been printed.
6-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Print mode Network order
Note
Any film carrier must be inserted.

chapter).
Select a print mode (see Manual Start of
Network Orders in this chapter).
Select the network order and start printing.
The order is automatically finished once all image 6
files have been printed.
Note
Each order automatically receives an order number. This order number remains valid
until the order is finished (automatically or manually).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-9

6.1.4 Order Tracing

During printing an order number is assigned to each order. This order number can be
printed on the back of the print together with various other information (see Defining
and Editing Back Print Configurations in Chapter 4). This simplifies the allocation of prints
and film.
The film and the envelope must be identified so that an order can be traced and the
envelope, the film and the prints can be combined. For this, stickers with numbers (Twin
Check labels) are used. The same number is put on the order envelope and on the film tip.
When the prints are in the sorter bucket, the film is cut into strips and sleeved into
transparent sleeves in an optional film sleever, e.g. AgfaPhoto FS1. The strips and the
prints are put in a photo bag which is then inserted in the order envelope.
With the optional accessory Pricing Software and Label Printer orders can be priced and
price labels can be printed (see Pricing Settings in Chapter 4, Printing Price Labels
(Option) in this chapter and in the Operating Instructions delivered with the Label Printer).
6.1.5 Changing the Order Number

If you call up a print mode the corresponding screen opens. The order number is displayed
in top left corner.
After switching on or after a reset of the Minilab the order number is always set on 1. For
further order it then increments automatically, even if the print mode is changed.
If the machine is set up accordingly the order number can be changed (Order no. >
manual; see Other Settings in Chapter 4). It cannot be changed if the option Order
no. > automatic has been selected.
Press Change?
Enter the desired order number (3 digits) and
confirm with OK.
If the number exists already, a prompt comes up
whether to overwrite the order.
For the following orders the order number will be
incremented starting with the entered number.
042_start
6-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.1.6 Select or Change Configuration

When a print mode is called up (see Printing in this chapter) the default order
configuration for this print mode is pre-selected (in the d-lab.2/2plus under consideration
of the inserted film carrier). Now it is possible (except in Network order mode):
– to display the selected configuration,
– to change the selected configuration for the current order (these changes are not
saved),
– or to select another configuration.
6.1.6.1 Configuration Types for Print Orders

Four types of order configurations are available for printing 6
(see Configuration Types for Print Orders in this chapter, as well as Defining and Editing
Order Configurations in Chapter 4):
– S Single
– P Package
– C Combi-print
– R Reproduction
Only one order configuration can be selected per order.
– Single
All prints of the order are printed in the same format.
– Package
A package has several order configurations of the types Single, Combi-print, and/or
Reproduction combined so that different formats are printed of every image file of an
order.
– Combi-print
An image is printed several times on one sheet of paper (in the same size or different
sizes).
Combi-prints can be made from negative (only d-lab.2/2plus), slide (only
d-lab.2/2plus), and image files.
– Reproduction
for digital images: The image files of an order are printed without the automatic image
improvement and without image size adaptation so that the prints correspond
precisely to the original.
Application: images created with an image processing program or exposures that are
artificially falsified.
Printing is without preview; the configuration cannot be changed.
If the image file is
– too big with respect to the paper size, the image is cut.
– to small with respect to the paper size, the image gets white borders.
– approx. 3 times smaller than the paper size, image processing artifacts may occur.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-11

6.1.6.2 Display of the Current Configuration

After calling up the Autoprint mode:
Press Show configuration.
009

After calling up the Manual positioning mode:
Change configuration
Show configuration
013
6-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

After calling up the File print mode:

Press Show configuration.
042_start

After calling up the Slide print mode:
Show configuration
077_start
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-13


After calling up the Slide film mode:
Show configuration
151_start
The function Display current configuration is not available in the print modes Reorder
and Network order.
The function Display current configuration is not available in the print mode Network
order.
6-14 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

049
The Show configuration screen opens.

All details about the current configuration and the pertaining sub-configurations are
listed.
Modifications are not possible in this screen.
Press Close to exit the screen.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-15

6.1.6.3 Changing the Configuration for the Complete Order
Note
The Change configuration function is not available in the Reorder(only d-lab.2/2plus)
and Network order modes.
Note
Modifications for a running order are not possible. Modifications can only be entered
before an order is started.
Note
The modifications become effective only after the screen called up with Change
configuration (see following page) is left again. If the order is started before it will
be printed with the settings valid prior to the changes.
After activation of the print mode

(for d-lab.2/2plus
Autoprint, Manual positioning, Reorder, Slide
print, Slide film, or File print
and for netlab.2plus
File print)
Press Change configuration.
042_start (Picture shows the start screen for print mode File Print)
The screen Change config. for the order opens. The offered possibilities for changes in
this screen depend on the print mode in which this screen was called up. The meaning of
the changeable settings is explained in Chapter 4, Defining and Editing Print
Configurations and/or Defining and Editing Order Configurations.
6-16 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Change the settings as desired and confirm

with OK.
Note
These modifications apply to the current order
only. The modifications are not saved in the
configuration.
016

This function is only available in the Manual positioning mode, here the function
Change configuration can be called up for each scanned image (see Working in
Manual Positioning Mode in this chapter).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-17

6.1.6.5 Selecting Another Configuration for the Complete Order
Note
The function is not available in the print mode Network order.

In the Reorder print mode the configuration is changed differently than described
below (see Working with Reorder Print Mode in this chapter).
Press the Show configuration button.
The indicated list contains all configurations
defined for the inserted film carrier.
The indicated list contains all defined
configurations.
Note
An asterisk (*) identifies order configurations
which can be printed with the inserted paper.
“P“ refers to package configurations
"C" identifies Combiprint configurations.
Select the desired configuration from the

list.
042_konf
Press ok.

This function is only available in the Manual positioning mode, here another
configuration can be called up for each scanned image (see Working in Manual
Positioning Mode in this chapter).
6-18 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Insert film (formats 110, 120, 135) and unmounted slides

The films or film strips (reversal or negative film) are inserted via the film feeder. The
operator inserts the film between the feeder guides with the emulsion side turned down.
The machine detects the film and pulls it in automatically.
After scanning and printing the films of type 135 are ejected downwards into the film box.
So the next film or film strip of type 135 can be inserted while the first film is still being
printed. Films of size 120 are returned through the film feed.
Note
Single negatives or single slides are inserted directly in the film carrier. 6
Insert mounted slides

Mounted slides are inserted directly in the slide carrier. When you call up the slide mode,
the upper part of the slide carrier opens automatically:
Insert the slide with correct orientation.

Push in the upper part of the slide carrier.
Insert APS film
CAUTION!
To be observed when working with APS films:
– Do not fold the film as otherwise the magnetic code cannot be read in this spot.
– Do not expose the film to strong magnetic fields as otherwise the magnetic code will
be deleted.
– Do not splice the film in the area of the magnetic tracks as otherwise the magnetic
layer may come off when the splice is removed.
APS films are rewound into the cartridge after development and are kept there.
An APS film cartridge is smaller than a 135-type film cartridge.
As the customer cannot see the APS film, the film status is indicated on the cartridge.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-19

Film status indication:

unexposed
partly exposed
fully exposed but not developed
1 21 mm
2 developed film
4
3 IPI: Irreversible Process Indicator
(pushed in for developed film)
APS_cart
APS films are inserted in a separate unit in the
film feeder.
Insert the APS film in this feeder unit.
6.1.8 End of Order (Automatic / Manual)

The orders are completed by end of order. After an end of order the sorter switches to the
next bucket, so the prints are sorted in separate buckets according to the orders.
Special cases:
– The sorter switches to the next bucket without order end if an order exceeds the
capacity of one bucket (max. 40 prints).
– Splices in the paper rolls are cut separately and the respective pieces of paper are
deposited in the print order stack.
If after an end of order a negative or slide is scanned (only d-lab.2/2plus), or an image file
is loaded, this starts a new order. This new order automatically gets a new order number.
Automatic end of order is activated:

– In Autoprint mode: if a film (strip), which exceeds a certain adjustable length, leaves
the film drive (see Other Settings < Film Length in Chapter 4).
– In Reorder, File print and Network order mode if all images of the order have been
processed.
– Upon changing to another print mode.
– When the film carrier is changed.
– When the film stop key (STOP key) on the machine is pressed.
– When the Stop button on the screen is pressed (attention, the order is not complete if
the last print has not yet left the Printer section)..
– In File print and Network order mode if all images of the order have been processed.
– Upon changing to another print mode.
– When the Stop button on the screen is pressed (Attention! This order is incomplete if
the last picture has not yet left the Printer section).
6-20 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Manual end of order is activated by pressing the End of order button or End of order
after film strip. This is necessary:
– In the Manual positioning and Slide print mode.
– In the Autoprint mode if the function Autom. end of order is inactive (see Other
Settings in Chapter 4).
– In the Autoprint mode if the function Autom. end of order is activated but the film
strip to be printed is shorter than defined under Film length (e.g. 4-neg strip) (see
Other Settings in Chapter 4).
Note
All information needed for pricing is saved whenever an order is terminated.
6.1.9 Special Print Products and Motif Groups
6.1.9.1 Black and White Prints

Black&white prints can be printed
– Applies to d-lab.2/2plus
from black&white films of the sizes 135, 120, 110 (with colored film base and
without),
– Applies to d-lab.2/2plus
from color films of the sizes 135, 120, 110,
– from grayscale image files.
Original: color negative film

The selected order configuration must be a configuration for the film type B/W. This
eliminates the colors of color negatives by calculation during the digitizing. The prints are
then black&white. We recommend to set the saturation for strong dominant colors to -9.
Note
Film type B/W is not possible in Reorder. In this case color negatives are printed in
color even if a B/W configuration has been selected.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-21

Original: black&white film

B/W films can only be printed in the Autoprint and Manual positioning mode.
The Reorder mode cannot be used for B/W (see Reorders of Black/White Film / Film
without Extended DX Code in this chapter).
Before inserting the black-and-white film, one of the order configurations with the film
type setting B/W must be selected.
If an order configuration with the film type Color negative is selected, the Prescanner
expects a color negative film or a black-and-white film with colored film base. In this case
the handling is stopped with an error message and the black-and-white film is ejected.
Note
It may happen that thin unmasked B/W films cannot be positioned and therefore will
not be printed. Ilford XP2 films are not printed (no detectable film base).
Note
There is no scratch correction for black-and-white films (see Scanner Settings
(Scratch Correction, Scan Cropping) in Chapter 4). If it is activated, it will automatically
be deactivated when black-and-white films are printed in a B/W configuration, and is
automatically activated again when color negatives are printed.
Original: image files

Only those black&white image files can be printed which have been defined as
black&white (grayscale) images. The Minilab cannot convert to black&white.
6-22 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.1.9.2 Sepia Prints and Prints with Color Cast

Prints with color cast (e.g. sepia) can only be printed from black&white material.
Produce the color cast by entering a color correction and a saturation > 0 for the image to
be printed. For sepia e.g. enter
Yellow +3
Red +4
Saturation: 9
The higher the value for the saturation (range: 1–9), the stronger the color cast
(a setting < 0 results in an image processing error).
Which settings for color and saturation result in a color shade meeting the expectations
of the customer must be determined in tests with various settings.
These settings can be entered 6
– in the Autoprint mode with preview (Only available on the d-lab.2/2plus) and Slide print
mode with preview (color corrections directly in the print mode screen or after
activating Image editing > Color/Density corrections, saturation after activating
Image editing > Edit).
– in a correction configuration which must be linked to the used order configuration or
which must be selected via the function Change configuration for the current order
(see Correction Configurations in Chapter 4 or Changing the Configuration for the
Complete Order in this chapter).
6.1.9.3 Reorder
Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus of Black/White Films / Films Without Extended DX Code
Reorders of black&white films and of films without extended DX code can be printed in
the Reorder mode. However, they can also be printed in autoprint mode. General
procedure (for details see Working in Autoprint Mode in this chapter):
– Call up Autoprint.
– Select the order configuration which has B/W entered as film type.
– Activate preview.
– Insert the B/W film.
– For negatives which have not been ordered press Skip, for ordered negatives change
the number of prints is necessary and print.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-23

6.1.9.4 Portraits
Portraits may come out too sharp and thus seem unnatural. Remedy:
– Set up a correction configuration with the following settings and add it to the order
configuration (this applies then to all pictures of the order for which this configuration
is selected).
or
– In the print mode with preview press Image editing > Edit to enter the following
settings (applies to the current image):
Area contrast +1
Detail contrast 0
Sharpness - edges –4
Saturation –1
6.1.9.5 Border Prints

There are two possibilities to print border prints:
1. Border color and width are defined in an order configuration. This settings applies to
all images in an order.
Enter the desired border width in the Order

configuration screen (see Defining and
Editing Order Configurations in Chapter 4)
under Border and select the desired color
under Border color (see Defining and
Editing an Order Configuration of the Single
Type in Chapter 4).
022_dpsi
6-24 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

2. Border color and width are specified in the screen Special. The setting applies to the
current picture.
Activation of the screen Special in the screens of the print modes Autoprint with
preview / Manual positioning / Autoprint with preview (File print) / Slide print / Slide
film).
Press Special:
The button is displayed in the preview with
four images and an enlarged view (see
Setting the Border in this chapter).
Press Border. 6
Enter the Width and select a Color in the
following screen.
017
The colored border is then shown in the preview.
046_rand
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-25

6.2 Preparing the Machine for Different Orders
6.2.1 Changing the Paper Magazine and Loading Paper
Note
The paper must be taken out of the cool storage at least 24 hours before use so that
possible condensation may dry again.
The Minilab holds two paper magazines. The magazines accept papers of the following
widths:
Minilab Paper magazine Paper width

d-lab.2 left hand paper magazine 82–210 mm 3.25– 8.25 inch
right hand paper magazine 82–305 mm 3.25–12.00 inch
d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus left hand paper magazine 82–305 mm 3,25–12,00 inch
right hand paper magazine 82–305 mm 3,25–12,00 inch
The paper is inserted in the d lab.2 in several steps which are explained in detail in the
following paragraphs:
Remove the paper magazine.

Take out any paper, if necessary, in the
darkroom.
If paper of a different width is to be loaded,
set the paper magazine to the desired paper
width.
Go to a darkroom to load the paper in the
paper magazine.
Set the magazine code for paper width and
surface.
Insert the magazine in the Minilab.
Cut the leading paper edge, if necessary
(automatic function).
6-26 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.2.1.1 Removing the Paper Magazine
CAUTION!
The magazine must only be removed after the paper has been rewound into the
magazine (approx. 30 seconds after completion of the last print process) and the
LED in front of the magazine shows green. Otherwise the paper may tear and
cause a paper jam.
Open the door to the paper magazine.

Press the locking lever to the side (see
Illustration, small arrow).
Pull out the paper magazine. 6
MSC1B035
6.2.1.2 Removing the Paper

If there is still paper in the magazine remove it
in a darkroom:
Open the magazine.
Remove the paper roll.
Pull out the core.
Pack the paper light-tight.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-27

6.2.1.3 Adjusting the Paper Widths

The magazine must be adjusted to the paper width to be used, to ensure correct paper
guidance in the magazine (three guides).
Open the magazine and remove the core.

Undo the screw for the holder of the paper
guide and remove the holder (see
Illustration).
msc1b078
Insert the four fingers of the paper guides in

the notches corresponding to the paper
width:
Ensure that all four fingers are in the correct
notch.
Insert the holder again and fasten the screw.
dlabb002
Undo the screws of the guides on the

magazine exit.
Move the guide to the required width and
tighten the screws.
The guides engage if they are inserted
correctly.
dlabb003
6-28 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Then adjust the guides in the other

magazine part in the same way.
dlabb004
6
Note
If more paper types are used, we recommend to prepare a magazine per paper width.
6.2.1.4 Loading Paper into the Magazine

In a darkroom take the paper roll out of the
package and push the core through the roll.
Insert the paper in the magazine observing
the winding direction (see Illustration).
Pull the leading paper edge through the two
clips on the magazine outlet.
Pull the paper somewhat out of the
magazine, hold it with one hand and close
the magazine with the other hand.
Rewind the paper into the magazine by
means of one of the gears attached at the
sides of the magazine outlet, until the light
shutter of the magazine closes (this prevents
fogging of the leading paper edge).
msc1b039
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-29

6.2.1.5 Coding the Paper Magazine

The code for the inserted paper must be set on the paper magazine. After the magazine is
inserted the machine detects the paper width and surface by the set code.
By means of the slides on the magazine the

width and surface of the inserted paper must
be coded as defined in the paper settings
(see Defining Paper Widths and Defining
Surfaces in Chapter 4).
CAUTION!
A machine can only detect the paper
correctly if the magazine is coded
precisely as defined in the paper settings.
Codes that are not matching cause
production problems.
6.2.1.6 Inserting a Paper Magazine
Note
Do not use two paper magazines with the same code at the same time in the machine!
Note
After a paper magazine was inserted the
Minilab determines the paper length. For this,
the paper moves to the cutter and back. To
avoid fogging of the paper both Printer doors
must be closed for this procedure.
Open the door to the paper magazine.

Place the paper magazine on the guide rails
and push it in until it locks audibly.
Close the door to the paper magazine.
The screen shows a popup asking if the
leading paper edge should be cut.
MSC1B035b
6-30 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

In order to avoid paper transport problems

due to an incorrectly cut paper tip, we
recommend to press yes the following
cases:
– when a new paper roll was inserted;
– when a paper jam occurred.
If paper cutting is confirmed, the machine cuts the paper tip and transport this piece of
paper through the complete paper drive and places it in the sorter.
6
For films of type 120 a different mirror box than for all the other film formats must be
inserted.
If necessary, change the mirror box as follows:
Use both hands to hold the mirror box (1) on

both sides and pull it out towards the front.
Place the other mirror box on the guide rails
and push it in towards the lamphouse until it
locks in.
1
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-31


The corresponding film carrier must be inserted for each film format.
CAUTION!
Only pull out the film carrier when no film is inserted. If you pull on the film
carrier with a film inside, the film will be damaged (exception: single frame
processing in the Manual positioning mode; see Working with Manual
Positioning Mode in this chapter).
Remove the film carrier:

Wait until the film is automatically ejected
or eject the film (required in manual
positioning mode: press Eject).
Pull the film carrier out to the front and lift it
off.
Insert the film carrier:
Insert the film carrier in the guides.
Push it in until it locks noticeably.
dlabr094
After the film carrier has been changed, the pixel correction (PIKO) is performed
automatically. The film carrier must not be pulled out during the PIKO, otherwise errors
occur (see Calibrating the Scanner (Pixel Correction, PIKO) in Chapter 5).
6-32 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3 Printing

6.3.1.1 Activating the Print Mode and Selecting a Configuration
Print mode
Autoprint
009_start
The screen Autoprint without preview opens. It displays:

– Order number
– Default configuration for the inserted film carrier and various information of this
configuration
– Several buttons
Prior to print start:
– the order number can be changed (only if Order number manual has been selected in
the settings): see Change Order Numbers in this chapter.
– the selected configuration can be displayed (see Display Current Configuration in
this chapter)
– another configuration can be selected (see Selecting Another Configuration for the
Complete Order in this chapter)
– the selected configuration can be changed for the current order (see Changing the
Configuration for the Complete Order in this chapter)
– the preview function can be activated
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-33

6.3.1.2 Autoprint without Preview

This is the simplest print mode with the highest throughput.
Preview must be inactive (default setting).

Deactivate Preview on, if necessary.
Insert a film / film strip:
It is pulled in, scanned, and printed.
While the order is being processed, the
bottom part of the screen shows information
about the configuration as well as the
process status (Order being processed):
– Quantity of the prints printed so far and the
total number of prints.
– Frame number of the presently printed
negative.
– FID number (for films IX240).
009
Insert further film strips if they belong to the
same order.
If an order is not automatically finished (see
End of Order (automatic / manual) in this
chapter) press Order end after film strip.
While this order is being processed the operator can prepare the next order (see Upper
section of the screen, Next order), or change to another print mode if necessary (after End
of order).
Note
It is not possible to switch to autoprint with preview while an order is running.
6-34 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3.1.3 Autoprint with Preview

Activate Preview on.
Insert a film / film strip.
402
The film / film strip is pulled in and scanned, the screen Autoprint with preview opens.
The screen shows the preview images (maximum four images at the same time). The
display already considers the corrections of the selected configuration. Information about
the current configuration is shown below the row of preview frames.
The preview frames move automatically in the set preview frequency (see Defining
Users and User Rights / Preview Frequency in Chapter 4). As soon as the first image is
shown in the far right position, it becomes active; the buttons Stop and Skip can be used:
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-35

If you want to print the active image without

further processing: press none of the two
buttons.
If you do not want to print the active image:
press Skip.
If you want to edit the active image press
Stop.
The automatic transport of the preview is
stopped. Buttons are offered which allow
editing of the active image (settings and
possibilities are explained below).
Note
For capacity reasons, the images in the display have much fewer pixels than the prints
later on. Lack of sharpness can therefore not always be seen in the preview.
Editing and printing the active image

Color / density corrections: Press the Arrow
keys to change the values.
Note
Color and density corrections can also be made
via the Image editing function. This function
offers an enlarged view for these corrections
(see The Functions Image Editing and
Special in this chapter).
Press Red eyes correction if you want to

change the current setting for automatic
correction (see also Automatic red eyes
correction in Chapter 4).
Note
The Manual red eyes correction is available
010 in the function Enlarged view.
6-36 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Enlarged view
Press Enlarged view, if you want to activate
this function.
019
The current image is shown twice for comparison:

– small: original
– enlarged: edited version
In case of modifications with the functions Image editing or Special the preview is
refreshed immediately (see Functions Image Editing and Specially in this chapter).
To show vertical images correctly in the

enlargement press Turn view (every time
you press the image turns cw by 90°).
If you want to switch off the enlarged view:
Press Enlarged view off.
The screen shows again the normal preview
with four images.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-37

Edit the image (in the normal view or the

enlarged view):
Press the desired button to make changes or
initiate the respective action.
Change PpF
Change the number of prints per frame.
Image editing and Specially
See Functions of Image Editing and
Specially in this chapter.
Image editing (only in the enlarged view):
Manual Red Eyes Corr.
Press the button if you want to use this
function.
The following screen allows input of the
respective settings (see Manual red
eyes correction in this chapter).
Note
The manual red eyes correction must be the
last one of the corrections to be made:
Color and density corrections result in new
calculation of the image and reset the manual
red eyes correction.
If the changes are to be transmitted to the

following images (only in the normal view with
four images):
Press Hold
All corrections etc., except the cropped
section and red eyes correction, are kept for
all other prints of the order up to the next
modification.
Note
This action requires a lot of time because all
images shown in the preview are recalculated
and refreshed.
6-38 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Print the image (in the normal view or the

enlarged view):
Press one of the following buttons.
Print & Stop
The current frame is printed. It remains
displayed so that other modifications
and further prints can be made.
Autoprint
The current frame is printed and no
longer displayed: The next frame moves
in from the left.
Skip
The current image is not printed and is 6
no longer displayed. The next frame
moves in from the left.
If you want to change to print mode Autoprint
without preview (only in the normal view with
four images):
Press Preview off
The preview disappears; the remaining
images of the order are printed with the
preset configuration.
After editing of the film / film strip:
If the order consists of several film strips,
insert all film strips one after the other, edit
the images and print them.
Finish the order after the last film strip is
there is no automatic end of order.
End of order
In the normal view or the enlarged view:
If necessary press End of order after film
strip.
This button is only active,

– if the automatic order end was deselected (see Other Settings in Chapter 4),
– if the automatic order end was selected, however the film length is shorter than the
setting (preset: 400 mm; see Other Settings in Chapter 4).
Note
In Autoprint mode with preview, the next order can only be edited after end of order
has been entered for the current film.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-39


Note
Reorder mode only allows printing of the following films:
– Films or film strips with extended DX code

– 135-type color negatives
– APS films
The following films cannot be printed in Reorder mode:
– B/W films
– Films of film format 120
– Reversal films
6.3.2.1 Activating the Print Mode and Editing a Reorder List

Print mode
Reorder
095_start
The screen Reorder without preview opens. It displays:

– Order number
– Inserted film carrier
– Two buttons
The following changes can be made prior to printing:
– Change order number (but only if manual order number was selected in the settings):
see Change Order Numbers in this chapter.
6-40 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

If you want to work with preview activate

Preview on.
Press Edit order.
011
The screen Edit Reorder list opens. For the functions of the individual keys see
overview on the following page.
The reorder list can either be edited via the touchscreen or via the optional reorder
keyboard (see Reorder Keyboard in Chapter 2).
Film size No. of lists

135 max. 2
IX240 unlimited if the FID (film identification number) is indicated
Note
The window for FID input only appears if the APS film carrier is inserted. It is possible to
enter information for several FIDs. This information can be called up again for printing
later on.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-41

Function of the individual keys:

Keys Functions
YMCD Color / density corrections: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Density
ACT, DCT, SHP Corrections: Area contrast (ACT), Detail contrast (DCT), Sharpness (SHP)
SAT , Correction: Saturation (SAT)
Comma to separate the frame numbers
0 to 9 Entry of numbers
- For the input of negative corrections: Minus
For the input of frame numbers: Hyphen
A, X Letters for DX code
Column-wise navigation in the reorder list
In reorder list: line-wise navigation
After pressing a line in the configuration column: scrolling through the list of configurations
OK Completing an input in a reorder list
Pulldown menu during configuration: accept selection and close the pulldown menu
DEL Deletes one position in the frame number field, e.g. 1A-3A, 13A
Deletes the complete number in the PpF field (prints per frame)
Inactive in the configuration field and in the correction field. Wrong entries in the correction
field are corrected by reentry; if no correction is desired, 0 must be typed in.
Enter frame numbers with PpF (prints per

frame), select corrections and configuration
(several frame numbers can be entered in
one line, separated by commas).
Note
The field PpF of the reorder list shows “--“. Internally this is understood as 1. An input
is only required if more than one print has been ordered.
Note
Whenever the reorder list is called up, it shows the default configuration for the
inserted film carrier, even if the configuration had been changed for the last order.
6-42 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Select Autosave and Back print for the

order (since the respective settings are
ignored in the selected order configuration).
The selection lists show the settings of the
configuration entered for the first print.
Press OK
to finish the list inputs.
095_edit
The screen Reorder without preview is displayed.

For IX240 films, it is checked whether a list exists already for the entered FID (Film
Identification Number):
– If not, the list is saved.
– If a list exists already for the FID, a pop-up window appears offering the options:
Overwrite and Cancel (changing the FID).
As required press Overwrite or Cancel.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-43

6.3.2.2 Reorder without Preview
The reorder list must be entered, preview activated (see Activating the Print Mode
and Editing the Reorder List in this chapter).
Feed the film strips of the order one after the

other: they are pulled in, scanned, and
printed.
095
While the order is being processed, the bottom part of the screen shows information
about the configuration as well as the process status (Order being processed):
– Negatives of the reorder list not yet scanned (see the Field Frame)
– Frame number of the presently printed negative
– Quantity of the prints printed so far and the total number of prints
– FID number (for films IX240)
The order is automatically finished after all DX numbers of the reorder list have been
found and printed. Afterwards the screen Reorder without preview is displayed again.
6-44 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

If you want to cancel / end the order before:

Press Delete remaining.
Images (DX numbers) not recorded in the
prescanner are not scanned / printed any
more.
While the order is being processed the operator can prepare the next order (see upper
part of the screen, Next order).
Note
It is not possible to switch to reorder with preview while an order is running.
6
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-45

6.3.2.3 Reorder with Preview
The reorder list must be entered, preview activated (see Activating a Pint Mode and
Editing the Reorder List in this chapter).
Insert the first film strip of the order.
The film strip is pulled in and scanned, the screen Reorder with preview opens.
A frame that is to be printed with different configurations is shown once per configuration.
Users and User Rights / Preview Frequency in Chapter 4). As soon as the first image is
shown in the far right position, it becomes active; the buttons Stop and Skip can be used:

buttons.
press Skip.
Stop.
012_start
Note
later on. Lack of sharpness can therefore not always be seen in the preview.
6-46 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Color / density corrections: Press the Arrow
Note
Specially in this chapter).

6
Note
Enlarged view:
this function.
019_reorder
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-47


– small: original
refreshed immediately (see Functions Image Editing and Special in this chapter).

with four images.
Edit the image (in the normal view or the

enlarged view):
initiate the respective action.
Change PpF
Image editing and Special
Special in this chapter.

function.
Note
6-48 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


four images):
Press Hold
modification.
Note
and refreshed.
6

enlarged view):
Print & Stop
Autoprint
longer displayed. The next frame moves
in from the left.
Skip
The current image is not printed and is
no longer displayed. The next preview
frame moves in from the left.
If you want to change to print mode Reorder
four images):
Preview off
images of the reorder list are printed with
the preset configuration.
End of order
The order is automatically finished after all DX numbers of the reorder list have been
found and printed. Then the reorder screen appears again.
If you want to cancel / end the order before:

Press Delete remaining.
Images (DX numbers) not recorded in the
prescanner are not scanned / printed any
more.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-49


Print mode for all orders that cannot be handled in the autoprint or reorder mode:
– Films / film strips without an extended DX code:
– Films / film strips on which the DX code is illegible
– Extremely short film strips (one or two negatives)
Note
Longer film strips can also be printed with manual positioning.
Note
Preview is always active in the Manual positioning mode.
Note
Index prints and packages are not possible with manual positioning.
6-50 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3.3.1 Activating the Print Mode

Call up:
Print mode
Manual positioning
013_start
The screen Manual positioning opens. It displays:

– Order number
configuration
– Several buttons
– Field for the display of a scanned negative
Prior to inserting the first film strip / single negative:
this chapter)
– another configuration for the complete order can be selected (see Selecting
Another Configuration for the Complete Order in this chapter)
Note
After a film or a single negative are inserted changes for the current image can be
entered, i.e. the images of one order can be printed with different configurations.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-51

6.3.3.2 Image Editing and Printing

Several film strips or single negatives can be combined in one order. Insert all film strips
or single negatives of an order and print as described below.
Insert and position the film strips or negatives

Insert the negative(s).
Insert film strips with at least two
negatives or complete films via the film
feeder:
They are pulled in, scanned, and
positioned on the film tip.
Single negatives: Pull out the film
carrier, put in the negative, and push in
the carrier.
The first frame of the film strip is displayed; in case of a single negative only the scanned
part of the film piece is shown. It must then be positioned correctly.
Position a negative within a longer piece of film:

Press Frame to move longer film pieces
back and forth by always one frame length
until the desired negative is shown.
Position single negatives:
Press Step to move the frame in small steps
to an exact position. In the preview the
removed part of the image is cut off, the new
part added is marked, but shown without
data.
Press Refresh:
The negative is scanned again, the preview
is refreshed.
Repeat the operation (Step and Refresh)
until the desired result is obtained.
013
6-52 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Edit and print an image

If the print should not be printed with
standard configuration:
Press the button with the displayed
configuration and select the desired
configuration from the list.
If necessary, change the configuration for
the current negative by pressing Change
configuration.
Note
If several configurations are mixed in an order,
the data of the first configuration, which was
used, holds for autosave and back print for the 6
complete order.

Color/density corrections: press the Arrow
Note
via the image editing function. This function

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-53


function.
Note
Hold
modification.
Print
The negative is printed with all the entered
modifications.
Removing the film strip or negative

Press Eject.
– Whole films / long film strips are ejected.

– Single negatives are moved to a position in which the film carrier can be removed
without damaging the film strip or the negative.
Remove the film carrier, remove the negative, and insert the film carrier again.
End of order
After the complete order is printed press End
of order.
6-54 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3.4 Working with File Print Mode

6.3.4.1 General Information
– Only files of the formats “.jpg” (also JPEG 2000), “.bmp”, uncompressed “.tif” files, and
".tif“ files with LZW compression can be processed.
– Each single file must not be bigger than 110 MB (“.tif”, “.bmp”; “.jpg” unpacked).
Larger files cannot be printed.
Note
jpg files are compressed files and need less memory space when compressed than
unpacked files. For printing they must be unpacked. The unpacked size of jpg-files
cannot be told by the (compressed) file size.
– The quality of the prints depends on the relationship between resolution and print size: 6
Minimum approx. 100 pixels per cm /
approx. 250 pixels per inch
– Digital cameras provide Gamma values between 1.8 and 2.2. The Minilab prints with a
Gamma of 1.8.
– Optimum results can be obtained when the print size is adapted to the aspect ratio of
the image. The aspect ratio of the image can be derived from the pixel size (.... x ....
pixel). This is indicated in the Load file screen (see Load Image Files from Storage
Media in this chapter).
Many digital cameras generate images at an aspect ratio of 3:4. Therefore we
recommend to create print formats with the aspect ratio 3:4 for digital prints of the
same aspect ratio. In case of other formats too much information may be lost.
– Select a suitable adaptation type (see Define and Edit an Order Configuration of the
Single Type / Film Carrier File Print in Chapter 4). If it is not suitable the error File
print parameter range violation will be displayed. The following adaptation methods
can be selected:
– Fit image to paper
(presetting) The complete digital image is printed; if the image has another aspect
ratio than the paper, a white border will show on two sides.
– Fill print size
A center cropping of the digital image is printed without a border; part of the
original image is lost if the digital image has another aspect ratio than the paper.
In case of larger deviations between the aspect ratio of the original and the format
to be exposed the image cannot be printed. Then the alternative Adapt to print
size must be selected.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-55

– Adjust: Shorter side or

Adjust: Longer side
The complete digital image is printed; the cut length is variable.. One side of the
digital image is adjusted to the paper width: either shorter side or longer side.
Note
about Adjust: Longer side
Not recommended for paper widths < 127 mm / 5 inches (results in very small prints).
If this option is used for 5 inch (127 mm) and 6 inch (152 mm) paper widths, a per forma
cut length > 152 mm must be entered in the order configuration to receive a correct cut
length corresponding to the aspect ratio of the image file.
– The back print includes the file name of seven characters maximum.
– The file name is printed on the index print with nine characters maximum.
– The sorter moves automatically to the next bucket after 55 prints (up to size 13x18) or
after 43 prints (in case of bigger sizes). When removing the prints consider that they
are distributed in several buckets in case of big orders!
– Productivity for file prints:
Upon printing of image files > 50 MB on large formats only a low productivity will be
obtained.
Example:
File size 100 MB
Print format 30x45
Duration up to 10 minutes
Note
To following points should be observed for images created with an image processing
program:
– Files must be saved in the formats “.tif”, “.bmp”, or “.jpg”.

– Use a Gamma value of 1.8.
– Images must be available in RGB mode. Images in other color modes, e.g. CMYK, must
be converted externally to RGB (conversion on the Minilab is not possible).
6-56 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3.4.2 Using dTFS: Automatic Color and Density Corrections
dTFS determines color and density corrections for digital images, to correct possible color
casts. The aim is to compensate for the characteristics of different digital cameras.
The dTFS function only influences images of digital cameras without editing. Images
which have been edited and/or generated or saved in an image processing program, will
be printed without dTFS, even when dTFS is switched on. The system detects
automatically if an image comes from a digital camera and is still untouched, or if the
image has been edited.
For a detailed description of the dTFS function refer to The dTFS Function (digital Total
Film Scanning: Measuring of Digital Image sources) in Chapter 4
6
If you want to use dTFS, it should be activated in the settings (see Other Settings /
dTFS Presetting in Chapter 4).
If dTFS is to be used for individual file print orders only, the function can be deactivated
for individual orders (see Printing File Prints without Preview and Printing File Prints
with Preview in this chapter).
We recommend to activate dTFS
– for images taken with one camera, e.g. if the storage medium of the camera is used,
– for images of which you may assume that they have not been edited by the customer
after exposure.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-57

6.3.4.3 Load Image Files from Storage Media

Image files can be loaded
– from storage media,
– from a shared folder of a workstation connected with the Minilab.
Image files of several storage media can be combined in one order.
The individual images of the order can be edited on the Minilab and printed at once. Or
else the order can be saved and printed later.
Call up:
Print mode
File print
042_start
The Load files (File print) screen opens. It displays:

– Order number
– Default configuration for the file print mode and various information of this
configuration
– Several buttons
6-58 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Prior to print start (before or after file loading):

this chapter)
Complete Order in this chapter)
– the configuration can be changed for the current order (see Changing the
– dTFS can be activated / deactivated. 6
Insert a storage medium, if necessary.

Press on the respective drive symbol (from
top to bottom, see Figure previous page):
Floppy disk
CD-ROM/DVD
Zip
Folder in a workstation (see
Chapter 4: Settings for Digital Orders
(Network Order))
PCM: PCMCIA
CF: Compact Flash
SM: SmartMedia
MS: Memory Stick
SD: SD/MMC memory card
The files available on the selected drive are displayed (see Figure above). If the storage
medium has directories the Select directory screen opens.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-59

In this case select the directory and sub-

directory if necessary and press OK.
The files in the current (sub-) directory are
taken over in the previous screen Load files
(file print).
094
Select the files to be printed:
Press the double-arrow to add all files ,
or mark individual files and press the
single arrow.
Vice versa, all / individual files can be
removed again from the selection list.
To transfer all image files of an order in the
selection list, insert other media / or select
other directories.
If files with the same name are included in
the list, they are numbered continuously, e.g.
tower, tower-2, tower-3.
The order can be printed right away either with or without preview, or it can be saved and
printed later (see Saving Digital Orders or Printing File Prints with Preview or Printing
File Print without Preview in this chapter).
6-60 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3.4.4 Saving Digital Orders

Images must be loaded (see Load Image Files from Storage Media or Load Saved
Digital Order in this chapter).
In the screen Load files (File print) pres the

Save order button.
042_oV
Type a name in the following screen.
Press Save.
Note
Orders which are printed immediately but are not saved explicitly, are automatically
stored in a backup directory on the hard disk. This means that frames of a finished order
can be edited again without much additional work (composing the image files again
from the storage media / directories) and printed again, if required.
The software checks the size of the backup directory. If a certain size is reached, the
oldest orders are automatically deleted. Orders saved in the backup directory can also
be deleted manually (see Deleting saved digital orders in this chapter).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-61

6.3.4.5 Loading a Saved Digital Order

Call up:
Print mode
File print
Saved orders
The Saved orders screen opens.
Select the order to be printed in the list and
press Load.
Note
Only one order at a time can be loaded. If
several orders are selected, the Load button is
not accessible (gray).
060
The Load files (File print) screen opens.
042_load
6-62 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Screen displays the files belonging to the loaded order, as well as:
– Order number
– Default configuration for the file print mode and various information of this
configuration
– Several buttons
Prior to print start (before or after file loading):
this chapter)
Complete Order in this chapter) 6
– the configuration can be changed for the current order (see Changing the
– dTFS can be activated / deactivated.
The order can be printed with and without preview (see Printing File Print with Preview
or Printing File Print without Preview in this chapter).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-63

6.3.4.6 Delete the Saved Digital Order

Call up:
Print mode
File print
Saved orders
The Saved orders screen opens.
Select the order (or several orders) to be
deleted and press Delete selection.
Press Back.
060
6-64 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3.4.7 Printing File Prints without Preview

Images must be loaded (see Load Image Files
from Storage Media or Load Saved Digital Orders
in this chapter).
Deactivate Preview on, if necessary.
As required activate or deactivate dTFS On.
Press Start printing.
042_oV
053
The screen Autoprint without preview (File print) opens. The lower display on the
screen (Processed Order) shows information about the configuration as well as the
processing status:
– Quantity of the prints printed so far and total number of prints
– Name of the file being processed
The order is automatically finished once all image files have been printed.
While the order is being processed the operator can prepare the next order:
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-65

Press Prepare order.

The screen Load files (File print) is
displayed again, where the image files can
be loaded from storage media, or saved
orders can be loaded for the next order.
Note
It is not possible to switch to file print with preview while an order is running.
6-66 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.3.4.8 Printing File Prints with Preview

Images must be loaded (see Load Image Files
from Storage Media or Load Saved Digital Orders
in this chapter).
Activate Preview on.
As required activate or deactivate dTFS On.
042
501
Users and User Rights / Preview Frequency in Chapter 4).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-67

As soon as the first image is shown in the far right position, it becomes active; the buttons
Stop and Skip can be used:

buttons.
press Skip.
Stop.
Note
later on. Lack of sharpness is therefore difficult to discover in the preview.

Color / density corrections: Press the arrow
Note

Note
6-68 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Enlarged view:
this function.
019_datei

– small: original
refreshed immediately (see Functions Image Editing and Special in this chapter).

with four images.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-69

Edit and print the image (in the normal view or

the enlarged view):
initiate the respective action:
Change PpF
function.
Note

four images):
Press Hold
modification.
Note
and refreshed.
6-70 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


enlarged view):
Print & Stop
Autoprint
longer displayed. The next preview
Skip
The current image is not printed and is 6
no longer displayed. The next preview
If you want to change to print mode File print
four images):
Press Preview off
images of the order are printed with the
preset configuration.
End of order
The order is automatically finished once all image files have been printed.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-71


Note
Preview is always active in the Slide print mode.
Note
The scratch correction must be switched off for the printing of black-and-white slides.
General procedure: insert slide, scan, edit, print, remove slide and insert next slide, etc.,
i.e. do not scan several slides without printing in between.

Insert the slide carrier.
An automatic pixel correction is made. Do
not withdraw the slide carrier during this
procedure!
Print mode
Slide print
dlab2603
The top part of the carrier moves out and the

Slide print screen opens (see next page).
dlab2602
6-72 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

077_start
The screen displays:

– Order number
– Standard configuration for slide print and various parameters of this configuration
– Several buttons
– Field for the display of a scanned slide
If necessary press the configuration button

and select another slide print configuration.
If required pres Change configuration, to
change the configuration (this modification
applies to the complete order; if you want to
print slides with different configurations, a
separate order must be started for each one
of these configurations).
Put in the slide correctly and push in the top
part of the carrier.
The slide is scanned and shown on the screen
(after approx. 7 seconds). Then the top part of
the carrier is moved out again.
If the slide was put in upside down, press the

Mirror image symbol.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-73


Edit image: press the respective button to
make changes or initiate the desired action.
Color / Density corrections
Note
Image editing or Special (see

Functions Image Editing and Special in
this chapter).
077 correction in Chapter 4).
function.
Note

following images:
Press Hold
modification.
6-74 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Printing: press one of the buttons described

below.
Printing
The slide is printed with all entered
modifications. It remains displayed to
allow further editing or printing in
another configuration.
Print + Skip
The slide is printed and disappears from
the display.
Skip
The displayed slide will not be printed.
Remove the slide and insert all slides 6
belonging to the order, one after the other,
edit them if necessary and print them.
Note
If individual prints show black or white borders, this may be caused by the different
frames of the mounted slides (change the scan window if necessary; see Scanner
Settings (Scratch Correction, Scanning Crop) in Chapter 4).
End of order
After the complete order is printed press
Order end.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-75


Print mode to print strips of reversal or single unmounted slides (option; only available
after activation, see Installing / Activating Software in Chapter 4).
Slides of film type 135 as well as film type 120/220 can be processed.
Note
Preview is always active in the Slide film mode.
Note
Order configurations of the package type cannot be used for reversal films.
Note
The scratch correction must be switched off for the printing of black-and-white slides.

Call up:
Print mode
Slide film
The scanner will be calibrated: Duration about
7 seconds. Do not remove the film carrier during
this time!
151_start
6-76 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The Slide film screen opens. It displays:

– Order number
configuration
– Field for the display of a scanned slide
– Several buttons
Prior to inserting the first reversal film strip / unmounted single slides:
– another configuration for the complete order can be selected (see Selecting
Another Configuration for the Complete Order in this chapter) 6
Note
The configuration can only be selected or changed before a reversal film strip / single
unmounted slide is inserted, i.e. the images of an order are all printed with the same
configuration.

Several reversal film strips / single slides can be combined in one order. Insert all
corresponding reversal film strips / single slides of an order and print as described below.
Insert and position reversal film strips / single slides

Insert the slide(s).
Insert film strips with at least two slide
frames / complete reversal films via the
film feeder:
They are pulled in, scanned, and
positioned on the film tip.
unmounted single slides: Pull out the
film carrier, put in the slide frame, and
push in the carrier.
The first frame of the film strip is displayed; in case of a single slide only the scanned part
of the slide is shown. It must then be positioned correctly.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-77

Position a slide frame within a longer piece of

film:
Press Slide to move longer film pieces back
and forth by always one frame length until
the desired slide is shown.
Position a single slide:
Press Step to move the slide in small steps
to an exact position. In the preview the
removed part of the image is cut off, the new
part added is marked, but shown without
data.
Press Refresh:
The slide is scanned again, the preview is
refreshed.
Repeat the operation (Step and Refresh)
until the desired result is obtained.
151
Edit and print an image

Color/density corrections: press the Arrow
Note
via the image editing function. This function

6-78 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


function.
Note
6
following images:
Press Hold
modification.
Print slides:
If you want to print the displayed slide
(with all changes made):
Press Print.
If you want to print the displayed slide

and all following reversal film strips
(including all changes made):
Press Autom. start.
move reversal film strip or single slide
Press Eject.
– Whole films / long film strips are ejected.

– Single slides are moved to a position in which the film carrier can be removed without
damaging the slide.
Remove the film carrier, remove the slide, and insert the film carrier again.
End of order
After the complete order is printed press
Order end.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-79

6.4 The Functions Image Editing and Special
010
The functions Image editing and Special offer special editing possibilities for negatives
(only d-lab.2/2plus), slides (only d-lab.2/2plus), and digital image files. They are
accessible in the following print modes or screens:
Autoprint with preview
Reorder with preview
Manual positioning
– File print with preview
Slide print
They offer the following editing possibilities:
Image editing: input of color and density corrections, definition of crop, image
improvement (sharpness - edges, saturation, detail contrast, area contrast), saving images
as files
Special: text exposure, border (also colored borders), saving images as files
Both buttons are available in the normal preview (with four images) as well as in the
enlarged preview.
6-80 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.4.1 Image Editing

6.4.1.1 Activation
Press Image editing.
018
The Image editing screen opens. The current image is shown twice for comparison:
– small: original
The preview is refreshed immediately in case of modifications.

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-81

6.4.1.2 Making Color and Density Corrections

Press Color/density corrections (in the
screen Image editing).
The screen Image editing: Corrections opens.
081
The enlarged view is refreshed:

– after changing to another slider (e.g. from yellow to density),
– 0.2 seconds after the slider was adjusted, if no further changes are made.
Press OK.
The screen Image editing is displayed
again.
6-82 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.4.1.3 Cropping
Press Crop (in the screen Image editing).
The screen Image editing: Crop opens. The

enlarged view shows frame lines. The aspect ratio
corresponds to the paper size.
Crop size
Use the arrow to adjust the size. The
selected size is shown in percent.
Rotate 90°
The cropped section can be turned for
printing. Example: For 6x6 frames either a
horizontal or a vertical section can be 6
selected.
Crop position
Use the arrows to position the frame in any
position of the image.
Note
082 If the frame is too close to the edge of the
image, it cannot be rotated or enlarged. In this
case move the frame first with the buttons of
the Crop position and turn or enlarge then.
Press Define crop:

The defined section is displayed.
If you want to go back to the complete
image information: Press Reset crop.
Press OK.
again.
Note
The selected crop section is only accepted if
the button Define crop has been pressed.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-83

6.4.1.4 Image Improvement

Press Improve image (in the screen Image
editing).
The screen Image editing: Improvement opens.
parameter to increase or decrease the value:
Sharpness - edges
Saturation
Detail contrast
Area contrast
The effect of these parameters is explained in
detail in Setting the Production Balance in
Chapter 4.
Press OK.
again.
083
6-84 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.4.2 Special
Press Special.
017
The Special (…) screen opens. The current image is shown twice for comparison:
– small: original
The preview is refreshed immediately in case of modifications.

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-85

6.4.2.1 Enter and Format Text for the Exposure

Press Text (in the Special screen).
The Position text screen opens.

Press Enter text.
Type a text and confirm with OK.
Note
If you want the text in italic
(see next page), enter a blank in front of the
text and after the text. Otherwise the first and
last letter of the text are probably not fully
shown on the print.
Press Format text.
073
The Format text screen opens.

Press Font and select the type font.
Press Colour and select the color.
Touch B for bold, I for italic and/or U for
underline, if required.
Style: Touch the symbol for left justified
(default), centered or right justified.
Press OK.
The Position text screen opens again.
076
6-86 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Press the button for Text size and set the

desired size.
Define the Text position: Press the arrow
keys to move the text to the desired
position.
Press Place text if required (turn the text in
steps of 90°).
Press OK.
The Special screen is shown again.
If you want to display the preview with four
images again, or the preview with the
enlarged image, press OK.
6
Otherwise set a border as described below.
073
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-87

6.4.2.2 Setting a Border

Press Border (in the Special screen).
The screen Enter border (color border) opens.
Press width and enter the value.
Press Colour.
The screen Select color opens.
Select the color and press OK.
or
Select Color.
Press New.
Specify the red, green, and blue
portion in the following screen to create
the desired color.
Press OK twice.
The Special screen opens again.
074
Note
the border is not shown in this screen. It will only be shown in the screen in which
Special was activated.
Press OK.
The screen in which Special was activated is
displayed again.
046_rand
6-88 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.4.3 Saving an Image as File

Press Save (in the Image editing screen or
in the screen Special (...)).
044
The Save to File screen opens. Edited individual images can be saved:
– in the file formats
– “.jpg“ (in various compression levels)
– “.bmp“
– with various optional solutions
– on
– Floppy disk
– Zip
– Hard disk or external directory (where the files are saved is defined in different
position; see Settings for remote orders: Autosave in Chapter 4).
Press File format and Resolution and

select the desired settings.
Press the respective Drive symbol.
At File name the drive name of the desired
drive is displayed.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-89

File names are assigned automatically in the following cases (but they can also be
changed, see below):
– Films with extended DX code: negative dependent, e.g. 13A.bmp
– Films without an extended DX code: consecutive, e.g. no1.bmp, no2.bmp
– Digital files:
original name, e.g. image3.jpg
And for slides a file name must be entered.
File names are assigned automatically (but they can also be changed, see below).
If you want to change the file name or if you

want to save the image of a slide (only d-
lab.2/2plus): Press the File name button
and enter the name.
If the OK button is active: press OK to save.
6-90 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.5 Manual red eyes correction

Note
The function Red eyes correction (automatic and manual) is only available if the option
has been enabled (see Enabling software in Chapter 4).
The function Manual rote eyes correction offers the possibility to make manual
corrections for negatives (only d-lab.2/2plus), slides (only d-lab.2/2plus), and digital image
files. Manual corrections can be made in addition to or instead of the automatic
corrections (see Automatic red eyes correction in Chapter 4).
This function is available in all print modes with preview:
– Only for d-lab.2/2plus 6
Autoprint with preview (can be reached via the Enlarged view screen)
– Only for d-lab.2/2plus
Reorder with preview (can be reached via the Enlarged view screen)
Manual positioning
– File print with preview (can be reached via the Enlarged view screen)
Slide print
Slide film
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-91

Activation
In one of the above mentioned print modes or in

the respective Enlarged view screen:
Press Manual Red Eyes Corr.
182
The screen Manual Red Eyes Correction opens. It shows the currently active image and
several buttons. The center of the image shows a flashing crosshair with a dotted circle.
If the Red eyes correction button is activated the preview image displays the results of
the automatic correction.
To show vertical images correctly press

Turn view (every time you press, the image
turns cw by 90°).
Activating / deactivating automatic corrections

Press Red eyes correction.
Note
If the function has been activated, the manual
corrections are added to the automatic
correction. Otherwise only the manual
corrections are effective.
6-92 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Making manual corrections
Define the area to be corrected:

Touch the (first) red eye to be corrected.
The crosshair appears on the eye.
Use the arrow keys Red Eye: Position
to position the crosshair precisely on
the red eye.
Use the arrow keys Red Eye: Size to
adapt the size of the dotted circle to the
size of the red eye.
Press Set Red Eye. 6
The area to be corrected is marked by a
blue circle.
Repeat this procedure for all red eyes in the
image.
Press Start Correction.
The correction is executed, the preview is
refreshed.
Resetting corrections
If a correction is not satisfying, it can be

reset:
Press Undo Last Correction if you want
to reset only the last (manual)
correction.
Press Undo All Corrections if you want
to reset all corrections (this resets also
possible automatic corrections).
Note
If you want to reset only manual corrections
and keep the automatic correction, the
automatic correction must be activated again
(see above) after the reset.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-93

Going back
After the corrections have been completed

press OK.
The screen in which the Manual Red Eyes Correction was activated opens again (main
screen Print mode or Enlarged view).
Note
The red eyes correction is not shown in the preview images nor in the Enlarge view.
Note
The red eyes correction does not show on index prints.
6-94 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.6 Index prints

Index prints of the printed negatives (only d-lab.2/2plus), slides (only d-lab.2/2plus), or
image files are printed at the end of an order if this function is activated in the order
configuration (see Defining and Editing Index Print Configurations and Defining and
Editing Order Configurations in Chapter 4).
The following rules apply:
– The paper format of the index print is independent of the format of printed images, i.e.
index prints may have another paper format than the actual prints of the order.
– There is no preview for index prints.
– Index print format as of 20x30:
If a large size is selected for the next order, the beginning of the order may be delayed.
– The index print is true-to-color. 6
– Index print on 2 sheets: duration max. 3 minutes
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-95

6.6.1 Index Prints in the Different Print Modes

Which images and which type of images can be combined in an index print depends on
the respective print mode:

Autoprint without preview:
All frames are shown on the index print with the corrections of the configuration in
use.
Autoprint with preview:
All scanned negatives are shown on the index print with the corrections used for the
first print. Additional manual corrections are not considered for images already in
preview. Changes kept for all other images with the Hold function are also considered
on the index print for these further images.
Each negative appears only once on the index print, even if it was printed in several
versions.
Reorder:
All scanned images appear once on the index print. The layout defined in the
configuration for the first image is used as the standard. This setting can be modified.
Package:
All scanned images appear once on the index print.
– File print:
All files of the order are included.
– Network order from workstations:
If an index print is requested in the descriptive order file, it is printed with all files of
the order.
Note
Index prints are not possible in Manual positioning mode.
6-96 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.6.2 Sequence and Designations of the Thumbnails

Films / film strips:
– Strip length longer than specified under Film length in the screen Other settings
(preset on 400 mm; see Other settings > Settings for negative printing in
Chapter 4):
The thumbnails images of the index print are arranged by ascending DX numbers.
– Strip length shorter than specified under Film length in the screen Other settings
(preset on 400 mm; see Other settings > Settings for negative printing in
Chapter 4):
The thumbnails of the index print are arranged in the order of scanning.
– If DX numbers are available, they are printed under the thumbnails on the index
print. 6
IX240 (APS) films:
The sizes set on the APS camera, Classic, High Vision, or Panorama, are indicated by C,
H, P under the thumbnails on the index print.
The index print always shows the crop stored on the film (by lines in the thumbnail),
even if a different size is printed.
– File print:
Maximum 9 characters of the file name are printed as image subtitle.
6.6.3 Quantity, Size, and Aspect Ratio of the Thumbnails
Quantity
The number of thumbnails on an index print may vary:
For whole films (≥ 400 mm) the number of thumbnails is automatically selected in
such a way that the complete film fits on the index print: 15, 25, or 40 images /
thumbnails.
For film strips and slides, there are either index prints with 25 (IX240) or 40/42
images (all other film sizes). If an order has more than 25 or 40/42 images two or
more index prints are printed automatically.
– A digital order can hold a maximum of images defined in the settings (see Other
Settings / Settings for Digital Orders in Chapter 4). Therefore larger file print orders are
split and the customer receives more orders.
Size
The size of the thumbnails is defined in such a way, that the number of thumbnails
defined by the Minilab can be printed on the requested paper format.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-97

Aspect ratio
The aspect ratio of the thumbnails of the index print corresponds to the one of the image
source:
Image source Aspect ratio
negative, slides
IX240 9:16
135-type negative, slides, B/W, 6x9 2:3
6x6 1:1
4.5x6 3:4
Image files 100:77

In case of image files with another aspect ratio, the thumbnail size will be reduced until it
fits the preset window.
6.6.4 Print Index Print Only

There are two alternatives to print index print only order, i.e. no individual prints:
– Set the number of prints for the current order on zero (PpF = 0; see Changing the
Configuration for the Complete Order in this chapter).
– Define an order configuration with PpF = 0 (see Defining and Editing Order
6-98 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.7 Saving Images with Autosave

The Autosave function is used to save image files of an order on a storage medium.
The following options are offered:
– printing and saving images,
– only saving images, without printing.
To use this function define at least one autosave configuration and add it to at least one
order configuration (see Defining and Editing Autosave Configurations and Defining
and Editing Order Configurations in Chapter 4).
029_pdm
This routine always includes all the images of an order:

all negatives of a film or a reorder list,
all slides of a slide print order,
– all file prints of an order.
To save individual images: see Save Image as File in this chapter.
Images, which have been improved with TFS or dTFS, are marked during the Autosave
process (entry in the file header). If these images are loaded again and printed, dTFS is
automatically deactivated for these images. This prevents that the image improvement is
used again on these images.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-99

Three types of Autosave are available:

– Autosave fixed
The files are saved on a storage medium in the “.bmp“ format. The resolution of the
images is automatically adapted to the preset number of images, even if less images
are actually saved. This guarantees that the storage capacity of the storage medium is
sufficient for the order.
– Autosave quality
The images are saved either in “.bmp“ or “.jpg“ format (various compression factors
can be selected) on a storage medium or in a shared folder on an external PC. Four
different resolutions can be selected.
– d-workflow
As in Autosave quality the images can be saved in the formats “.bmp“ or “.jpg“
(again in various compression factors). Four different resolutions can be selected. For
further processing the images are sent to the Server-PC (only possible if the Minilab is
operated in a network; see Defining and Editing Autosave Configurations in
Chapter 4 as well as Settings for Remote Orders: Autosave in Chapter 6).

In case of films the DX code is transmitted to the d-workflow as part of the file name:
File name = DX code_consecutive number.
6.7.1 Printing and Saving Images

Call up the print mode (see Printing in
this chapter).
Select the order configuration,
– which includes an Autosave configuration
(see Defining and Editing Autosave
Configurations and Defining and Editing
Order Configurations in Chapter 4), and
– in which PpF (prints per frame) > 0 (if this
is not the case, set PpF on a value > 0 for
this order; see Changing the
Configuration for All Images of an Order in
this chapter).
Then proceed as described for the respective
print mode (see Printing in this chapter).
6-100 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.7.2 Save Images Only, Without Printing

Call up the print mode (see Printing in
this chapter).
Select the order configuration,
– which includes an Autosave configuration
(see Defining and Editing Autosave
Configurations and Defining and Editing
Order Configurations in Chapter 4), and
– in which PpF (prints per frame) = 0 (if this
is not the case, set PpF = 0 for this order;
see Changing the Configuration for All
Images of an Order in this chapter).
6
Then proceed as described for the respective
print mode (see Printing in this chapter).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-101

6.8 Network Orders
6.8.1 The Minilab in a Network

The Minilab can be integrated in a network via a separate PC (Workstation).
Communication of the Minilab with this PC uses the software d-workflow or software
d-bridge (on this separate PC).
The d-workflow software has a user interface which can be operated via the PC. So the
PC can be used as a server for several input and output devices, e.g. Imagebox, Pixtasy as
input devices and one or more AgfaPhoto Minilabs, such as the Minilab, as output
devices.
The d-bridge software has no user interface and is designed for a 1 : 1 connection. It also
runs on a separate PC that works as server.
Any time the workstation can send completely prepared orders for printing to the Minilab.
Depending on the setup on the Minilab (see Settings for Network Orders in Chapter 4)
the orders
– will be started manually, i.e. upon request by the operator on the Minilab, or
– automatically
(see following sections Start Network Orders Manually (operator controlled) and Start
Network Orders Automatically).
Each one of these orders consists of the corresponding image files and an order
description file with information about backprint text, print size, number of prints/image,
configuration, use of dTFS, etc. (The included settings for dTFS can be overwritten on the
minilab; see Settings for the Automatic Printing of Network Orders in Chapter 4).
Supported formats:
– for the complete orders:
PFDF 4.1 and 4.2 (Photofinishing Data Format)
Note
The Minilab is able to receive PFDF 4.1 and 4.2 from the d-workflow (network orders),
but it can only send back PFDF 4.2 to the d-workflow (Autosave).
– for individual images within the complete orders: “jpg”, “.bmp”, “.tif” (uncompressed
and LZW compressed)
For each paper widths and surface requested in the network orders at least one order
configuration for file prints must be available, i.e. set up before (see Defining and
Editing Order Configurations in Chapter 4). If this is not the case:
– the message that the order cannot be processed will be displayed (if the order was
started manually),
– or the order is set on error status (if the order was started automatically). In which case
the order cannot be printed anymore on the Minilab.
6-102 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

The network orders are automatically printed on the Minilab with preview. Each order is
printed with the settings in the descriptive order file without operator action. The
corrections entered under Production balance digital are effective (see Production
Balance in Chapter 4). The dTFS (image enhancement) is also effective if the respective
information is sent with the order and the conditions (see above) are met.
While the Minilab processes a network order, a popup with a Stop button is displayed on
the screen. The printing can be interrupted any time by pressing this button. The current
order in process (and in case of smaller orders also further orders, which have been
transferred to the Printer), will still be completed.
The order just being processed is marked in the order list. As soon as all pertaining
images have been printed, it is automatically cleared from the hard disk and the order list.
Note 6
If an order is interrupted because of an error, e.g. like paper jam, it must be started
again manually (see Manual Start of Network Orders on the following page).
Processing will then continue where the order was interrupted before. Which means,
that images which were printed before are not printed again (If necessary individual
images around the "abortion" point are repeated if they have not been recorded as
printed)..
Note for Pricing

In case of network orders an internal order number is printed on the pricing label and
not the one that was sent with the network order.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-103

6.8.2 Manual Start of Network Orders

Network orders can be started manually any time as long as there is no other order in
process.
Call up:
Print mode
Network orders
043
The Network Order screen opens. It shows an overview of the waiting orders in
chronological sequence. The columns of the table include order-ID, name of the order,
number of prints of an order, paper size (width of the paper) and surface. The surface is
programmed by a code number.
If the surface is to be displayed in plaintext:

Select the desired order (by pressing).
Note
Only the surface for one order can be displayed
at a time. If several orders have been selected,
deselect if necessary by pressing the order
again.
The Format Details field shows the paper size

including surface information.
043_2
6-104 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Press Refresh.
If only selected network orders are to be
printed:
Select the order or orders to be printed
(by pressing).
Deselect by pressing again if necessary.
If all network orders are to be printed:
Press Start autom. print.
6.8.3 Automatic Start of Network Orders

The Minilab can be set up to use idle times for the printing of network orders (see 6
Settings for Network Orders in Chapter 4). With this setting and after an adjustable preset
time without operator action, a popup is displayed asking whether the network orders
should be printed. The query popup is displayed for a certain adjustable time.
Respond to the query:

Press No:
The network order remain on hold.
or
Press Yes:
The network orders are printed
immediately.
If there is no response during the time of the popup display, the network orders will be
printed in the sequence of arrival.
Note
The Minilab returns orders for which the matching paper (width/surface) is not
available to the d-workflow.
An error status will be applied to an order after 600 attempts. In which case the order
cannot be printed anymore on the Minilab.
The Minilab collects all prepared orders approximately one per minute. So in the worst
case an order could get an error status after 10 hours.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-105

6.8.4 Deleting Network Orders

Call up:
Print mode
Network orders
The Network Order screen opens.
Press Refresh.
Mark the order or orders to be deleted.
Press Delete.
043
6-106 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.9 Printing Price Labels (Option)
m4
Optional accessory:
Pricing Software and Label Printer
The buttons Pricing order in the Pricing menu and Pricing settings in the Settings
menu are only active if the customer bought a license and the software has been
activated (the software is included in the Main Software; see Activating Software in
Chapter 4).
Price labels can be printed under Pricing order.
Together with the license, AgfaPhoto also provides an Operation Manual, which explains
all functions.
Order numbers for the pricing accessory: see Pricing Settings in Chapter 4.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-107

6.10 Saving and Displaying Statistics

Optional accessory:
Statistics Software
The buttons Save statistics in the Pricing menu is only active if the customer bought a
license and the software has been activated (the software is included in the Main
Software; see Activating Software in Chapter 4).
Note
Activate the sleep mode if statistics should be checked always on the same weekday at
the end of production. In sleep mode the machine is not switched off entirely when
Shutdown is pressed in the menu End of work; the main computer remains on. It will
then be switched off automatically at the set time (see Setting the Timer in
Chapter 4).
6.10.1 Displaying Statistics
Note
An order will only be recorded in the statistics when the last print has left the Printer
and entered the Paper Processor.
All paper formats are shown as a rounded figure in full centimeters, with the short side
first.
Example:
152x102 Enter 10x15
102x152 Enter 10x15
So the statistics show two entries with the same name.

Pricing
Show statistics
The Statistics screen opens.
Press Film mask and select the respective
carrier.
Press Print mode and select the respective
input:
The first list shows the number of prints
(today / total, including index prints)
listed by print sizes.
The second list shows the number of
prints, index prints, orders, and paper
consumption (today / total).
008
6-108 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.10.2 Saving Statistics

Pricing
Save statistics
071
The screen Copy statistical data opens.

Two statistical files are saved:
1. Statistical data of order configurations, e.g.
16_11_2003_Order.qlx
2. Statistical data of paper configurations, e.g.
16_11_2003_Paper.qlx
The files are updated every day or overwritten every time the machine is shut down. This
means that per day only two files are generated automatically.
Select destination: Press the button for the

desired storage medium and select a
directory if applicable.
Select the required date from the list.
Press Type of statistics and select the
required type.
Press Copy.
The files are stored in the directory d:\Data\Statistic. The can be called up under Test /
Remote Service.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 6-109

6.11 Clickrate (Option)

Additional software subject to license. Different activation codes are required for
activation and deactivation.
The license comes with a specific description, a Check Module (Clickrate Checker) as well
as some application examples.
This function creates a separate database in the minilab, and in this database a print,
scan, autosave, order, and paper counter records all work done. This database is derived
from the previous (unchanged) statistic database. Here all paper sheets, also aborted
orders, test prints, paper cuts and similar information are recorded. The database must be
copied to the Windows Explorer for evaluation and there an evaluation can be made with
a suitable program (e.g. Access 2000) according to the personal requirements. The
respective forms for evaluation are not provided with the software license.
To reset and check the saved entries execute the software module ("Clickrate Checker")
on an external computer. If the key has been manipulated all print modes will be disabled
and a new activation process is required.
GUI support is not available.
6-110 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Troubleshooting
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Avoiding Problems........................................................................................................................................................7-1

7.2 Display of Error Messages..........................................................................................................................................7-2
7.3 Activating Help for Error Messages ........................................................................................................................7-3
7.5 The Machine Fails to React to Operator Inputs.................................................................................................7-4
7.5.1 Resetting the Machine with the Stop Button................................................................................7-5
7.5.2 Resetting the Machine with the ON key..........................................................................................7-6
7.6 Procedure if an Error Occurs .....................................................................................................................................7-8
7.6.2 Procedure for Unsolved Errors ..............................................................................................................7-8
7.6.3 Screen Remains Gray for More Than 3 Minutes after Reset.....................................................7-9
7.6.4 Image Processing Errors.......................................................................................................................7-10 7
7.6.5 Paper Processor and Printer Errors...................................................................................................7-11
7.6.6 Printer Errors.............................................................................................................................................7-12
7.6.7 Other Errors...............................................................................................................................................7-12
Applies to d-lab.2 ..........................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.7.3 Paper Jam in the Transport Unit (TU) ..............................................................................................7-16
7.7.4 Paper Jam in the Transfer Positions Transport Unit (TU) and Print Engine (PE)..............7-20
7.7.5 Paper Jam in the Print Engine (PE) ..................................................................................................7-21
Lane Distributor (LD)..............................................................................................................................7-23
7.7.7 Paper Jam in the Lane Distributor (LD) ..........................................................................................7-24
Sheet Transfer (ST)..................................................................................................................................7-25
7.7.10 Paper jam between dryer and paper outlet..................................................................................7-27
Applies to d-lab.2plus/netlab.2plus ..........................................................................................................................7-28
7.8.3 Paper Jam in the Feeder Unit FU......................................................................................................7-31
7.8.4 Paper Jam in the Transfer Positions between Feeder Unit FU and Print
Machine PM..............................................................................................................................................7-35
7.8.5 Paper Jam in the Print Machine PM ...............................................................................................7-36
7.8.6 Paper Jam between the Feeder Unit FU and Sheet Distributor SD .....................................7-38
7.8.7 Paper Jam in the Sheet Distributor SD ..........................................................................................7-39
7.8.8 Paper Jam between Sheet Distributor SD and Sheet Transfer ST ........................................7-40
7.8.10 Paper Jam between dryer and outlet unit.....................................................................................7-42
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-i

Troubleshooting d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
7-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

CAUTION!
If a problem that occurred cannot be solved with the methods suggested in this
chapter, call the Service Technician.
See Safety Notes and Rules, for Service / Repair Routines in Chapter 1.
7.1 Avoiding Problems

Switch off the machine
CAUTION!
Never switch off the machine with the main breaker! This may:
1. Applies only to d-lab.2 with gas laser, Type 8060/260, and d-lab.2plus with gas laser,
type 8060/261 7
reduce the service life of the blue/green laser considerably (failure of after-
cooling)
2. cause problems with the main computer; the operating system may have to be
reinstalled.
The main computer should always be shut down with a regular shutdown.
3. cause paper jams if not all prints have left the Paper Processor.
See Switching the Machine On and Off in Chapter 2.
Reset
Do not pull out the film carrier during a reset.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-1

7.2 Display of Error Messages
infobar
Error messages are displayed in the information field or in an Error popup window:
– Display in the information field:
Information or warnings, e.g. Empty effluent tank.
In case of some messages working can be continued. However, we still recommend to
respond to the messages without delay.
054
– Display in the error popup:

The work process is stopped. Depending on the type of error
– the error must either be repaired and then confirmed by pressing Clear (in case of
some machine errors the popup disappears automatically after the error has been
repaired),
– or the Clear button must be pressed first and then the error must be repaired (e.g.
in case of wrong inputs in screens).
7-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.3 Activating Help for Error Messages

Help texts for error messages can be called up as
follows:
Press the ? button, then press Error help
index:
A list with error messages in alphabetic
order is displayed.
Press the error message:
The help text is displayed.

7
Press the film stop key (3).
The film transport stops during scanning. The
power supply to all motors of the film drive
is immediately switched off. The Reset
popup is shown on the screen with the
button Yes.
CAUTION!
1 Be sure to wait with the confirmation
2 until the paper transport in the Printer is
3 empty.
– Printer does not work (no noise).

– As an alternative, press i and check the
position of the prints by means of the Info
G_GG212_2 (Fig. shows d-lab.2) function.
1 ON button Otherwise there is a risk of paper jam.
2 Timer lamp
3 Film stop key
Only when all prints are in the Paper
Processor press Yes to trigger a reset.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-3

7.5 The Machine Fails to React to Operator Inputs

If the machine no longer reacts to operator inputs, a reset must be made:
– via the Stop button on the touch screen.
Faster than a reset via the ON button: the laser must not be restarted, there is no new
pixel correction (PIKO) required (see Reset with the Stop Button in this chapter).
or
– via the On key on the machine (see Resetting the Machine with the ON key in this
chapter).
A reset via the ON key is a system reset with restart of all Printer programs.
7-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.5.1 Resetting the Machine with the Stop Button

If the machine does not react any more to operator entries, the Stop button on the screen
may be used to trigger a software reset.
Press the Stop button on the screen top

right hand side.
Film and paper are moved out;
the active order is aborted.
– The reset popup with Yes and No Buttons
is displayed.
CAUTION!
Be sure to wait with the confirmation
until the paper transport in the Printer is 7
empty. Otherwise there is a risk of paper
jam.
Press Yes to initiate a reset.

The main assemblies are initialized.
Information concerning previous orders is
deleted, e.g. reorder lists.
Note
(Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus)
Do not pull out the film carrier during the reset, to avoid errors during pixel correction
(see Calibrate Scanner (Pixel Correction, PIKO) in Chapter 5).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-5

7.5.2 Resetting the Machine with the ON key

1 ON key

1 ON key
A reset must be initiated via the On key, if

– the complete machine should be initialized, e.g. if a reset with the Stop button (on the
screen) has no effect (see Reset with the Stop button in this chapter). The system
executes a reset and all Printer programs are restarted
– selected actions are not carried out (lock-up);
– an undefined operating status has occurred.
7-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Press ON (reset key) to start the reset.
Note
Do not pull out the film carrier during the
reset, to avoid errors during pixel correction
(see Calibrate Scanner (Pixel Correction,
PIKO) in Chapter 5).
The data base is saved automatically prior to the reset. After the reset the machine starts
up again and loads the last consistent backup.
The customer does not lose data, the machine is in the same status as it was before the
ON key was pressed.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-7

7.6 Procedure if an Error Occurs

7.6.1 General Procedure
If you know the cause of an error, remove
the error. If an error cause is unknown,
proceed as described below in the paragraph
Procedure for Unsolved Errors.
Press Clear if this button is shown.
If required, press the Stop button on the
screen, wait until the paper transport of the
Printer is empty and then press reset.
The screen remains gray during the reset
procedure. Duration approx. 3 minutes.
If then the message Reset successful is displayed, the work can be continued. Otherwise
further actions are required (see below, Procedure for Unsolved Errors).
7.6.2 Procedure for Unsolved Errors

Call up the error list:
All error messages shown in the status line are
saved. They can be called up with the permanent
i button.
Press the i button.
Press Error list.
The list shows the error messages along with the
date and time of occurrence.
If an error of the Paper Processor has not
been removed, mark the error message and
press Cancel selection.
Messages of the Printer mainly concern
paper that has to be removed.
Remove the paper (see Removing a
Paper Jam in this chapter).
062
Deactivate Show all errors so that only
active errors are displayed. All active errors
must be removed and deleted from the list
with Cancel selection.
7-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

If after this, the machine does not perform a

reset automatically, exit the error list and
trigger the reset manually.
If the reset is unsuccessful, the
corresponding message covers up all
relevant error messages. To make them
visible again, open one of the two front
doors: the large error popups are displayed
again.
If the loop – unsolved errors appearing again
and again – cannot be interrupted, press the
ON key.
7.6.3 Screen Remains Gray for More Than 3 Minutes after Reset
Initiate another reset:
7
press the ON key (1).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-9

7.6.4 Image Processing Errors

It is possible that several pictures could not be printed. However, only the last image is
indicated in this case.
Press Clear.
Error by incorrect selection of the adaptation type for file print.
022_dpsi
Remedy: select correct adaptation (see Order Configurations of the Single Type / Film
Carrier File print in Chapter 4):
– Fit image to paper
(presetting) The complete digital image is printed; in case of an image with different
aspect ratio than the paper, the print has a white border on two sides.
− Fill print size
A center cropping of the digital image is printed without a border; part of the original
image is lost if the digital image has another aspect ratio than the paper.
– Adjust: Shorter side or
Adjust: Longer side
The original image remains the same, the cut length is variable. One side of the digital
image is adjusted to the paper width: either shorter side or longer side.
If Fill print size is selected, the aspect ratio of the frame must almost correspond to that
of the print size. In case of very big differences, the error message Parameter range
violation is displayed. The image can then only be printed with Fit image to paper.
7-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.6.5 Paper Processor and Printer Errors

Some errors cause the Printer to stop. If paper is still in the transport area of the Printer, it
must be removed before the work can be continued.
If an error occurs during a reset, a message appears indicating unsolved errors. These
active errors must be cleared from the error list. Deactivate the option Show all errors in
the Error list screen to display only active errors (see Display Error List in Chapter 2).
If an error occurs during a reset (after the Stop button was pressed or the ON key), or if
the error was not cleared by the reset, a message indicates the presence of unsolved
errors. These active errors must be repaired and cleared in the error list. Deactivate the
option Show all errors in the Error list screen to display only active errors.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-11

7.6.6 Printer Errors

Messages like for example:
Paper in the Printer
nn_LSxx not reached
nn_LSxx not free
TU2 not ready
nn = PE (Print Engine; d-lab.2) or
PM (Print Machine; d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus)
LD (Lane Distributor; d-lab.2) or
SD (Sheet distributor; d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus)
TU (Transport Unit; d-lab.2) or
FU (Feeder Unit; d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus)
LSxx = light barrier number xx
First remove the paper from the Printer, or

otherwise further errors may occur (see
Removing a Paper Jam in this chapter).
Only then press Clear.
Messages like for example:

Shutter not reached (MR, ML)
SG_LS01 not reached
MR / ML = Magazine Right / Magazine Left
SG = Switching Gear
Pull the locking lever of the paper magazine

back, remove the paper magazine, check the
paper for correct positioning in the paper
magazine, push the paper magazine back in.
Only then press Clear.
7.6.7 Other Errors

The machine stops without a message or there is no exit from a menu.
Press the Stop button on the screen.

Wait until there is no more paper in the
Printer and then confirm the reset.
7-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Applies to d-lab.2
7.7.1 General procedure

Applies to d-lab.2
dlab2604
CAUTION!
Danger caused by toothed belts that may run in the marked area: Risk of bruising.
WARNING!
Mind sharp corners and edges when working in the Printer area: Risk of cutting
injuries!
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-13

General procedure for paper jam error messages:

2
1 On top of the Transport Unit, TU, an LED signals in
red that there is paper inside the assembly.
Nominal condition is green (with the machine
closed).
Remove the paper in positions indicated in
the error message (if possible pull out paper
in transport direction);
display the position of the paper jam, if
necessary: confirm the error message
(probably several times, until the main menu
is displayed again), press the i button and
the respective assembly in the illustration
(assemblies with error status are shown in
red).
3 If you cannot find the jammed paper, check
the possible positions in the sequence listed
4 below (pull out the paper in transport
6 5 direction, if possible; for a detailed procedure
G_GG201_1 (Fig. shows d-lab.2) refer to the explanations in the following
paragraphs):
1 Sheet transfer (ST) Open the lower transport unit (TU):
2 Paper Processor Remove the print or prints – if more
3 Lane distributor (LD) than one – from the TU.
4 Sheet bridge (SB), single sheet buffer (SR), sheet gear (SG) Attention: Prints may also be in the area
5 Transport unit (TU)
of the crossover roller!
6 Print engine (PE) In the sheet gear (SG) before transfer to
the transport unit:
If required, lift the guide plate and turn
the drive roller by hand to check
whether there is still a cut paper in the
sheet gear.
Upper transport unit:
Lift the guide plate and check whether
paper is underneath.
Input and output of the print engine
(PE).
Lane distributor (LD) and crossover from
the lane distributor to the sheet transfer
(ST).
7-14 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Check if paper jam is still reported.

Pull out the sheet transfer (ST).
Check the print drum in the print engine
(PE):
Take out the top guide plate, turn the
print roller forward by hand to transport
out any paper that may still be inside.
Special case:
A paper jam occurs during shutdown of the machine or during reset.
The paper jam is only reported when the machine is started again: during this time, the
Info function cannot be called up.
7
7.7.2 Paper Jam in the Printer
Applies to d-lab.2
Proceed as follows in case of a paper jam in the Printer part:
– The sequence control tries to transport all paper out of the Printer and through the
paper processor. In case of an actual mechanical problem this is not possible.
– All papers, which are past the location of the paper jam in paper transport direction,
are still transported and developed.
– All prints in the area of the paper jam must be removed. Watch out for small paper
remainders.
– Assemblies which have to be pulled out of the Printer to remove jammed paper are
not energized.
– The Printer will automatically be ready for printing once the operator has removed the
jammed papers and cleared the error message or triggered a reset.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-15

7.7.3 Paper Jam in the Transport Unit (TU)

Applies to d-lab.2
A paper jam in the transport unit may occur in the following positions:
– transfer sheet bridge (SB) / transport unit (TU)
– lower paper channel
– upper paper channel
CAUTION!
In case of a paper jam in the transport unit (TU) always pull out the print engine
(PE) first and then the transport unit!
Otherwise paper which may be in the transfer area of transport unit / print engine
may damage the machine (paper guides, transport rollers, etc.) or if the paper
tears, small paper pieces may remain in the machine and result errors during
production.
A paper jam in the transport unit is indicated by an illuminated red LED.
Only if the green LED is on the transport unit can be pulled out (analog to paper
magazines)!
Pulling out the print engine (PE)

1 Open the Printer side door.
Open the levers of the print engine: two
levers (1).
Pull out the print engine (2) completely.
dlab2005
7-16 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Pulling out the transport unit (TU)
1 Open the Printer front door.

Open the lock (1) of the transport unit (two
levers).
Unlock the transport unit and pull it out on
its handle to the front.
2
dlab2548
7
Removing jammed paper from the lower paper channel
First pull out the print engine (PE), then the
transport unit (TU), as described above.
Open the levers (2) and hold the unit as the
bottom part of the transport unit should be
lowered slowly.
Take the flap (3), pull it up and slowly lower
the bottom part.
Remove the jammed paper from the lower
paper channel.
dlab2010
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-17

Removing jammed paper from the upper paper channel

Lift the top guide plate on the shafts marked
red and fold it up.
Remove the jammed paper from the upper
paper channel.
dlab2109
7-18 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Removing jammed paper in the sheet bridge (SB) transport unit (TU)
2 SB Pull up the quick-action lock (1), pull the
cover plate of the single sheet buffer a little
3 to the front and remove it.
If necessary remove any paper below.
Hold the sheet bridge on the right side and
fold it open to the left (3).
Remove the paper.
Set the sheet bridge back to its initial
position. Mind the lock-in position.
1 SR
dlab2008
Turn the button (see arrow) on the sheet
turnover and remove the paper.
dlabr011
Pushing the transport unit (TU) and print engine (PE) back in
Bring all opened flaps and guides back to
initial position and engage them.
Push in the transport unit.
Lock the transport unit (two levers).
Push in the print engine to stop position.
Lock the levers of the print engine: two
levers.
Close the Printer side door.
Close the Printer front door.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-19

7.7.4 Paper Jam in the Transfer Positions Transport Unit (TU) and Print Engine (PE)
Applies to d-lab.2
1 Pull out the print engine (do not pull out the
transport unit!):
Open the Printer side door.
Open the locking: two levers (1).
2
Do not pull out the transport unit!
dlab2005
The paper is in the print engine:

Remove the top (1) and/or bottom (2) guide
plates by pressing the toggle of the guide
plate down (1) or up (2).
Remove the paper.
Put the guides back in initial position.
The paper is in the transport unit:

Leave the transport unit in the Printer; do
not pull it out.
Remove the paper.
dlabr095

levers.
7-20 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.7.5 Paper Jam in the Print Engine (PE)

Applies to d-lab.2
1 Pull out the print engine:

dlab2005
Turn the transport belt pulley of the print

drum stepper motor.
dlabr096
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-21

Unlock (2) the lower belt assembly (1) and

fold it down.
Remove the paper from the print drum (3).
Verify that all belts of the lower belt
assembly and the print drum are correctly
positioned.
Fold up the lower belt assembly (1) and lock
it (2).
1 3
dlab2006
levers.
7-22 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Lane Distributor (LD)
Applies to d-lab.2
Open the Printer front door.

Turn the hand-wheel (1) to advance the
sheet into the lane distributor: at least by 10
turns.
1 Open the locking (fastening screw) and pull
out the lane distributor to the front.
dlab2551
Remove the guide plate (1): pull the two
push buttons to open them.
Remove the sheet.
Insert the guide plate and press in the push
buttons.
Push in the lane distributor and lock it (red
fastening screw).
dlab2550
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-23

7.7.7 Paper Jam in the Lane Distributor (LD)

Applies to d-lab.2

Open the locking (fastening screw) and pull
out the lane distributor towards the front.
Remove the guide plates: pull two push
buttons (1) each to open them.
Remove the paper.
dlab2013
Insert the guide plates again and press in
the push buttons.
Push in the lane distributor and tighten the
fastening screw (red).
7-24 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Sheet Transfer (ST)
Applies to d-lab.2
Unlock the latch (1, red) (by pulling).

Remove the cover (2).
Lift the sheet transfer holding it by the
handle (3) and take it out.
Remove the paper.
Verify that all belts are positioned correctly.
2
Mount the Sheet Transfer again.
Observe the two engaging lugs (4).
Mount the cover (2).
7
Pull out the locking pin (1, red), to let the
cover engage, and then release again.
G_GG221
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-25

7.7.9 Paper Jam in the Paper Processor

Applies to d-lab.2
CAUTION!
Risk of injuries if you unlock the opened
cover accidentally or carelessly (by
Open the cover:

Close the cover:
Hold on to the cover with one hand while
unlocking it (press PUSH) and then close it.
CAUTION!
Observe the safety instruction regarding
the handling of chemicals! (See
Chapter 1 and 3.)
dlab2595
Pull out the rack(s) to remove the jammed

paper:
Open the cover.
Open the rack locking lever.
Remove the rack(s), pull out the paper.
Insert the rack(s) again, close the
locking lever.
Close the cover.
7-26 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.7.10 Paper jam between dryer and paper outlet

Applies to d-lab.2
If a paper jam occurs between dryer and paper outlet, there is a risk that large format
prints damage the foam rollers of the dryer.
To prevent this proceed as follows:
Remove the dryer cover. Use a coin to turn

the lock by 90º.
Loosen the locking screw (knurled screw 1)
of the dryer rack. Pull out the rack on the
telescopic rails by approx. 10 mm.
Turn the hand wheel (2) counter-clockwise,
to ensure that the paper is transported into
the dryer rack.
Once the paper is completely inside the 7
2 dryer rack, the rack can be pulled out.
G_PP108
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-27


7.8.1 General procedure

dlab2604
CAUTION!
Danger caused by toothed belts that may run in the marked area: risk of bruising.
WARNING!
Mind sharp corners and edges when working in the Printer area: risk of cutting
injuries!
7-28 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

General procedure for paper jam error messages:

2
1 On top of the transport (Feeder Unit, FU), an LED
signals in red that there is paper inside the
assembly. Nominal condition is green (with the
machine closed).
Remove the paper in positions indicated in
the error message (if possible pull out paper
in transport direction);
display the position of the paper jam, if
necessary: confirm the error message
(probably several times, until the main menu
is displayed again), press the i button and
the respective assembly in the illustration
(assemblies with error status are shown in
red).
3 If you cannot find the jammed paper, check 7

the possible positions in the sequence listed
4 below (pull out the paper in transport
6 5 direction, if possible; for a detailed procedure
G_GG101_1b (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus) refer to the explanations in the following
paragraphs):
1 Sheet Transfer (ST) Open the lower feeder unit (FU):
2 Paper Processor Remove the print or prints – if more
3 Sheet Distributor (SD) than one – from the feeder unit.
4 Sheet Bridge (SB), Sheet Stocker (SR), Switching Gear (SG)
Attention: Prints may also be in the area
of the crossover roller!
5 Feeder Unit (FU)
6 Print Machine (PM)
In the switching gear (SG) before
transfer to the feeder unit
or
in the area of the sheet bridge (SB)
or
in the area of the sheet stockers (SR).
It may be necessary to lift the channel
plate of the sheet bridge (SB) and the
sheet stockers (SR) and turn the drive
rollers manually to check if there are
still cut papers in the assemblies.
Upper feeder unit (FU):
Lift the guide plate and check whether
paper is underneath.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-29

Input and output of the print machine

PM, sheet distributor and transfer from
sheet distributor to sheet transfer (ST).
Check if paper jam is still reported.
Pull out the sheet transfer (ST).
Check the print drum in the print
machine:
Take out the top guide plate, turn the
print roller forward by hand to transport
out any paper that may still be inside.
Special case:
A paper jam occurs during shutdown of the machine or during reset.
The paper jam is only reported when the machine is started again: during this time, the
Info function cannot be called up.
7.8.2 Paper Jam in the Printer

Proceed as follows in case of a paper jam in the Printer part:
– The sequence control tries to transport all paper out of the Printer and through the
paper processor. In case of an actual mechanical problem this is not possible.
– All papers, which are past the location of the paper jam in paper transport direction,
are still transported and developed.
– All prints in the area of the paper jam must be removed. Watch out for small paper
remainders.
– Assemblies which have to be pulled out of the Printer to remove jammed paper are
not energized.
– The Printer will automatically be ready for printing once the operator has removed the
jammed papers and cleared the error message or triggered a reset.
7-30 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.8.3 Paper Jam in the Feeder Unit FU

A paper jam in the FU may occur in the following positions:
– transfer sheet bridge SB / feeder unit FU
– crossover in the FU
– lower paper channel
– upper paper channel
CAUTION!
In case of a paper jam in the feeder unit FU always pull out the print machine PM
first and then the feeder unit FU!
Otherwise paper which may be in the transfer area FU / PM may damage the
machine (paper guides, transport rollers, etc.) or if the paper tears, small paper
pieces may remain in the machine and result errors during production. 7
A paper jam in the FU is indicated by an illuminated red LED.
Only if the green LED is on the FU can be pulled out (analog to paper magazines)!
Pulling out the print machine PM

Open the lock of the print machine: two
levers (1).
Pull out the print machine completely (2).
dlab2005
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-31

Pulling out the feeder unit FU

Open the lock (1) of the FU (two levers).
Pull out the FU on the handle (2).
G_FU110
Removing jammed paper from the lower paper channel

First pull out the print machine (PM), then
the feeder unit (FU) as described above.
Once the print machine (PM), and then the feeder
unit (FU) have been pulled out as described
above:
Lift the lower part of the FU at the handle (1)
and hold it.
Loosen the locking lever (2) and gradually
lower the lower part of the FU.
Remove the jammed paper from the lower
paper channel.
Push the lower part of the FU back up,
engage the locking lever.
2
G_FU112
7-32 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Removing jammed paper from the upper paper channel

First pull out the print machine PM, then the
feeder unit FU as described above.
1 Hold the upper guide by the red handles (1)
and lift to stop position, then lower it slowly
2 until it engages.
Remove the jammed paper from the upper
paper channel.
Unlock the upper guide (2) and move it back
to its initial position.
G_FU111
Removing jammed paper from the sheet bridge SB FU

First pull out the print machine PM, then the
feeder unit FU as described above.
Fold down the guide for the sheet transport
(red handle; see arrow).
Remove the paper.
Close the guide again, make sure that it
engages correctly (see Figure).
G_SG103
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-33

Removing jammed paper from the crossover in the FU

Open the lower part and the upper guide of
the FU (see above).
Remove the paper from the sheet crossover.
Attention: Small paper pieces may be
completely covered and hard to see.
It may be necessary to turn the crossover
roller by hand (from the bottom half-way up),
to transport the paper out.
Pushing the feeder unit FU and the print machine PM back in

Bring all opened flaps and guides back to
initial position and engage them.
Push in the feeder unit FU.
Lock the FU (two levers).
Push in the print machine PM completely.
Close the lock of the print machine:
two levers
7-34 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.8.4 Paper Jam in the Transfer Positions between Feeder Unit FU and Print Machine PM
1 Pull out the print machine PM (do not pull

out the feeder unit!):
Pull out the print machine PM
completely (2).
2
Do not pull out the feeder unit FU!
dlab2005
Paper jammed in PM:

Remove the upper guide plate (1): for this
purpose press the rocker of the guide plate
down (1).
Unlock the lower guide plate and fold it
down.
1 Remove the paper.
Put the guides back in initial position.
Paper jammed in FU:

Leave the FU in the Printer; do not pull it
G_PM715 out.
Remove the paper.
Push in the print machine PM completely.
Close the lock of the print machine PM: two
levers.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-35

7.8.5 Paper Jam in the Print Machine PM

1 Pull out the print machine:

Pull out the print machine completely (2).
dlab2005
Turn the transport belt pulley of the print

drum stepper motor.
dlabr096
7-36 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Unlock (2) the lower belt assembly (1) and

fold it down.
Remove the paper from the print drum (3).
Verify that all belts of the lower belt
assembly and the print drum are correctly
positioned.
Fold up the lower belt assembly (1) and lock
it (2).
dlab2006
Push in the print machine PM completely. 7
Close the lock of the print machine: two
levers.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-37

7.8.6 Paper Jam between the Feeder Unit FU and Sheet Distributor SD

3
Open the lock (1) and pull out the sheet
distributor SD at the red handle (2).
Turn the hand-wheel (4) to advance the
sheet into the sheet distributor: at least by
10 turns.
Remove the sheet.
If necessary remove the pressure plate of the
back printer (two knurled screws, red, 3), to
remove paper in this area.
Mount the pressure plate again.
Push in the sheet distributor and lock it (1).
4 1 Close the Printer front door.
G_SD111
7-38 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.8.7 Paper Jam in the Sheet Distributor SD


3
Open the lock (1) and pull out the sheet
distributor SD at the red handle (2).
Remove the paper.
If necessary remove the pressure plate of the
back printer (two knurled screws, red, 3), to
remove paper in this area.
Mount the pressure plate again.
Push in the sheet distributor and lock it (1).
7
4 1
G_SD111
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-39

7.8.8 Paper Jam between Sheet Distributor SD and Sheet Transfer ST

Unlock the pin (1, red) (by pulling).

Lift the sheet transfer (ST) holding it by the
handle (3) and take it out.
Remove the paper.
2 Verify that all belts are positioned correctly.
Mount the unit again.
3 Observe the two engaging lugs (4).
Mount the cover (2).
Pull out the locking pin (1, red), to let the
cover engage, and then release again.
1
G_GG121b
7-40 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

7.8.9 Paper Jam in the Paper Processor

CAUTION!
Risk of injuries if you unlock the opened
cover accidentally or carelessly (by
Open the cover:

Close the cover:
Hold on to the cover with one hand while
unlocking it (press PUSH) and then close it. 7
CAUTION!
Observe the safety instruction regarding
the handling of chemicals! (See
dlab2595 (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus) Chapter 1 and 3.)
Pull out the rack(s) to remove the jammed

paper:
Open the cover.
Open the rack locking lever.
Remove the rack(s), pull out the paper.
Insert the rack(s) again, close the
locking lever.
Close the cover.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 7-41

7.8.10 Paper Jam between dryer and outlet unit

If a paper jam occurs between dryer and outlet unit, there is a risk that large format prints
damage the foam rollers of the dryer.
To prevent this proceed as follows:
the lock by 90º.
Loosen the locking screw (knurled screw 1)
telescopic rails by approx. 10 mm.
Turn the hand wheel (2) counter-clockwise,
to ensure that the paper is transported into
2 the dryer rack.
Once the paper is completely inside the
1
dryer rack, the rack can be pulled out.
G_PP108
7-42 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Maintenance
8 Maintenance
8.1 Safety Instructions........................................................................................................................................................8-1

8.2 Maintenance Routines – Schedule and Overview ...........................................................................................8-2
8.3 Daily Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................8-8
8.3.2.1 In the Running Machine..........................................................................................................8-10
8.3.2.2 When the Machine is Off.........................................................................................................8-10
8.3.4 Running a Process Check in the Paper Processor .....................................................................8-11
8.4 Weekly Maintenance Routines.............................................................................................................................8-12
8.4.2 Cleaning the Film Takeup 8
Applies to d-lab.2.......................................................................................................................................8-14
8.4.4.1 Transport Unit (TU) .....................................................................................................................8-14
8.4.4.2 Single sheet buffer (SR) and sheet bridge (SB)................................................................8-15
8.4.4.3 Print engine (PE): Remove Paper Dust ...............................................................................8-16
8.4.4.4 Lane distributor (LD): Remove Paper Dust and Deposits .............................................8-19
8.4.4.5 Sheet Transfer (ST) .....................................................................................................................8-20
Applies to d-lab.2plus and netlab.2plus ...............................................................................................8-21
8.4.5.1 Feeder Unit (FU) ..........................................................................................................................8-21
8.4.5.2 Sheet Stocker (SR) and Sheet Bridge (SB).........................................................................8-23
8.4.5.3 Print Machine (PM)....................................................................................................................8-24
8.4.5.4 Sheet Distributor (SD): Remove Paper Dust and Deposits..........................................8-27
8.4.5.5 Sheet Transfer (ST) .....................................................................................................................8-28
8.4.6 Paper Processor: Cleaning the CD Feed Unit, Tank Crossovers, and the
Squeegee Unit .........................................................................................................................................8-29
8.4.7 Checking the Solution Levels............................................................................................................8-33
8.4.8 Cleaning the Chemical Filters ...........................................................................................................8-34
8.4.9 Cleaning the Filters in the ASTOR and Water Inlets.................................................................8-35
8.4.10 Cleaning the Densitometer Calibration Plate .............................................................................8-36
8.4.11 Lane shifter (LS): Cleaning the transport belt..............................................................................8-38
8.5 Monthly Maintenance Routines ...........................................................................................................................8-39
8.5.2 Checking and Calibrating the Solution Temperatures .............................................................8-41
8.5.3 Cleaning or Replacing the Air Filters..............................................................................................8-41
8.5.5 Replacing the Chemical Filters.........................................................................................................8-47
8.5.6 Cleaning the Processing Racks.........................................................................................................8-48
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-i

Maintenance d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
8.5.7 Cleaning the Dryer Rack...................................................................................................................... 8-51

8.5.8 Clean the paper outlet (PO)................................................................................................................ 8-53
8.6 Maintenance Routines Every 6 Months ............................................................................................................ 8-57
8.7 Maintenance When Required................................................................................................................................ 8-57
8.7.2 Back Printer: Replacing the Ink Ribbon......................................................................................... 8-58
8.7.3 Emptying the Effluent Tanks.............................................................................................................. 8-60
8.8 Spare Parts and Accessories .................................................................................................................................. 8-62
8-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Regular maintenance routines are necessary to ensure the performance of the Minilab.
This chapter describes maintenance routines to be carried out by the customer.
All maintenance routines, which are not mentioned in this chapter must only be made by
an AgfaPhoto Service Technician or another person authorized by AgfaPhoto.
8.1 Safety Instructions

CAUTION!
Maintenance routines must only be carried out by trained personnel.
The safety instructions given for certain routines must be observed by all means.
CAUTION!
The safety instructions on all machine labels and in Chapter 1 of this folder must
be observed.
8
WARNING!
Do not clean or clean only with great care while the drive is switched on. Risk of
injuries!
CAUTION!
In case of maintenance regarding the chemicals observe the Safety instructions
for the handling of chemicals (see Ö Chapter 3).
CAUTION!
Mind sharp corners and edges when working in the Printer area: Risk of cutting
injuries!
CAUTION!
Some cleaning routines require the use of Isopropanol (Isopropyl alcohol).
Isopropanol is a flammable liquid which may cause irritation of eyes and dry skin.
After maintenance wash your hands with water.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-1

8.2 Maintenance Routines – Schedule and Overview

The following tables offer an overview of the maintenance routines to be carried out by
the customer and those to be carried out by an AgfaPhoto authorized Service Technician.
Applies to d-lab.2
Interval Maintenance jobs to be performed by the customer

Daily Weekly Monthly
x Clean APS film carrier
x Clean drive rollers in the film carrier area
x Clean the film brush
x Running a process check in the Paper Processor
x Film mask: remove dust
x Clean the film takeup
x Clean the film chute
x Transport unit (TU): remove paper dust
x Single sheet buffer (SR) and sheet bridge (SB): remove paper dust
x Print engine (PE): remove paper dust
x Lane distributor (LD): remove paper dust / deposits
x Sheet transfer (ST) to Paper Processor: remove paper dust
x Paper Processor: clean tank crossovers
x Clean CD feed unit
x Clean squeegee and wiper unit (V wipers)
x Check solution levels, top up if necessary
x Clean chemical filters
x Clean filter in ASTOR and water supply lines
x Clean densitometer calibration plate
x Lane shifter (LS): clean the transport belt
x Clean exposure filters
x Check solution temperatures
x Clean the air filter: lamphouse, CCD fan, below the cutters, Printer side door, AC-
power supply, dryer and Paper Outlet (PO)
x Change scanner lamp (service life approx. 300 h)
x Replace the chemical filters
x Clean the processing racks
x Clean the dryer rack
x Clean the paper outlet (PO):
– clean / replace air filter
– clean guide plate with feed chute
– clean rubber transport belts
8-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Every 6 When
months required
x Remove dust from lens
x Change back printer ink ribbon
x Empty the effluent tanks
x Cartridge feeder: clean the mechanism and the light barriers
CAUTION!
The maintenance routines below must only be performed by an AgfaPhoto
authorized Service Technician!
Interval Maintenance jobs to be performed by the Service Technician

Every
Every year
2 years 8
x Clean the inside of the complete machine / Printer and Paper Processor
x Film carrier / film carrier area: lubricate latch, holes
x Film carrier holder: lubricate toothed belt / shafts
x Oil the scanner carriage
x Cutter unit (CU) and sheet gear (SG) of the Printer
x Single sheet buffer (SR) and sheet bridge (SB) of the Printer
x Transport unit (TU) of the Printer
x Print engine (PE) of the Printer
x Lane distributor (LD) of the Printer
x Sheet transfer (ST) to Paper Processor
x Paper magazine compartment left and right
x Clean the processing tanks
x Dryer (DR): rack, drive and coupling
x Main drive
x Docking station (DS)
x Circulation of the processing solutions
x Clean the water tank and ASTOR tank
x Clean CD, BX and SB replenisher tanks
x Clean the effluent tanks
x Service the replenishment pumps
x Solenoid valves
x Replenisher mixer drive
x Sorter (SO)
x Electric / electronic block
x Replace the laser (d-lab.2 with gas laser Type 8060/260)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-3


x Clean APS film carrier
x Clean drive rollers in the film carrier area
x Clean the film brush
x Film mask: remove dust
x Clean the film takeup
x Clean the film chute
x Feeder unit (FU): remove paper dust
x Sheet stocker (SR) and sheet bridge (SB): remove paper dust
x Print machine (PM): remove paper dust
x Sheet distributor (SD): remove paper dust / deposits
x Clean the air filter: lamphouse, CCD fan, below the cutters, Printer side door, AC-
power supply, dryer and Paper Outlet (PO)
x Change scanner lamp (service life approx. 300 h)
8-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Every 6 When
months required
x Remove dust from lens
x Cartridge feeder: clean the mechanism and the light barriers
CAUTION!

Every
Every year
2 years 8
x Film carrier / film carrier area: lubricate latch, holes
x Film carrier holder: lubricate toothed belt / shafts
x Oil the scanner carriage
x Cutter unit (CU) and switching gear (SG) of the Printer
x Sheet stocker (SR) and sheet bridge (SB) of the Printer
x Feeder unit (FU) of the Printer
x Print machine (PM) of the Printer
x Sheet distributor (SD) of the Printer
x Sheet transfer (ST) to Paper Processor:
x Main drive
x Docking Station, DS
x Solenoid valves
x Sorter (SO)
x Replace the laser (d-lab.2plus with gas laser Type 8060/261)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-5


x Feeder unit (FU): remove paper dust
x Sheet stocker (SR) and sheet bridge (SB): remove paper dust
x Print machine (PM): remove paper dust
x Sheet distributor (SD): remove paper dust / deposits
x Clean the air filter: below the cutter units, door to print machine (PM), Paper
Processor: RH side wall, dryer, AC supply and Paper Outlet
8-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


When required
CAUTION!

Every year
x Cutter unit (CU) and switching gear (SG) of the Printer
x Sheet stocker (SR) and sheet bridge (SB) of the Printer
8
x Feeder unit (FU) of the Printer
x Print machine (PM) of the Printer
x Sheet distributor (SD) of the Printer
x Sheet transfer (ST) to Paper Processor:
x Main drive
x Docking Station, DS
x Solenoid valves
x Sorter (SO)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-7

8.3 Daily Maintenance

Purpose:
Correct reading of magnetic data.
Clean the magnetic head every day so that possible deposits cannot dry and make the
cleaning more difficult.
Material:
cleaning strips and cleaning fluid
– 3 cleaning strips (order no. CM+9.8506.1330.1)
– Complete set:
3 cleaning strips
+100 ml Isopropanol bottle (empty)
(order no. CM+9.8506.1320.1)
– First filling by the service in the country
– Refilling by the customer (without service).
CAUTION!
Clean the APS film carrier only with Isopropanol! Other cleaning agents will
damage the transport rollers TR4 / TR5 (rubber) and in addition they dissolve the
bonding of the cleaning strips. Dissolved glue will dirty the magnetic head
irreversibly.
CAUTION!
Isopropyl alcohol is a flammable liquid which may cause irritation of eyes and dry
skin. After maintenance wash your hands with water.
Isopropanol can damage the lacquer of the machine. Remove any splashes
immediately.
8-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

aps_str
If not present: insert the APS film carrier.

Print mode
Manual positioning
Drip some drops of the cleaning fluid on one
half of the cleaning strip in four different
positions (see Ö Figure above). 8
Insert the cleaning strip with the dry side
first so that it dries the magnetic head when
it comes back out:
the cleaning strip is pulled in just like a film.
Press Eject.
The cleaning strip is ejected.
Repeat the procedure two more times.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-9


Purpose:
To avoid film transport problems.
Tools and/or material

– Cleaning strips (order number CM+9.8506.1340.1)
– Water
There are two alternatives to remove the deposits on the drive rollers left and right of the
film carrier.
8.3.2.1 In the Running Machine

Print mode
Manual positioning
Dip the cleaning strip in water and wipe off
the water.
Feed the cleaning strip just like a film:
dlab2520
the cleaning strip is pulled in.
Press Eject:
The cleaning strip is ejected.
Repeat the procedure until both rollers are
free of deposits.
8.3.2.2 When the Machine is Off

End of work
Shutdown
Once the machine has shut down: remove
mirror box, film carrier, and film takeup.
Turn the rollers TR4 and TR5 by hand and
clean them with a damp cloth (water).
Also clean the hinged drive rollers with a
damp cloth (water).
CAUTION!
Do not use solvents or cleaning
substances containing solvents.
Clean the surface of the scanner filter.

Insert film take-up, film carrier, and mirror
dlabr066 box again.
8-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Purpose:
Avoid damage on the film caused by deposits on the brush.
Remove deposits on the film brush.

Remove the mirror box:
Access to the cleaning brush is possible from
the back of the cartridge feeder (device
holding IX240 film cartridges).
Clean the brush.
If there is visible wear:
replace the film brush.
Order number CM+8.8506.CF27.0
Insert the mirror box.
8
8.3.4 Running a Process Check in the Paper Processor
See Ö Checking the Process in Chapter 5.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-11

8.4 Weekly Maintenance Routines

Purpose:
Remove dust.
Special tools
– Lint-free cloth
Remove the film carrier.

Clean the window in the film carrier and
insert the carrier again.
8.4.2 Cleaning the Film Takeup

Purpose:
Remove dust and film abrasion which may deposit on pulled-in films and may affect the
print results.
Special tools
– Lint-free cloth
Remove the film take-up and open it:

Pull off the metal bracket (1) to the front and
separate the two parts (2).
Remove dust and film abrasion with a lint-
free cloth.
Assemble the film takeup and insert it again.
302B070
8-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Purpose:
Remove dust.
Special tools
– Lint-free cloth

Remove the dust from the film chute (1) with
a lint-free cloth.
Close the Printer door.
dlabr194
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-13


Applies to d-lab.2
8.4.4.1 Transport Unit (TU)

Applies to d-lab.2
Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush
– Isopropanol (for plastic-coated rollers, not for rubber rollers)
CAUTION!

Open the lock of the transport unit (two
levers).
Unlock the transport unit and pull it out on
its handle to the front.
CAUTION!
Only pull out the transport unit if the LED
shows green!
In case of a paper jam the LED shows red.
To avoid damage in such cases always
pull out the print engine (PE) first!
If the print engine is pulled out the LED
dlab2b09 switches to green. The transport unit can
be pulled out.
Lift the top guide plate on the shafts marked

red and fold it up.
Open the guide for the sheet transport.
Remove the paper dust with a vacuum
cleaner.
Clean the sensors with a brush.
Clean the transport rollers: use a dust brush
or a damp cloth (with some water – do not
use Isopropanol; this would damage the
transport rollers).
Close the guide plates again.
Push in the transport unit and lock it.
8-14 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.4.4.2 Single sheet buffer (SR) and sheet bridge (SB)

Applies to d-lab.2
Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush

Unlock the transport unit (TU) and pull it out
on the telescopic rails.
CAUTION!
Only pull out the transport unit if the LED
shows green!
To avoid damage in such cases always
pull out the print engine (PE) first!
If the print engine is pulled out the LED
switches to green. The transport unit can 8
be pulled out.
2 SB Pull up the quick-action lock (1), pull the
cover plate of the single sheet buffer a little
3 to the front and remove it.
Hold the sheet bridge on the right side and
fold it open to the left (3).
cleaner.
position: Mind the lock-in position.
Push the cover plate of the single sheet
buffer into the holding brackets (2) at the
back and fasten it at the front by snapping in
the quick-action lock (1).
1 SR Push in the transport unit and lock it.
dlab2008 Close the Printer front door.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-15

8.4.4.3 Print engine (PE): Remove Paper Dust

Applies to d-lab.2
Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush

Open the lock (1) of the print engine.
Pull out the print engine on the telescopic
rails (2).
dlab2005
Remove the guide plates (1) and (2):

to do so, press down the toggle on guide
plate (1) and press up on guide plate (2).
cleaner.
Insert both guide plates again.
dlabr095
8-16 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Clean the light barriers with a brush or

compressed air spray:
BOL (Begin Of Line, 1): start of exposure
(accessible from outside, see Ö bottom
Figure).
BOP (Begin Of Paper, 2) detection of the
leading paper edge.
dlab2097
dlabr098
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-17

Open the belt assembly.

Hold the belt assembly by the handle in the
middle of the left side, pull it to the left and
lower the unit.
cleaner.
Close the belt assembly again.
Note
Make sure that the transport belts are not
shifted.
dlab2605
Push the print engine into the machine and

lock it.
8-18 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.4.4.4 Lane distributor (LD): Remove Paper Dust and Deposits

Applies to d-lab.2
CAUTION!
Danger caused by toothed belts that may run in the marked area: Risk of bruising.
Do not reach into the machine.
Purpose:
To avoid transport problems.

– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush
– Isopropanol, (for plastic-coated rollers, not for rubber rollers)

2 1 Unscrew the locking screw (red) (1).
8
Pull out the lane distributor on the
telescopic rails.
cleaner.
Remove the guide plates after opening the
quick-action locks (2) and the knurled screws
(3).
Clean all guide plates with a damp cloth or
AgfaPhoto Cleaner (see Ö Cleaning
substances at the end of this Chapter).
Put back the guide plates:
Make sure that they sit correctly in the
holders and that the quick-action locks are
3 locked.
dlab2079 Clean the transport rollers with a damp lint-
free cloth.
Push in the lane distributor and tighten the
locking screw (red).
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-19

8.4.4.5 Sheet Transfer (ST)

Applies to d-lab.2
Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush
– Isopropanol / water

Pull the locking lever (1) to the front and
remove the cover (2) of the sheet transfer.
Lift the Sheet Transfer out of the holder,
holding it by the handle (3), and put it down.
2 Note
shifted.

cleaner.
Clean the rollers and transport belts with a
damp lint-free cloth.
Mount the Sheet Transfer again:
Observe the two engaging lugs (4).
Insert the cover of the sheet transfer: insert
the back first, slightly lifting the front. Then
pull the button, top right in the Printer,
lower the front edge of the cover, and
1 release the button again.
G_GG221
8-20 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Applies to d-lab.2plus and netlab.2plus
8.4.5.1 Feeder Unit (FU)

Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush
– Isopropanol (for plastic-coated rollers, not for rubber rollers)
CAUTION!

Open the lock (1) of the Feeder Unit (two
levers). 8
Pull out the Feeder Unit on the handle (2).
CAUTION!
Only pull out the Feeder Unit if the LED
shows green!
To avoid damage always pull out the print
machine (PM) first in such cases!
If the print machine is pulled out the LED
switches to green. The Feeder Unit can be
pulled out.
1
G_FU110
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-21

1 Lift the upper part of the Feeder Unit / upper

paper guide by the handles (red) and engage
2 the lock (2).
cleaner.
Clean the transport rollers.
Hold the upper guide by the red handles (1)
and lift to stop position, then lower it slowly.
Lift the lower part of the Feeder Unit by the
handle (3) and hold it.
Loosen the locking lever (4) and gradually
lower the lower part of the Feeder Unit.
cleaner.
Clean the transport rollers with a damp lint-
free cloth.
Push the lower part of the Feeder Unit back
up, engage the locking lever (4).
Push in the Feeder Unit and lock it.
4
G_FU113
8-22 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.4.5.2 Sheet Stocker (SR) and Sheet Bridge (SB)

Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush

Unlock the feeder unit (FU) and pull it out on
the telescopic rails.
CAUTION!
Only pull out the feeder unit if the LED
shows green!
To avoid damage always pull out the print
machine first in such cases!
If the print machine is pulled out the LED
switches to green. The feeder unit can be 8
pulled out.
Pull up the quick-action lock (1), pull the

cover plate of the sheet stocker (SR) a little
to the front and remove it.
3
Hold the sheet bridge (SB) by the red handle
on the right and fold it to the left (3).
cleaner.
2 position: mind the lock-in position.
1 Push the cover plate of the sheet stocker

into the holding brackets (2) at the back and
G_SG104 fasten it at the front by snapping in the
quick-action lock (1).
Push in the feeder unit and lock it.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-23

8.4.5.3 Print Machine (PM)

Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush

Open the lock (1) of the Print Machine.
Pull out the Print Machine on the telescopic
rails (2).
dlab2005
Remove the guide plate (1) upwards:

For this purpose press the rocker of guide
plate (1) down, remove the part to the right;
unlock the bottom flap (2) (press the holding
bracket to the right) and fold the part down).
cleaner.
1
Insert the upper guide (1) again,
press the bottom flap (2) back up and
engage the holding bracket.
G_PM715
8-24 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Clean the light barriers with a brush or

compressed air spray:
BOL (Begin Of Line, 1): start of exposure
(accessible from outside, see Ö bottom
Figure).
BOP (Begin Of Paper, 2) detection of the
leading paper edge.
2 1
dlab2097
dlabr098
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-25

Open the belt assembly.

Hold the belt assembly by the handle in the
middle of the left side, pull it to the left and
lower the unit.
cleaner.
Close the belt assembly again.
Note
shifted.
Push the print machine into the machine

dlab2605 and lock it.
8-26 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.4.5.4 Sheet Distributor (SD): Remove Paper Dust and Deposits

CAUTION!
Danger caused by toothed belts that may run in the marked area: risk of bruising.
Do not reach into the machine.
Purpose:
To avoid transport problems.

– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush
– Isopropanol, (for plastic-coated rollers, not for rubber rollers)

Open the lock (1).
3 8
Pull out the sheet distributor on the
telescopic rails (handle, 2).
cleaner.
Remove the pressure plate of the back
printer after unscrewing the knurled screws
(3).
Clean the pressure plate with a damp cloth
or AgfaPhoto Cleaner (see Ö Cleaning
substances at the end of this chapter).
Insert the pressure plate again and fix it with
the knurled screws (3).
Clean the transport rollers with a damp lint-
1 free cloth.
Push in the sheet distributor and close the
locking levers.
G_SD110
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-27

8.4.5.5 Sheet Transfer (ST)

Special tools
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush
– Isopropanol / water

Pull the locking lever (1) to the front and
remove the cover (2) of the sheet transfer
(ST).
2 Lift the Sheet Transfer out of the holder,
holding it by the handle (3), and put it down.
3
Note
shifted.

cleaner.
4 Clean the rollers and transport belts with a
damp lint-free cloth.
Mount the Sheet Transfer again:
1 Observe the two engaging lugs (4).
G_GG121b Mount the cover of the sheet transfer: insert
the back first, slightly lifting the front. Then
pull the button, top right in the Printer,
lower the front edge of the cover, and
release the button again.
8-28 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.4.6 Paper Processor: Cleaning the CD Feed Unit, Tank Crossovers, and the Squeegee Unit
Purpose:
To ensure optimum processing quality.
CD SB1 SB3
BX SB2 SB4 8
Over the weekend take out the crossovers and put them in a lab sink filled with water as
described below.
At the beginning of the week clean the crossovers and insert them again before starting
work.
Special tools
– Splash guard
CAUTION!
Risk of injury if the wet section cover is unlocked unintentionally or without
paying attention, and then drops back down.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-29

Open the cover:

The cover engages only in vertical position
and may shut when unlocked
unintentionally (PUSH touched).
Close the cover:
Support the cover with one hand before
pressing the unlocking lever (PUSH), then
close it.
CAUTION!
Observe the safety instructions for the handling of chemicals
(see Ö Safety Information in Chapter 3).
Removing the CD feed unit

Open the Paper Processor cover and let it
lock in a vertical position.
Fasten the splash guard at the front to
protect the tank area from chemical
splashes.
Take the CD feed unit by its handle to
remove it and put it in the lab sink.
dlab2508
8-30 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Removing the tank crossovers

Lift the crossover by the handles and remove
them one by one (starting with the
developer on the left) and place them in a
lab basin.
dlab2509
8
Removing the squeegee unit and V wipers
The squeegee unit consists of a guide part and a holder for the V wiper.
Unlock the holder for removal: press from

1 both sides (1).
Hold the squeegee unit by the handle and
remove it.
Unlock the holder for the V wiper on both
sides and lift it out of the squeegee unit.
1 Put both parts in the lab basin.
Close the Processor cover.
dlab2517
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-31

Cleaning the CD feed unit, tank crossovers, and squeegee unit
Special tools
– Brush
Clean the crossovers before you start working after the weekend:
CD feed unit and tank crossovers

Clean the rollers in the lab basin using a soft
brush.
Clean the paper guide surfaces with a lint-
free cloth.
Squeegee unit and V wipers

Clean the rollers of the squeegee unit with a
soft brush.
The rollers of this assembly must turn easily.
Clean the paper guide surfaces of the
squeegee unit and the holder with a lint-free
cloth.
Do not damage the wiper edges of the V
wiper, check for damage.
Put back the holder of the V wiper and let it
engage.
Check if the wiper has contact all the way
across.
Rinse the crossovers again in fresh water
before mounting them.
Observe the attached color markings and or numbering when putting back the tank
crossovers and the squeegee unit.
The latches of the units must be engaged and must be flat against the housing.
8-32 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.4.7 Checking the Solution Levels

Purpose:
To compensate for evaporation (also required with the automatic evaporation
compensation).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The solution levels in the Paper Processor

must be checked and topped up with water 8
once a week before production is started.
In case of major level drop:
Adjust the water replenishment to the
current requirements.
Have defective level switches replaced by a
service technician.
WARNING!
Risk of fire in case of defective level
switches (overheating of the solution
heaters)!
Defective level switches must be
replaced. They must not be repaired.
Call the service technician to check for

leaks.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-33

8.4.8 Cleaning the Chemical Filters

Purpose:
To ensure uniform circulation of the processing solutions by cleaning of the filters.
Special tools
– Soft brush
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Open the Paper Processor cover until it

engages.
Remove the chemical filters and clean them
with warm water and a soft brush.
Put the chemical filters back in the color-
marked order.
Close the cover of the Paper Processor.
dlab2510b
8-34 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.4.9 Cleaning the Filters in the ASTOR and Water Inlets

ASTOR: AgfaPhoto Stabilizer Tank Overflow Reduction
Purpose:
1 ASTOR
2 Water
3 Water tank cover
1
3
8
dlab2513
Open the door right of the docking station
(press the snap lock: middle left).
The water tank cover (3) must be closed.
Close the drain cocks of the three inlets.
Unscrew the cap nuts (1, 2) and carefully
remove them: they are full of liquid.
Remove the filters and rinse them in fresh
water.
Insert the filters again:
do not mix up the ASTOR filter (1) with the
water filters (2)!
Open the drain cocks again.
Note
Make sure that the shut-off tap is tight on the
housing (may move up during turning). If the
tap is not correctly mounted there is a risk of
stabilizer (STB) leaking from the Astor tank.
Close the door.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-35

8.4.10 Cleaning the Densitometer Calibration Plate

Purpose:
To ensure optimum calibration of the densitometer.
Special tools
– Damp lint-free cloth
– Soft brush
CAUTION!
Risk of injuries by moving transport rollers. Open the cover of the paper outlet
(PO) only after the transport rollers have stopped or when the machine is switched
off.
2 Remove the front cover of the paper outlet

PO (1): loosen the screw (2).
G_GG115
1 Applies to d-lab.2
Unscrew the knurled screws (1) on the right
and left side on the guide plate of the
densitometer unit.
Fold up the densitometer unit (2) and clean
the calibration plate with a damp cloth.
Clean the guide plates with a damp lint-free
2
cloth.
Clean the densitometer head with a brush.
Fasten the densitometer unit again with the
knurled screws.
dlab2515
Fasten the paper outlet cover.
Note
Damaged calibration plates must be replaced
by a service technician.
8-36 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto


Open the locking lever (1) on the right and
1 left side on the guide plate of the
densitometer unit.
Fold up the densitometer unit (2) and clean
the calibration plate with a damp cloth.
2 cloth.
Clean the densitometer head with a brush.
Fold the densitometer unit back up and fix it.
Fasten the Paper Outlet cover.
Note
Damaged calibration plates must be replaced
by a service technician.
G_GG117 8
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-37

8.4.11 Lane shifter (LS): Cleaning the transport belt
Special tools
– Use a cloth and warm water
WARNING!
The transport belt must only be cleaned when the transport is switched off: switch
off the machine before starting to clean it; risk of injuries by bruising.
Clean the transport belt (1) with a damp

cloth.
Wipe the lane shifter (2) with a damp cloth.
1
2
dlab2516
8-38 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.5 Monthly Maintenance Routines

Due to various ambient conditions (dust, fume etc.) regular cleaning of the exposure
filters is required.
Special tools
– Compressed air spray with spray tube
– Optical cleaning cloth or optic pads
CAUTION!
The lamp and the lamphouse are hot during operation. Risk of burning!
Allow for the lamp to cool down before cleaning.
CAUTION!
When the filter cover (see Ö below) is removed the scanner lamp switches off
automatically (microswitch). Make sure that the microswitch is not activated by
hand during the cleaning: when the scanner lamp switches on the exposure filters
will burn.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-39

Remove the mirror box.
1
Push the lamphouse cover a little to the
front until it opens and the lamp is switched
off.
Wait a few minutes to allow the lamp to
cool down.
The lamphouse cover is connected in the
front filter panel. Push it slightly to the back
and unhook it.
2 The lamphouse cover is attached to a metal
rod of the lamp holder. Detach the
lamphouse cover from the metal rod.
Press the complete lamp holder down and
lock it with the black lever (left, behind the
G_GG212_5 shows d-lab.2)
warning label).
Lift the filter panel a little in the back (1) and
pull it out towards the front (2): now there is
access to the filter wheel.
Blow off the dust (compressed air can with a

spray tube).
If the filters are quite dirty, clean them
carefully with an optical cloth or with optic
pads (see Ö below).
CAUTION!
Avoid by all means to touch the filter
glasses with bare hands. Finger prints
(grease) may affect the production
quality.
When cleaning the very thin and highly
fragile glasses of the exposure filters (1),
support them from below to avoid
breaking.
dlabr060
Mount the filter panel again.
Open the lock of the complete lamp holder
assembly.
Attach the lamphouse cover to the metal
rod, insert it in the front, close it, and push it
fully to the back.
Insert the mirror box again.
8-40 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.5.2 Checking and Calibrating the Solution Temperatures

See Ö Setting Temperatures and Calibrating Sensors in Chapter 4.
8.5.3 Cleaning or Replacing the Air Filters

Let washed filters / filter mats dry well before putting them back.
Do not wring, bend or press them hard.
Do not let them dry in the sunshine.
Note
The service life of the filter mats depends on the air conditions at the operation site
and on the operation time of the machine. In case of long operation times and
unfavorable air conditions, the filters must probably be replaced more often.
6 Position of the air filters:

1 1 Lamphouse (only d-lab.2/2plus)
2 AC power supply and dryer 8
3 CCD fan (only d-lab.2/2plus)
4 Below the cutter units
5 Printer side door
Note
Cleaning and replacement of the air filters 1–5
are explained below. For cleaning and
replacement of air filter 6 see Ö Cleaning the
paper outlet (PO) in this chapter.
3
5 4
G_GG201_5 shows d-lab.2)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-41

Lamphouse
Hold the venting grids (1) in the middle of
the edge, push them out and remove them.
1 Remove the filter mat:
If filters are not very dirty, clean them
with compressed air or wash them in
water.
In case of very dirty filters, replace them
(order number CM+9.8061.LHL5.0).
Insert the filter mat:
chamfered side to the front / up,
soft side facing out.
Close the venting grid and engage it.
G_GG212_6
CCD fan
Air is sucked in through the film chute and cools the electronics via the CCD fan (1).
1 CCD fan
2 Knurled screw

Open the knurled screw (2).
Replace the filter.
(order number CM+9.8061.FEL4.0)
Close the cover again.
2
1
G_SP701
8-42 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Below the cutter units

Printer front panel between the two paper
magazine doors: undo the screws (top) and
fold down the panel.
Remove the filter mat and wash it in water;
replace it if it is too dirty
(order no. CM+9.7075.2731.0).
Put in the dried filter mat,
mind the correct position of the filter fleece:
smooth side pointing to the grid.
Close the panel and screw it on.
1
8
G_GG125 shows d-lab.2/2plus)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-43

Printer side door

Open the locks (1), pull them up and remove
the filter holder (2).
Remove the filter mat:
Very dirty: replace
(order number CM+9.8060.MUL8.1).
Slightly dirty: clean with warm water.
CAUTION!
Do not bend or wring the filter mats;
broken fibers may be blown into the print
engine (PE) and cause production
2 problems.
Remove all water and insert the dry filter in

dlab2518
the filter holder.
Engage the filter holder: press down, and at
the same time apply counter-pressure from
below.
AC power supply and dryer (Paper Processor: right side wall)

The air filters (1) and (2) are mounted in holders of perforated sheet metal. If a 13-bucket
sorter is installed this sorter must first be folded aside to provide access to the air filter
(1).
Open the fastening screw of the sorter and

fold out the sorter to the front, if necessary.
Lift the holder by the handle and pull it out
to the front.
Remove the air filter.
In case of minor dirt, blow out the air filters
from the inside with compressed air, wash
them in warm water if they are more dirty.
Replace very dirty air filters
(order no. CL+P4-E9249).
Place the air filter in the holder and insert
the holder again.
2
Fold the sorter back and tighten the
fastening screw.
1
8-44 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Replacing the lamp

CAUTION!
The lamp and the lamphouse are hot during operation. Risk of burning!
Allow for the lamp to cool down before replacing it.
Push the lamphouse cover a little to the

front until it opens and the lamp is switched
off.
Wait a few minutes to allow the lamp to
cool down.
dlabr070 The lamphouse cover is connected in the

front filter panel. Push it slightly to the back
and unhook it.
The lamphouse cover opens to the front.

It locks into the rods of the holder.
dlabr071
CAUTION!
Do not bypass the lamp switch when the lamp fitting is folded up. The light falling
straight down will damage the filters.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-45

The lamp fitting (1) is kept in the holder by

magnets. Pull the lamp fitting (1) out of the
holder and take out the old lamp with a
clean cloth.
Check the lamp socket (2):
If the lamp socket or the contacts show any
discoloring caused by heat, this indicates
contact problems that may have a negative
effect on the print result. If necessary, have
the lamp socket replaced by a service
technician.
dlabr072
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new lamp with bare hands. Finger prints reduce the service life
of the lamp. Use the protective foil or a clean cloth.
Insert the new lamp in the lamp fitting.

Insert the lamp fitting (1) in the holder.
Close the lamphouse cover.
Resetting the counter for operating hours
Note
The function is only accessible to users who have been given the Test rights.
See Ö User Manager: Defining Users and Assigning User Rights in Chapter 4.
Call up:
Test
Maintenance
Scanner lamp
The counter for the operating hours is reset.
048
8-46 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.5.5 Replacing the Chemical Filters
CAUTION!
paying attention.
CAUTION!
Observe the safety instructions for the handling of chemicals (see Ö Safety
instructions in Chapter 3).
WARNING!
Only replace chemical filters if the machine is off! Risk of electric shock if the
liquid is spilled.
Open the Paper Processor cover until it 8

engages.
Remove the chemical filters and put them in
a lab tray.
Pull the used filter cartridges off the holders
and attach a new filter cartridge
(order no. CL+P4-E0364).
Put the chemical filters back in the color-
marked order.
Keep the used filter cartridges safely until
their disposal.
dlab2510b
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-47

8.5.6 Cleaning the Processing Racks

Purpose:
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
instructions in Chapter 3).
WARNING!
Only clean the racks when the machine is switched off! Risk of electric shock if
the liquid is spilled.
Open the Paper Processor cover until it

engages.
Splashes of the chemicals may stain the
2 covers, so do use the splash guard (1) or
remove splashes immediately with water.
Remove the CD feed unit (Color Developer),
the tank crossovers and the squeegee unit.
(See Ö Paper Processor: Cleaning the CD
Feed Unit, Tank Crossovers, and the
Squeegee Unit.)
1 The CD solution must not be contaminated
by BX (bleachfix), for this reason, put the
splash guard (2) on the CD rack.

1 and 2 Splash guards
8-48 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Open the rack locks. Lift the racks SB1 to

SB4 (stabilizer) and let them drip.
dlab2521
Lift the BX rack far enough so that the

hinged holding plate can rest on the metal
bracket for dripping. 8
(Holding plate: see Ö white arrow.)
Remove the dripped racks, put them in the
tray supplied as accessory and take them to
a lab basin.
Remove the splash guard from the CD rack.
Then repeat the above procedure with the
CD rack.
Rinse the racks in warm water in the lab
basin (max. 40 °C).
Clean the rollers and gears on the outside
with warm water and a soft brush; mind any
crystal deposits that may stick to the lateral
dlab2065 drive gears.
Arrow, white: hinged holding plate,
on the CD and BX racks
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-49

Dismount the guide elements to clean the

inside rollers. For this, press together the
bearings clipped into the side parts at the
lugs and take them out.
On the CD and BX racks, dismount in
addition the four styrodur displacement
bodies mounted in holders on both sides.
Clean the rollers with a soft brush, clean the
guide elements with a lint-free cloth and
warm water.
Allow for the racks to drip dry.
Mount the guide elements; clip the bearings
of the guide elements safely into the plates.
Mount the displacement bodies and fasten
them safely in the holders.
Check the smooth movement of the racks by
turning the drive gear.
Check the drains at the back of the tanks,
remove any crystallization that may be
there.
Insert the cleaned racks slowly into the
tanks (observe the sequence).
Clean the CD feed unit, the crossovers and
the squeegee unit and put them back.
Before mounting the squeegee unit, clean
the protection plate underneath.
Close the Processor cover.
8-50 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.5.7 Cleaning the Dryer Rack
Special tools
– Screwdriver or coin
– Lint-free cloth and warm water
CAUTION!
The dryer is quite hot during operation. Risk of burning!
Allow cooling down before cleaning.
Before weekends:
4 the lock by 90º.
1 Loosen the locking screw (knurled screw 1)
telescopic rails.
8
Remove only the feed roller set after
unscrewing the knurled screw (2) and put it
in water over the weekend.
2 CAUTION!
In case the rollers are not mounted prior
to the automatic start after the weekend:
make sure to switch off the automatic
MBL to avoid paper jam (see Printer
3 Settings in Chapter 4).
dlab2507
On Mondays before starting work:
Wipe off all deposits on the feed rollers and
the feed plate with a damp cloth.
Clean the guide roller behind the feed rollers
with a damp cloth.
Check all foam rollers (3) for damage and
replace them if necessary.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-51

Clean the hinged guide grids (see Ö Figure)

with a damp cloth to remove all chemical
deposits (crystalline SB deposits).
Carefully mount / clip in the guide grids.
Finally mount the bracket with the feed
roller on the rack.
Check easy movement of the rack by turning
the handle (4) (see Ö previous Figure).
msc1b08
Push the dryer rack in the dryer duct and
fasten it with the knurled screw (1; see Ö
previous Figure).
Mount the covers.
Turn the locks through 90°, push in to lock
them.
8-52 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.5.8 Clean the paper outlet (PO)
Cleaning / replacing the air filters

The filter with holder is mounted on the fan which is next to the densitometer.
Access after opening the flap on the paper outlet.
CAUTION!
Risk of injuries by moving transport rollers: risk of bruising. Open the cover of the
paper outlet only after the transport rollers have stopped or when the machine is
switched off.
2 Remove the front cover of the paper outlet

(1):
loosen the screw (2).
1
8
G_GG115
Remove the holder (1) from the fan housing.
Remove the filter mat:
Slightly dirty: wash it.
Very dirty: replace
(order no. CL+P4-4071(3/1)).
1 After drying the filter, insert it in the holder
and insert the holder again.
dlab2522 (Fig. shows d-lab.2)
G_GG118 (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus/netlab.2plud)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-53

Cleaning the guide with the feed chute

Applies to d-lab.2
1 Unscrew (2x1) the guide plate (2) and lift it
with the feed chute out of the supporting
brackets.
Wipe the rear guide plate and the removed
plate with a damp lintfree cloth.
Put the guide plate in the supporting
brackets, push it down and fasten it safely
2 (2x1).
dlab2523
Cleaning the guide with the feed chute

Open the locking lever (1) on the right and
left side on the guide plates of the
1 densitometer unit.
Fold down the densitometer unit, holding it
by the handle (2).
cloth.
2 Fold the densitometer unit back up and fix it.
Screw on the paper outlet cover.
G_GG117
8-54 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Cleaning the rubber transport belts
WARNING!
The rubber transport belts and the rollers in the paper outlet must only be cleaned
while the transport is switched off. Switch off the machine before starting to clean
it; risk of injuries by bruising.
Purpose:
To ensure correct paper transport.
Special tools
– Lint-free cloth
– Warm water
– Vacuum cleaner
– Brush
1 Rubber transport belts for poster sizes (1), above

the densitometer:
8
Clean the visible part of the transport belts
with a damp cloth.
Fasten the paper outlet cover.
dlab2524 (Fig. shows d-lab.2)

1
dlab2524 (Fig. shows d-lab.2plus/netlab.2plus)
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-55

Paper transport on the output side for standard

1 sizes:
Remove the tray for large formats.
Clean the visible part of the transport belts
with a damp cloth (1).
dlab2526
Unlock the quick-action locks on the guide

1
2 plate (1) in front of the output rubber rollers.
Remove the guide plate.
Clean the dust in the output area with a
vacuum cleaner.
Clean the four light barriers in front of the
output rubber rollers with a soft brush.
Put back the guide plate and fasten it safely
with the quick-action locks.
dlab2525
Transport belt of the lane shifter:

Clean the transport belt (1) with a damp
cloth.
Insert the tray for large formats.
1 Screw on the paper outlet (PO) cover.
dlab2527
8-56 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.6 Maintenance Routines Every 6 Months

Special tools
– Compressed air spray
Remove the housing of the cartridge feeder.

Clean the mechanical parts and light barriers
with the compressed air spray.
Note
Make sure that dust and lint are not blown into
the film carrier area.
8
8.7 Maintenance When Required
Special tools
– Compressed air
Remove the mirror box towards the front.

Pull out the film carrier.
Push the prescanner to the right by hand.
Clean the lens cover glass with compressed
air.
Put back the film carrier and the mirror box.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-57

8.7.2 Back Printer: Replacing the Ink Ribbon

When the printing on the back of the prints gets too faded, the ink ribbon must be
replaced.
Special tools
– Ink ribbon cartridge; order number CM+9.8060.LDZF.1
Applies to d-lab.2
Unscrew the locking screw (1, red) of the
1 lane distributor (LD).
Pull out the lane distributor on the
telescopic rails.
Unscrew the knurled screws (2) and remove
the top cover of the back printer.
Remove the ink ribbon cartridge: remove it
by slightly pressing on both sides (3).
Prepare the new ink ribbon cartridge:
if present remove the foil strip on the ink
ribbon, remove the red protection. The ink
ribbon must be tight in the cartridge; if
necessary tighten by the knob (4) (observe
2 the direction indicated by the arrow).
Insert the ink ribbon cartridge.
Turn the knob (4) of the cartridge until you
hear the cartridge engage.
Push in the lane distributor (LD) and tighten
the locking screw.
4
3
dlab2074
8-58 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Applies only to d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus

2
Open the locking lever (1, red) of the sheet
distributor (SD).
Pull out the sheet distributor on the
telescopic rails.
Unscrew the knurled screws (2) and remove
the top cover of the back printer.
Remove the ink ribbon cartridge: remove it
by slightly pressing on both sides (3).
1 Prepare the new ink ribbon cartridge:
if present remove the foil strip on the ink
ribbon, remove the red protection. The ink
ribbon must be tight in the cartridge; if
necessary tighten by the knob (4) (observe
the direction indicated by the arrow).
Insert the ink ribbon cartridge.
Turn the knob (4) of the cartridge until you
hear the cartridge engage. 8
Push in the sheet distributor (SD) and close
the locking lever.
3 4
G_SD112
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-59

8.7.3 Emptying the Effluent Tanks

As soon as one of the effluent tanks is full, a message in the status bar on the screen
indicates that these tanks must be emptied.
Production can continue until an error message is displayed on the screen. In this case
printing is automatically interrupted. After the tanks have been emptied printing is
automatically resumed.
Special tools
– Hose
– Container with lid
(the volume of the tanks is 10 liters each; i.e. 20 l volume are needed for both)
CAUTION!
Information in Chapter 3).
Note
The effluent tanks combine the overflow of all processing tanks. Therefore there is no
need to drain the chemicals separately into the disposal tanks.
Empty a full tank:

Open the bottom left front door of the Paper
Processor.
Place the container under the tap (1); if it is
not possible to place the container under the
tap, attach a hose to the tap (1) and insert it
in the container.
1
Open the tap and empty the tank.
CAUTION!
Do not open the drain cocks, which are in
2 vertical position on the right side. They
are used to empty the processing tanks
CD, BX and SB1 to SB4, e.g. when a
completely new tank solution must be
dlab2601 filled into a single tank or all tanks.
8-60 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Close the tap.

Do the same with the adjacent second tap.
Keep the container safely until disposal.
Check the pan (2), drain it if necessary: if it is
full although the tanks have always been
emptied in time, a service technician must
be called. The hoses may be defect.
Close the door.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 8-61

8.8 Spare Parts and Accessories

Air filter Order no.
Lamphouse (only for d-lab.2/2plus) CM+9.8061.LHL5.0
CCD (only for d-lab.2/2plus) CM+9.8061.FEL4.0
Cutter area CM+9.7075.2731.0
Printer side door CM+9.8060.MUL8.1
Paper outlet (PO) CL+P4-4071(3/1)
Dryer CL+P4-E9249
AC supply CL+P4-E9249
Chemical filter + control strip Order no.

Chemical filters CD, BX, SB1, SB2, SB3, SB4 CL+P4-E0364
Chemical control strips 5HWGX
Others Order no.

Back printer ink ribbon CM+9.8060.LDZF.1
Scanner lamp (only for d-lab.2/2plus) CM+7.0450.6545.0
Film brush (only for d-lab.2/2plus) CM+8.8506.CF27.0
Cleaning substances:
Order number Designation Use
CM+9.9999.9231.0 Lixtop plastic cleaner Cleaning panels and covers
CM+9.9999.9274.0 Compressed air spray Dust removal
CG+078047-0003 Optic Pads (only for d-lab.2/2plus) Cleaning optical parts
CP+G-003T AgfaPhoto Cleaner Prevents static charges
CM+9.8506.1330.1 Cleaning strips (3 pcs.) Cleaning the APS film carrier
CM+9.8506.1320.1 Cleaning strips (3 pcs.) + Isopropanol Cleaning the APS film carrier
bottle (empty)
CM+9.8506.1340.1 Cleaning strips (only for d-lab.2/2plus) Cleaning the drive rollers in the film carrier
area
8-62 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Technical Data
9 Technical Data
9.1 Machine versions ..........................................................................................................................................................9-1

9.2 Complete System..........................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.3 Main Computer ..............................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.5 Printer ................................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.6 Paper Processor .............................................................................................................................................................9-8
9.7 Heat Emission.................................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.8 Operating Conditions................................................................................................................................................9-10
9.9 Storage and Transport ..............................................................................................................................................9-10
9.10 Consumables and Operating Materials..............................................................................................................9-10
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 9-i

Technical Data d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
9-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

9.1 Machine versions

d-lab.2 Type 8060/260
d-lab.2 (70mm) Type 8060/157 + 8060/255
d-lab.2plus (70mm) Type 8060/158 + 8060/255
This is general information. For modifications and order numbers please refer to the sales
organizations.
9
9.2 Complete System

Dimensions Applies to d-lab.2
Length: 2,840 mm (including sorter)
+ 350 mm for optional work table
Width: Applies to d-lab.2 with gas laser (Printer type 8060/260)
1,010 with film collecting box and laser exhaust
Applies to d-lab.2 with solid state laser

(Type 8060/803, 8060/804, 8060/270, 8060/272 and
8060/157+8060/255)
920 mm with film collecting box
Height: 1,530 mm
Weight empty: approx. 910 kg
Weight filled: approx. 1, 055 kg
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 9-1

Dimensions Applies to d-lab.2plus

Width: Applies to d-lab.2plus with gas laser
(type 8060/261)
1,010 mm with film collecting box and air exhaust laser
Applies to d-lab.2plus with solid state laser

(type 8060/813, 8060/814, 8060/271, 8060/273 and
8060/158+8060/255)
920 mm (with film collecting box)
Height: 1,530 mm
Weight filled: approx. 1,067 kg
Width: 770 mm without table top
870 mm with mounted table top)
at the sorter 1060mm)
Height: 1,530 mm
Weight filled: approx. 1,000 kg
General Applies to d-lab.2/2plus
Digital minilab to print negative films, slides, reversal films and images from
digital sources (storage medium or network) and to save digital data on digital
storage media or in a connected network
Prescan with AgfaPhoto TFS Total Film Scanning
Mainscan with high resolution CCD chip (2,000 x 3,000 pixels)
Printer with digital print system (laser)
Scanner and Printer integrated in one housing
Paper Processor with AgfaPhoto-specific laser paper chemicals
Digital minilab to print images from digital sources (storage medium or network)
and to save digital data on digital storage media or in a connected network
Printer with digital print system (laser)
Paper Processor with AgfaPhoto-specific laser paper chemicals
9-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Print sizes Applies to d-lab.2

Minimum: 82 mm x 117 mm (3.25" x 4.6") on 82 mm / 3.25" paper width
Maximum: 305 mm x 457 mm (12" x 18") on 305 mm / 12" paper width
Minimum: 82 mm x 89 mm (3.25" x 3.5") on 82 mm / 3.25" paper width
Maximum: 305 mm x 457 mm (12" x 18") on 305 mm / 12" paper width
Electrical requirements Connection specifications:
3W+N+PE 220/380V, 230/400V, 240/415V 50/60 Hz 3 x 16 A
3W+PE 200V, 210V, 220V, 230V, 240V 50/60 Hz 3 x 25 A
2W+PE 200V, 210V, 220V, 230V, 240V 50/60 Hz 1 x 32 A
1W+N+PE 200V, 210V, 220V, 230V, 240V 50/60 Hz 1 x 32 A
Film and negative / slide formats Applies only to d-lab.2/2plus
Film size Negative / slide formats
110 negatives Format 110 (color)
135 negatives Full frame, half frame, panorama (color and B/W)
135 slides mounted 5x5 cm and reversal film strips, color and black-
and -white
IX240 negatives Classic, HighVision, Panorama (color and B/W)
9
120/220 negatives 6x4.5 cm, 6x6 cm, 6x7 cm, 6x8 cm, 6x9 cm
120/220 slides reversal film strips, color and black-and-white
Noise level 65 dB(A) standby
68 dB(A) printing
Main control Integrated main computer for the main control of the Minilab
Operating system Windows 2000, at least SP4
Touchscreen monitor (LCD or CRT) as user interface
Optional accessories Additional table for a larger working area
External label printer for price labels
Film carriers for different negative sizes and slides (only d-lab.2/2plus)
LCD touch-screen monitor
Options for further image processing functions
Space requirements for operation Right 600 mm
and service Left 1,100 mm
Front 900 mm
Minimum distance to the wall:
for operation 150 mm
for service 600 mm
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 9-3

Production capacity Film format 135-24
Print format (mm) 89 x 127 102 x 152 127 x 178 203 x 305 305 x 457
Print format (inch) 3.5 x 5 4x6 5x7 8 x 12 12 x 18
Applies to d-lab.2
Prints/h (actual) 1250 1200 1000 450
Orders (incl. index print) 50 48 40 18
Prints/h (actual) 1.800 1.700 1.000 500 240
Orders (incl. index print) 72 68 40 20 10
Film format IX240-25

Paper width (mm) 89 102
Paper width (inch) 3.5 4
Applies to d-lab.2
Orders (incl. index print) 32 30
Orders (incl. index print) 40 35
Digital images, file print from CD-ROM

Print format (mm) 89 x 127 102 x 152 114 x 152 127 x 178 203 x 305
Print format (inch) 3.5 x 5 4x6 4.5 x 6 5x7 8 x 12
Applies to d-lab.2
Prints/h (actual) 1200 1100 – 900 450
Applies to d-
lab.2plus/netlab.2plus 1800 1700 1500 1000 500
Prints/h (actual)
9-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Interfaces 1 GB Ethernet connection for data exchange and connection of an external

workstation or a lab network
Modem
Label printer for price labels
Ambient conditions Ambient conditions for storage / transport:
Temperature -50 °C to +60 °C
Relative humidity 15% to 90%
Ambient conditions for operation:
Room temperature +15 °C to +30 °C
Maximum ambient light:
Printer / Paper Processor 10,000 Lux
Paper magazines 20,000 Lux
Chemical waste 250–375 ml waste per square meter of developed paper (1 m2 roughly
corresponds to 65 prints of size 10x15 (4x6”))
The exact value depends on the set replenishment rate.
9.3 Main Computer

Operating system Windows 2000 OEM English, at least SP4 9
Mainboard Applies to d-lab.2
CPU GA-8GE800 PRO
Intel Pentium IV>2.5GHz
512 MB RAM
Motherboard Applies to d-lab.2plus and netlab.2plus
Dual Processor Motherboard
2x Intel Xeon 2.8 GHz
512 MB RAM
Image Processing Board To generate the digital images
Hard disk capacity ≥ 40 GByte
Graphics board Applies to d-lab.2
Onboard 82845G graphic controller
Resolution: 1,024x768 pixels
Image recurrence frequency: >75Hz
Drives Applies to d-lab.2
Integrated drives for floppy disk, ZIP, CD-ROM/DVD, and memory cards (PCMCIA,
Compact Flash, MicroDrive, SmartMedia, Memory Stick, SD/MMC memory card)
Integrated FDD
External drive bay with CD-ROM, Zip, 5-fold PCMCIA drive (PCMCIA, Compact
Flash, , MicroDrive, Smart Media, Sony Memory Stick, SD-memory board)
connected to the main computer.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 9-5

Network connection 1 Applies to d-lab.2

1000 Mbit/s for external network connection
1000 Mbit/s onboard for external network connection
Network Board 2 100 Mbit/s onboard for internal communication
Timer Board To control the switch-on and switch-off procedures

Resolution Prescanner: approx. 500 pixels per color

for negative size 135 Main scanner: approx. 6,000,000 pixels per color
Filter Optimized filter set for negative films
Optimized filter set for slides (optional)
Sensor type Monochrome CCD sensor 2k x 3k pixels
9-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

9.5 Printer
Laser recorder Exposure by a laser recorder
Paper transport speed 67 mm/s
Scanning width 305 mm / 12 inches
Resolution 400 dpi
Laser wavelength
gas laser d-lab2: Type 8060/260
d-lab.2plus: Type 8060/261:
Blue 458 nm
Green 514 nm
Red 685 nm
Laser wavelength
solid state laser d-lab2: type 8060/803, 8060/804, 8060/270,
8060/272 and 8060/157+8060/255
d-lab.2plus: type 8060/813, 8060/814, 8060/271,
8060/273 and 8060/158+8060/255
netlab.2plus: type 8060/505: :
Blue 473 nm
Green 532 nm 9
Red 685 nm
Paper magazines 2 Paper magazines
Applies to d-lab.2
RH side: up to 305 mm / 12 inch paper width
LH side: up to 210 mm / 8.25 inch paper width

RH and LH side: up to 305 mm / 12 inch paper width
Maximum paper length when using AgfaPhoto Splendix Paper:

at a paper width up to 8.25 inch: 183 m
for paper widths above 8.25 inches: 91.5 m
Maximum paper length when using AgfaPhoto Sensatis Paper:

at a paper width up to 8.25 inch: 158 m
for paper widths above 8.25 inches: 79.0 m
Paper transport Single sheet transport on one track, paper cut prior to the exposure
Sheet centering
Lane distributor to distribute the exposed paper on several tracks in the Paper
Processor
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 9-7

9.6 Paper Processor

Space requirement Length: 1,160 mm (incl. sorter 1,560 mm)
Width: 880 mm
Height: 1,450 mm (opened 1,860 mm)
Floor space for operation / Right: 600 mm
service Distance to the wall: 150 mm (operation) / 600 mm (service)
Processor type Paper Processor for transport on several tracks (depending on the format)
Automatic replenishment system
Docking System for automatic replenisher tank filling
Astor system for reduction of chemical waste and water consumption
Automatic rinsing of the crossovers to avoid crystalline deposits
1 CD, 1 BX and 4 SB tanks
Integrated print sorter
6“ Sorter:
Print formats up to 152 mm (6 inch) length are stacked in the sorter, bigger
formats are not sorted and placed on the tray for large print formats.
10“ Sorter:
Print formats up to 254 mm (10 inch) length are stacked in the sorter, bigger
formats are not sorted and placed on the tray for large print formats.
Integrated Densitometer
Process specifications
Solution CD BX SB
Temperature 40 °C ± 0.3 38 °C ± 3 37 °C ± 3
Process time (in seconds) 33 33 total 69
Replenishment rates
(ml / m2)
(recommended values when
using the AgfaPhoto Easy
Paper Box 110 chemicals) Chemicals Water Chemicals Water Chemicals Water
Standard 41 10 68 0 41 159
increased Factor 1.4 14 Factor 1.4 0 Factor 1.4 223
maximum Factor 1.6 16 Factor 1.6 0 Factor 1.6 254
Tank – Automatic preparation of replenisher solutions
– Automatic mixing
– Automatic water replenishment
Tank capacity in liters CD BX SB

Processing tank 18.4 18.4 4 x 11.2
Replenisher tank 4.5 7.5 4.5
Effluent tank 10 10 7 (for Astor system)
9-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Transport system – Two-lane transport by means of rollers

– Single sheet:
minimum length 117 mm (Applies to d-lab.2)
89 mm (Applies to d-lab.2plus and netlab.2plus)
maximum width 305 mm
– Sheet distribution:
2 lanes up to 203 mm (8 inch) paper width (up to 10x15 on alternating lanes)
1 lane up to 305 mm (12 inch) paper width
Paper transport speed approx. 34 mm/s
Dryer Warm air drying
9.7 Heat Emission

Input voltage (V) 200 210 220 230 240
Laser (machine with gas laser) 1) (kcal/h) 860 860 860 860 860
no value for machine with solid state

laser1)
Solution heater
Developer solution (CD)
(kcal/h) 251 277 304 332 362 9
Solution heater
(kcal/h) 251 277 304 332 362
Bleachfix solution (BX)
Solution heater
(kcal/h) 597 658 723 790 860
Stabilizer solution (SB1-4)
Dryer heater (kcal/h) 2,867 3,161 2,911 3,181 3,464
Total for machine with gas laser 1) (kcal/h) 4,826 5,233 5,101 5,495 5,907
Total for machine with solid state (kcal/h) 3,966 4,373 4,241 4,635 5,047
laser 2)
1) Machines with gas laser: d-lab.2: type 8060/260

d-lab.2plus: type 8060/261
2) Machines with solid state laser: d-lab.2: type 8060/803, 8060/804, 8060/270, 8060/272 and
8060/157+8060/255
d-lab.2plus: type 8060/813, 8060/814, 8060/271, 8060/273 and
8060/158+8060/255
netlab.2plus: type 8060/505
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 9-9

9.8 Operating Conditions

Room temperature +15 °C to +30 °C
Noise level < 70 dB(A)
Maximum ambient light:
– Printer + Paper Processor 10,000 Lux
– Paper magazines 20,000 Lux
Air output of the laser fan
(Applies only to Machines with gas laser)
d-lab2: type 8060/260
d-lab.2plus: type 8060/261) 220 m³/h
CAUTION!
This machine is a Class A equipment according to EN 55022. This equipment may
cause radio interference in residential areas.
In this case the user may be required to initiate respective measures and pay for
those.
9.9 Storage and Transport

Temperature range -50 °C to +60 °C
9.10 Consumables and Operating Materials

The chemicals and papers recommended and supplied by AgfaPhoto are adapted to
provide the best possible results. To guarantee correct operation of the Minilab as well as
the best possible print results, we recommend to use only the chemicals and papers listed
below.
Chemicals Order no.

d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box 110 (2 boxes) 5KPGL
MSC 200/300/d-lab.2/d-lab.3 tank kit 5FFYK
MSC/d-lab tank CD for 2x 18.5 liters: 5HX5G
contains concentrate for two CD tank fillings
MSC/d-lab tank BX for 2x 18 liters: 5HX7L
contains concentrate for two BX tank fillings
MSC/d-lab tank SB for 12x 11-12.5 liters: 5HX8N
contains concentrate for three SB tank fillings
9-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Agfacolor Splendix Paper

310 glossy
Width x Length Width x Length Order Barcode Rolls per Packing units
[cm] [cm] [inch] [inch] number (EAN) packing unit * per pallet
8.9 x 183 3.5 x 600 5K5XD 4006353 427569 4 24
10.2 x 183 4 x 600 5K5YF 4006353 427576 4 24
12.7 x 183 5 x 600 5K5ZH 4006353 427583 2 36
15.2 x 183 6 x 600 5K51K 4006353 427590 2 30
17.8 x 91.5 7 x 300 5K52M 4006353 427606 4 24
20.3 x 91.5 8 x 300 5K53O 4006353 427613 4 18
25.4 x 91.5 10 x 300 5K54Q 4006353 427620 4 18
27.9 x 91.5 11 x 300 5K55S 4006353 427637 2 24
30.5 x 91.5 12 x 300 5K57W 4006353 427651 2 24
* minimum order amount: one packing unit
Agfacolor Splendix Paper

319 lustre 9
8.9 x 183 3,5 x 600 5K6Q2 4006353 427835 4 24
10.2 x 183 4 x 600 5K6R4 4006353 427842 4 24
12.7 x 183 5 x 600 5K6S6 4006353 427859 2 36
15.2 x 183 6 x 600 5K6T8 4006353 427866 2 30
17.8 x 91.5 7 x 300 5K6UB 4006353 427873 4 24
20.3 x 91.5 8 x 300 5K6VD 4006353 427880 4 18
25.4 x 91.5 10 x 300 5K6WF 4006353 427897 4 18
27.9 x 91.5 11 x 300 5K6XH 4006353 427903 2 24
30.5 x 91.5 12 x 300 5K6YK 4006353 427910 2 24
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 9-11

Agfacolor Sensatis Paper

510 glossy
8.9 x 158 3,5 x 518 5K4NN 4006353 427125 4 24
10.2 x 158 4 x 518 5K4OP 4006353 427132 4 24
11.4 x 158 4,5 x 518 5K4PR 4006353 427149 2 30
12.7 x 158 5 x 518 5K4QT 4006353 427156 2 36
15.2 x 158 6 x 518 5K4RV 4006353 427163 2 30
17.8 x 79 7 x 259 5K4SX 4006353 427170
20.3 x 79 8 x 259 5K4TZ 4006353 427187 4 18
25.4 x 79 10 x 259 5K4U2 4006353 427194
30.5 x 79 12 x 259 5K4V4 4006353 427200 2 24
Agfacolor Sensatis Paper

519 lustre
8.9 x 158 3,5 x 518 5K5EA 4006353 427385 4 24
10.2 x 158 4 x 518 5K5FC 4006353 427392 4 24
12.7 x 158 5 x 518 5K5GE 4006353 427408 2 36
15.2 x 158 6 x 518 5K5HG 4006353 427415 2 30
17.8 x 79 7 x 259 5K5JJ 4006353 427422
20.3 x 79 8 x 259 5K5KL 4006353 427439 4 18
25.4 x 79 10 x 259 5K5LN 4006353 427446
30.5 x 79 12 x 259 5K5MP 4006353 427453 2 24
9-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Environmental Protection and Disposal
10 Environmental Protection and Disposal
10.1 Handling of Chemicals.............................................................................................................................................10-1

10.1.1 Legal Regulations...................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.2 Disposal......................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.2.1 Exhausted Processing Solutions ...........................................................................................10-1
10.1.2.2 Liquid Residues ...........................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2.3 Chemical Containers.................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2.4 Chemical Filters..........................................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Energy Saving Hints ..................................................................................................................................................10-2
10
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 10-i

Environmental Protection and Disposal d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
10-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Environmental Protection and Disposal
10.1 Handling of Chemicals

10.1.1 Legal Regulations
The machine is subject to the legal regulations for water:
− Chemicals must not be drained into the public sewage system.
− Check whether residual substances can be avoided, reduced or recycled.
− All photographic solutions, chemical filter cartridges, as well as plastic containers with
harmful residues are considered hazardous waste and must be disposed of in
compliance with legal regulations.
− Keep exhausted chemicals in suitable containers until their final disposal.
– When storing exhausted processing solutions, ensure that no waters are polluted, e.g.
by unintentional leakage.
Note
The regulations for handling and correct disposal of chemicals vary from country to
country. Information about the regulations in force can be obtained from:
– the country’s authorities in charge;

– the nearest AgfaPhoto subsidiary.
10.1.2 Disposal
10
Note
Observe the disposal instructions on the chemical packages!
10.1.2.1 Exhausted Processing Solutions

The used processing solutions are usually only slightly water polluting (Water Polluting
Class 1).
For this reason, these solutions can be stored in commercial containers for processing
chemicals until their final disposal.
For larger tanks, a conformity certificate is usually required.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 10-1

Environmental Protection and Disposal d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
10.1.2.2 Liquid Residues

All solutions that cannot be reused or that do not contain recyclable substances are to be
disposed of as special waste.
The same applies to water that was used for cleaning the tanks and replenisher
containers.
However, solutions containing silver are liquid residual substances that can be used for
silver recovery. For this reason, they should be collected separately from the other
solutions.
Solutions containing silver should be disposed of by companies recycling silver. These

companies usually are also authorized to dispose of processing solutions not containing
any silver.
10.1.2.3 Chemical Containers

Provide for their recycling.
10.1.2.4 Chemical Filters

Used chemical filter cartridges are to be handled as special waste.
10.2 Energy Saving Hints

The Minilab can be switched on and off either manually or via the integrated time
(see Chapter 4). The timer can be set up in such a way that the Minilab will not switch
on automatically on free days. If on a workday the Minilab is not used for production or no
longer needed for production, it can be switched to Sleep mode. In this mode the main
computer can still be used for statistic checks.
10-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Machine Shutdown
11 Machine Shutdown
11.1 Machine Shutdown (Down Time up to 2 Weeks)...........................................................................................11-1

11.2 Machine Shutdown (Down Time longer than 2 Weeks)..............................................................................11-2
11.3 Resuming Operation .................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.4 Final Machine Shutdown.........................................................................................................................................11-4
11.5 Deinstalling the Machine .......................................................................................................................................11-4
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 11-i

Machine Shutdown d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
11-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

11.1 Machine Shutdown (Down Time up to 2 Weeks)

If the machine is taken out of operation for up to 2 weeks, it is not necessary to drain the
chemicals. However, the following measures must be carried out:
Shut down the machine.

Switch off the machine with the main
breaker.
Empty the effluent tanks.
Empty the replenisher tanks.
Cover the machine with a dust protection
cover.
Measures and information for the disposal of chemicals of replenisher tanks and/or
solutions of effluent tanks: see Chapter 10, Environmental Protection and Disposal.
11
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 11-1

11.2 Machine Shutdown (Down Time longer than 2 Weeks)

If the machine is shut down for more than 2 weeks the following measures must be
carried out:

breaker.
Drain and dispose of the chemicals.
Remove the Easy Paper Box and dispose of
it.
Empty the effluent tanks and clean them.
We recommend to fill the machine tanks
with water and not to leave them dry. To
avoid the growth of algae add Algezit to the
water according to the description.
After filling the machine with water run it for
a few minutes. This avoids sticking of the
transport rollers.
Shut down the machine again and switch off
the main breaker.
cover.
Mark the machine as “out of order”.
For measures and instructions regarding the disposal of chemicals and waste water see
Chapter 10, Environmental Protection and Disposal.
CAUTION!
Observe the safety instructions for the handling of chemicals (see Chapter 1
and Chapter 3).
11-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

11.3 Resuming Operation

After the machine was shut down and out of operation for up to 2 weeks, the machine
must be put back in operation with the following routines:
Remove the dust cover.

If necessary fill water in the chemical tanks
to compensate for evaporated water and
wait for the machine to reach operating
temperature.
Turn the main breaker on.
Mix replenisher chemicals.
Check the chemicals, i.e. develop a chemical
control strip (see Checking the Chemical
Process in Chapter 5).
Adjust the replenishment rates (see Paper
Processor Settings in Chapter 4).
Proceed with the required maintenance
routines (see Chapter 8 Maintenance).
After the machine was shut down and out of operation for more than 2 weeks, the
machine must be put back in operation with the following routines:
Remove the dust cover.

Proceed with the required maintenance 11
routines (see Chapter 8 Maintenance).
Mix the chemicals according to the
instructions in the Operation Manual.
Put the machine back in operation according
to the instructions in the Installation section
of the Operation Manual.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 11-3

11.4 Final Machine Shutdown

If the machine is shut down for good, the following measures are required:

breaker.
Drain and dispose of the chemicals.
Remove the Easy Paper Box and dispose of
it.
Empty the effluent tanks and clean them.
Drain the main water tank.
Disconnect all connections (power, network
if present, water if present).
cover.
Mark the machine as “out of order”.
Measures and instructions for the disposal of waste water and chemicals: see
Chapter 10, Environmental Protection and Disposal.
CAUTION!
Observe the safety instructions for the handling of chemicals (see Chapter 1
and Chapter 3).
11.5 Deinstalling the Machine

The machine must only be taken apart by an AgfaPhoto Service Technician or by an
AgfaPhoto authorized person.
11-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Abbreviations and Glossary
12 List of Abbreviations and Glossary

All the abbreviations and special terms use in the instructions are listed below.
? Help button: context-related help function for all screens and error messages
ACT Area Contrast: parameter in the production balance and the correction configurations
APS Film format, Advanced Photo System (IX240 film)
Artificial light detection Parameter for the detection and correction impact of tungsten light and other artificial
(only d-lab.2/2plus) light exposures (see TL and CTL or FL and CFL)
ASTOR AgfaPhoto Stabilizer Overflow Reduction
Auto-MBL If the Auto-MBL function is activated, an automatic MBL (Master Balance test) will be
executed always after the machine switched on.
Autosave Image files of an order will be copied and saved on a selected storage medium.
B/W Black / White
BOL Begin Of Line: light barrier (sensor) in the print machine
BOP Begin Of Paper: light barrier (sensor) in the print machine
BP Back Print (also called RSD, German: Rückseitendruck)
Buttons Touch-sensitive fields on the touch-screen
BX Bleachfix
C Classic (see there)
Cartridge Feeder Device attached to the film feeder for the IX240 film cartridges
CD Color Developer
CFL Correction Fluorescent Light: TFS parameter to define the correction impact for exposures
(only d-lab.2/2plus) in fluorescent light
12
Classic Special print size for APS films (IX240 film format); aspect ratio 3:2.
Color steps The laser can print 1,024 shades per color on paper. Steps per pixel = RxGxB =
1024x1024x1024 = 1,073,741,824.
The paper cannot reproduce that many colors and the human eye cannot differentiate the
subtle differences.
Combi-print Multiple printing of an image of different sizes or the same size on one sheet of paper
(passport/ID photo)
Combi-print layout The combi-print layouts can be used for multiple printing of an image of different sizes or
the same size (passport/ID photo) on one sheet of paper.
Crossover Tank crossovers
CTL Correction Tungsten Light: TFS parameter to define the correction impact for exposures in
(only d-lab.2/2plus) tungsten light
DCT Detail Contrast: parameter in the production balance and the correction configurations
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 12-1

Abbreviations and Glossary d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
Density gradations 1,024 steps

min. density 0.1
max. density 2.1
Differences are easier to discern for the human eye at low densities than at high
densities.
DEV Developer
DL1 TFS parameter to define the impact of the density correction for flash exposures (light
(only d-lab.2/2plus) object in front of dark background)
DL2 TFS parameter to define the impact of the density correction for high-contrast negatives
(only d-lab.2/2plus) (backlight, beach, etc.)
DL3 TFS parameter to define the impact of the density correction for low-contrast negatives
(only d-lab.2/2plus) (mist, gray water areas, etc.)
DL4 TFS parameter to define the impact of the density correction for negatives with white
(only d-lab.2/2plus) subjects in front of green background (e.g. weddings, first communion)
DL5 TFS parameter to define the impact of the density correction for negatives with major
(only d-lab.2/2plus) dominant blue motifs
Dominant color Four parameters to influence the threshold values for detection of dominant colors
parameter (images with color areas quite different from the average), to obtain a print without color
(only d-lab.2/2plus) cast.
dpi dots per inch: resolution of digital images
dTFS digital Total Film Scanning: additional image analysis and correction for digital print data
DX Code on film cartridges indicating film speed and length
FF Full Format
FID Film identification number (IX240 film)
Film feeder The film feeder transports the film into the negative carrier
FL Fluorescent Light: TFS parameter to define the threshold for the detection of fluorescent
(only d-lab.2/2plus) light
FU Feeder Unit: transport unit
Applies to d-lab.2plus/
netlab.2plus
Graded densities Test print, printed in the PBL (Paper balance test); adjusts the laser to a medium control
range
H High Vision (see there)
Halo print Test print created in a PBL (Paper balance test). The test is evaluated in the integrated
densitometer.
HF Half Format
High Vision Special print size for APS films (IX240 film format); aspect ratio 16:9
i Information button: status information
12-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Index print Printing of the image thumbnails on one sheet of paper

Index print layout Index print layouts are used for the printing of index prints
K Shift correction: TFS parameter to define the impact of the color correction in unbalanced
(only d-lab.2/2plus) negatives
Lab-ID Machine-specific identification number within a laboratory
Laser working point Required for the calibration; to determine the exposure limits of the respective paper
width
L-contr. LCT Luminance contrast; parameter in correction configurations for slides; influences the
(only d-lab.2/2plus) contrast of slide prints without changing the color saturation
LD Lane Distributor: old term for the sheet distributor SD
(Applies to d-lab.2)
L-density LDT Luminance density; parameter in correction configurations for slides; influences the
(only d-lab.2/2plus) brightness of slide prints without changing the color saturation
LS Light Sensor or Lane Shifter
Mainscan Main scan to print negatives and slides (also see prescan).
Master paper The most commonly used paper
MBL test Master Balance test: the MBL test compensates for slight fluctuations of the chemical
solutions.
ML Magazine Left: paper magazine, left hand side
MR Magazine Right: paper magazine, right hand side
MwSt Mehrwertsteuer = German for Value Added Tax (sales tax)
P Panorama (see there)
Package Order configuration for automatic printing of several print sizes per negative, slide, or
image file
Panorama Special print size for APS films (IX240 film format); aspect ratio 1:3
Paper configuration Setup of paper width and surface.
12
PBL test Paper Balance test: The PBL test compensates for the differences among the various
paper types and widths, and provides for uniform rendering of the colors on all paper
emulsions in use.
PDM PFDF Data Manager (e.g. d-workflow) manages the order files. Saving of digital orders
(images and PFDF information) until they are called by a receiving station.
PE Print Engine: exposure unit
PFDF Photo Finishing Data Format: standardized format for order data to be used in networks.
PIKO Pixel correction (German: Pixelkorrektur): Balancing of the individual pixels of the CCD
(only d-lab.2/2plus) chip so that the black value (dark current) and the white value (sensitivity) are identical /
reproducible for the subsequent signal processing.
Pixel Pixel, image point
PM Print Machine
netlab.2plus
PO Paper Outlet
Popup window Opened in the active screen if a confirmation or an action by the operator is required.
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 12-3

PP Paper Processor
PpF Prints per frame
Prescan To determine the exposure data for each negative or slide (also refer to mainscan)
Pulldown menu Menu, which allows further selection
Reorder Reorder
Reproduction Order configuration for image files to switch off the image improvement function and size
calculation (e.g. for images, which have been created or manipulated by image processing
programs)
RGB Red, Green, Blue
SAT Saturation: parameter in the production balance and the correction configurations
SB Sheet Bridge
SB1 ... SB4 Stabilizer tanks 1 ... 4
Scanning crop Defines the part of the scanned slide to be printed (standard: 98%).
Selector 1/ SL 1 TFS selector parameter for underexposed negatives.
Selector 2/ SL 2 TFS selector parameter for overexposed negatives
Selector 3/ SL 3 TFS selector parameter for fogged or partly fogged negatives (e.g. light leaks at the
(only d-lab.2/2plus) leading film edge)
Selector 4/ SL 4 TFS selector parameter for stickers on the film (twin check labels)
SG Sheet Gear
SG Switching Gear
netlab.2plus
SD Sheet Distributor
netlab.2plus
SHP Sharpness: sharpness – edges and sharpness – grain are parameters in productions
balance, sharpness – edges also exists in correction configurations
Single Single order configuration
Sleep mode Special operating status: only the main computer works, Printer and Paper Processor are
switched off.
Slide cropping Defines the part of the scanned slide to be printed (standard: 98%)
SR Single Sheet Buffer
SR Sheet Stocker
netlab.2plus
ST Sheet Transfer
STB/SB Stabilizer solution
TFS Total Film Scanning: AgfaPhoto total film scanning to compensate for different film types
(only d-lab.2/2plus) (single channel printing), and to analyze image information to produce a more uniform
production and to specifically influence individual groups of motifs.
12-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Timer Integrated timer: controls the automatic switching on for work, and the so-called Sleep
mode, in which all components of the d-lab are shut down with the exception of the main
computer (e.g. for statistics checks).
TL Tungsten Light: warm light of light bulbs; TFS parameter to define the threshold for the
(only d-lab.2/2plus) detection of tungsten light
TU Transport Unit
Touchscreen Touch-sensitive monitor
Twin Check Labels Sticker with numbers to mark film and envelope
YMCD Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Density: correction values for color and density corrections
12
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 12-5

12-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Index
13 Index
A Buttons
Accessories (optional 9-3 ? 2-28
Air filter, cleaning or replacing 8-41 Function 2-30
i 2-28
Ambient conditions 9-5
Stop 2-28
Ambient light 9-10
APS (only d-lab.2/2plus) see IX240 C
APS film carrier, cleaning Calendar 4-25
(only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-8
Calibration factors
Area contrast Application 5-19
for the individual image 6-84 Default settings 5-14
Production balance 4-58 Procedure 5-19
Artificial light detection 4-68 Calibration of water pumps 4-38
Auto-MBL, switch on/off 4-31 Calibration plate of the densitometer, cleaning 8-36
Autoprint Cartridge feeder
with preview 6-35 cleaning (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-57
without preview 6-34
Change user 2-24
Autosave 6-99
for slide prints (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-102 Changing chemicals
Network 4-80 Easy Paper Box 3-10
with manual corrections, activate 4-49 Processing tank solutions 3-4
with slide prints (d-workflow) Character set 4-5
(only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-103 Checking the solution levels 8-33
Autosave configurations Chemical containers 10-2
Define 4-100
Delete 4-127 Chemical control strip
13
Edit 4-100 Processing / measuring 5-23
Test, developing 5-23
B Chemical filters
Cleaning 8-34
Back printer, replacing the ink ribbon 8-58
Inserting after chemical changing 3-9
Backprint configurations Removing before chemical changing 3-7
Define 4-88 Replace 8-47
Delete 4-127
Chemical waste 9-5
Edit 4-88
Chemicals
Beep after touching 4-5
Disposal 10-1
Black/white prints 6-21 legal regulations 10-1
Border MSC/d-lab chemicals 3-3
For all print in an order 6-24 Replenisher chemicals 3-3
For individual print in an order 6-25, 6-88 Safety information 3-1
Safety rules 1-11
Brightness correction
Storage / handling 1-22
Production balance 4-60
Temperatures 9-8
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 13-1

Index d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
Cleaning the dryer rack 8-51 Correction configurations

Cleaning the processing racks 8-48 Delete 4-127
Cleaning the tank crossovers 8-29 Cropping 6-83
Clickrate 6-110 Cut lengths
define 4-18
Color
delete 4-20
Black text background 4-105
Select 4-104
Transparent text background 4-105 D
Color / density corrections Date, setting 4-22

for an individual image 6-82 Defining the master paper 4-30
Production balance 4-61 Detail contrast 6-84
Color corrections (normal exposure / production balance 4-59
Under and overexposure) 4-75 Dimensions 9-1
Combiprint Disposal
Define order configuration 4-120 Chemicals 10-1
Definition 4-109 Complete machine 1-12
Combiprint configurations exhausted processing solutions 10-1
Define 4-107 liquid residues 10-2
Delete 4-127 Safety rules 1-12
Edit 4-107 Drive rollers in the film carrier area
Combiprint layout, import 4-106 Cleaning (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-10
Configuration Drives 9-5
Change for an order 6-16 Dryer 9-9
Selecting another configuration for an order 6-18
dTFS
Show configuration 6-12
For file prints 6-57
Configuration types Function description 4-47
for print orders 6-11 Presetting for network orders 4-81
Configurations DX Configurations 4-76
Order configurations 4-109
DX Corrections 4-76
Paper configurations 4-12
Print configurations (overview) 4-84
Save / load 4-129 E
Consumables 1-9 Easy Paper Box 3-10
Consumables and operating materials 9-10 Electrical requirements 9-3
Contrast (detail contrast) 6-84 Emptying the effluent tanks 8-60
Contrast Management (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-61 End of order
Automatic/manual 6-20
Controls 2-15
End of work
Conventions
Finishing work 2-24
Pictographs 1-4
Safety notes 1-5 Energy saving hints 10-2
Text styles 1-4 Environmental protection
Copyright 1-6 Energy saving hints 10-2
Handling of chemicals 10-1
Correction configuration
Define 4-97 Error list
Edit 4-97 Display 2-50
Working with the error list 7-8
13-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Error messages 7-2 H

Evaporation compensation 8-33 Help
Exclusion of liability 1-8 Call up 2-51
Error messages 7-3
Exposure filters, cleaning (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-39
Hotline 1-9
F
I
FastMBL Test
printing 5-21 Image editing
Color / density corrections 6-82
File formats, possible 6-2
Cropping 6-83
File print Text exposure 6-86
Delete digital order 6-64
Image improvement 6-84
Load digital order 6-62
Printing with preview 6-67 Image processing
Printing without preview 6-65 Print modes with preview 6-80
productivity 6-56 Image Processing Board 9-5
Saving digital orders 6-61 Images
Special features 6-55 Print and save 6-100
Film and negative formats (only d-lab.2/2plus) 9-3 Save only, without printing 6-101
Film brush, cleaning (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-11 Saving in files 6-89
Film carrier Impact (production balance) 4-54
Removing dust (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-12 Inappropriate use 1-8
Film carrier (only d-lab.2/2plus) Index prints
Changing 6-32 Notes 6-95
Film chute, cleaning (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-13 Print index print only 6-98
Film drive 2-8 Indexprint configurations
Define 4-94
Film formats, possible (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-2
Delete 4-127
Film status indication APS (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-20 Edit 4-94
Film stop key 7-3 Indexprint layouts, import 4-93
Position, function 2-15 13
Info
Film takeup cleaning (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-12 Error list 2-50
Filter in ASTOR and water inlets, clean 8-35 Film drive (only d-lab.2/2plus) 2-45
First Operation See Installation Instructions Orders 2-48
Overview 2-43
Free days, define 4-25 Paper Processor 2-47
Front print configurations Printer 2-46
Define 4-104 Versions 2-49
Delete 4-127 Information area 2-28
Edit 4-104
Information field 2-27
G Input screen 2-34
Glossary 12-1 Insert (mounted) slides (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-19
Graphics board 9-5 Insert film (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-19
Guaranty regulations 1-7 Insert reversal film (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-19

Insert slides (unmounted) (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-19
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 13-3

Installation See Installation Instructions d-lab.2plus 8-4

Interfaces 9-5 netlab.2plus 8-6
IX240 film (only d-lab.2/2plus) Manual positioning (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-50
Back print (special features) 4-92 Manufacturer information 1-6
Film codes 4-92 Maximum densities
Ignoring the camera codes 4-116 Default settings 5-14
IX240-Film (only d-lab.2/2plus) Defining 5-16
film status indication APS film cartridge 6-20 Procedure 5-17
Restrictions 5-18
K MBL test
Keyboard layout 2-34 Automatic 4-31
Meaning 5-2
Keys
Minilab 2-15 MBL Test
Reorder keyboard (only d-lab.2/2plus) 2-36, 6-42 FastMBL Test 5-21
printing 5-20
L Menus
Main menu bar 2-38
Lane Shifter (LS)
Main menus, short description 2-39
Clean transport belt 8-38
Minilab
Language selection 4-5
Machine versions 9-1
Laser recorder 9-7
Mirror box, changing (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-31
Legal situation 1-6
Mixing replenisher chemicals
Liability 1-7 With the d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box 3-10
Load
Configurations 4-129 N
PBL values 4-129
Network board 9-6
Settings 4-129
Network orders
Load image files from storage media 6-58
Delete 6-106
Printing 6-102
M Settings 4-78
Machine deinstallation 11-4 Start automatically 6-105
Machine settings 4-21 Start operator controlled 6-104
Main breaker 2-20 Noise level 9-3
Main computer 9-5 Numeric keypad 2-35
Main control 9-3

O
Main menus, short description 2-39
ON key
Maintenance Initiating a reset 7-6
Daily 8-8 Position (d-lab.2/2plus) 2-15, 7-6
every 6 months 8-57 Position (netlab.2plus) 7-6
Monthly 8-39 Position(netlab.2plus) 2-15
Safety instructions 8-1
Operating system 9-5
spare parts and accessories 8-62
Weekly 8-12 Operation instructions
When required 8-57 Machine types 1-2
Maintenance schedule Operation Manual
d-lab.2 8-2 Available documentation 1-2
13-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Conventions 1-4 Paper magazine

Explanations 1-2 Coding 6-30
Guideline 1-3 Inserting 6-30
Safety notes 1-5 Loading paper 6-29
Operation routines of the Minilab 2-8 Preparation 6-28
Removal 6-27
Operation start See Installation Instructions
Paper magazines
Options 9-3
Technical data 9-7
Order configuration
Paper outlet (PO), clean 8-53
Define as standard 4-125
Paper Processor settings 4-34
Order configuration types
Combiprint 4-109 Paper setting
Package 4-109 Delete 4-14
Reproduction 4-109 Paper settings
Single 4-109 Cut lengths 4-18
Order configurations Paper width 4-12
Define 4-110 Surface 4-14
Delete 4-127 Paper transport
Edit 4-110 Paper Processor 9-9
Types 4-109 Printer 9-7
Order handling, overview 6-1 Paper width
Order number Delete 4-14
Changing 6-10 Password
Set automatic/manual 4-44 Change 4-9
Order numbers Define for new user 4-7
d-lab.2 Easy Paper Box 3-3 PBL test
MSC/d-lab chemicals 3-3 Calibration factors 5-19
Order tracing 6-10 Defining maximum densities 5-16
Meaning 5-2
Overlapping 4-30
Printing a test 5-9
with laser point 5-11, 5-15
P
PBL Test 13
Package Default Setting Calibration Factors 5-14
Define order configuration 4-118 Default Setting Maximum Densities 5-14
Definition 4-109
PBL values
Panorama identification (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-65 Save / load 4-129
Paper codes (AgfaPhoto standard) 4-17 Photographic paper, storage 1-22
Paper configuration Pictographs 1-4
Define 4-85
PIKO (only d-lab.2/2plus) 5-21
Edit 4-85
Popup windows 2-32
Paper configurations
Delete 4-127 Portraits 6-24
Paper drive 2-8 Pricing
Activate 4-27
Paper jam (Overview)
Settings 4-128
(d-lab.2) 7-13
(d-lab.2plus) 7-28 Print configurations, define 4-84
(netlab.2 plus) 7-28 Print formats
APS films, overview table 4-19
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 13-5

Standard, overview table 4-19 Remove paper jam (d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus)

Print modes dryer/Paper outlet 7-42
Notes on the procedure 6-6 Feeder unit 7-31
Overview 6-2 Feeder unit/print machine 7-35
Feeder unit/sheet distributor 7-38
Print sizes 9-3
Paper Processor 7-41
Printer settings 4-30 Print machine 7-36
Printing Printer 7-30
with/without preview, overview 6-4 Sheet distributor 7-39
Sheet distributor/sheet transfer 7-40
Printing price labels 6-107
Removing the dust from the lens
Prints (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-57
with border 6-24
Reorder (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-40
Process check 5-23 Black/white film 6-23
Process specifications 9-8 Film without extended DX code 6-23
Product description Minilab 2-7 Reorder list 6-40
with preview 6-46
Production balance 4-50
without preview 6-44
Production capacity 9-4
Reorder keyboard 2-36
Pulldown menu 2-31
Replenishment
Throughput dependent 4-35
R
Replenishment rates
Ready for operation 2-22 Default values 9-8
Red eyes correction Settings 4-34
manual 6-91 Reproduction
Red-eye correction 4-61 Define order configuration 4-123
Remove paper dust (d-lab.2) Definition 4-109
Lane distributor (LD) 8-19 Resuming the machine operation 11-3
Print engine (PE) 8-16
Sheet Bridge (SB) 8-15 S
Sheet Transfer (ST) 8-20
Safety information
Single sheet buffer (SR) 8-15
Handling of chemicals 3-1
Transport Unit (TU) 8-14
Safety notes and rules 1-10
Remove paper dust (d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus)
Feeder Unit (FU) 8-21 Saturation
Print Machine (PM) 8-24 for the individual image 6-84
Sheet Bridge (SB) 8-23 Production balance 4-56
Sheet distributor (SD) 8-27 Save
Sheet Stocker (SR) 8-23 Configurations 4-129
Sheet Transfer (ST) 8-28 PBL values 4-129
Remove paper jam (d-lab.2) Settings 4-129
Dryer/paper outlet 7-27 Save slide prints (only d-lab.2/2plus)
Lane Distributor (LD) 7-24 Autosave d-workflow 4-103
Lane distributor (LD)/Sheet transfer (ST) 7-25
Scanner lamp
Paper Processor 7-26
Replace (only d-lab.2/2plus) 8-45
Print engine (PE) 7-21
Reset counter for operating hours (only d-
Printer 7-15 lab.2/2plus) 8-46
Transport unit (TU) 7-16
Transport unit (TU)/lane distributor (LD) 7-23 Scanner settings (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-32
Transport unit (TU)/print engine (PE) 7-20 Scanning crop (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-33
13-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

Scratch correction Statistics 6-108

for negatives 4-32 Status information 2-28
for slides (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-32
Structure 2-1
Screen layout 2-27 d-lab.2 2-1
Sepia prints 6-21 d-lab.2plus 2-3
Service Manual netlab.2plus 2-5
Available documentation 1-2 Surfaces
Guideline 1-3 Define 4-14
Settings Delete 4-16
Overview 4-1 Rename 4-16
Save / load 4-129 Switch off
Settings start times 4-23 Complete system 2-25
Sharpness Switching off
For the individual image 6-84 Manually 2-20
Sharpness - edges Switching on
(Production balance) 4-55 Automatically (Timer) 2-18
Manually 2-20
Sharpness - grain
(Production balance) 4-57 System start 2-22
Shift correction (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-70
T
Shutdown
Automatic 2-24 Taking the machine out of operation
for more than 2 weeks 11-2 Deinstalling the machine 11-4
for up to 2 weeks 11-1 Tank capacity 9-8
Sleep mode 2-25 Technical data
Silver recovery 10-2 Complete system 9-1
Single electrical requirements 9-3
Define order configurations 4-112 heat emission 9-9
Definition 4-109 Main computer 9-5
noise level 9-3
Sleep mode 2-25, 4-23 operating conditions 9-10 13
Slide film printing (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-76 Paper magazines 9-7
Slide formats (only d-lab.2/2plus) 9-3 Paper Processor 9-8
prescanner / scanner 9-6
Slide print (only d-lab.2/2plus) 6-72
Printer 9-7
Slide prints (only d-lab.2/2plus), save 4-102 storage 9-10
Software transport 9-10
Activate 4-27 Temperatures
Install from CD 4-29 Calibrate sensors 4-36
Space requirement Chemical solutions 9-8
operation, service 9-3 Setting 4-36
Spare parts 1-9 Test
Special 6-85 FastMBL Test 5-21
MBL, meaning 5-2
Standard order configuration PIKO (pixel correction 5-21
Define 4-125 Paper Processor 5-23
Standard user, define 4-26 PBL, meaning 5-2
Standards and rules 1-1 Printer 5-2
Start Screen 2-23 Text exposure 6-86
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 13-7

Text styles 1-4 Type numbers 9-1

TFS
Color negative 4-63 U
for file prints (dTFS) 6-57 Use in accordance with instructions 1-8
TFS (only d-lab.2/2plus) 4-65 User
Time, setting 4-22 Administrator 4-6
Timer Board 9-6 Change 4-11
Change settings 4-9
Timer setup 4-23 Define 4-7
Touchscreen monitor 2-16 Define standard user 4-26
Touch-sensitive fields 2-27 Define user rights 4-6
Rights (overview table) 4-10
Transport See Installation Instructions
User interface
Transport system 9-9
Defining the standard 4-5
Troubleshooting
User login 2-22
General procedure 7-8
Image processing 7-10 User manager 4-6
Other Errors 7-12
Paper jam 7-25 W
Paper Processor 7-11 Warnings and information labels on the machine 1-13
Printer 7-12
Warranty 1-7
Procedure for unknown errors 7-8
Scanner (only d-lab.2/2plus) 7-3 Water Polluting Class 1 10-1
Screen remains gray 7-9
13-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation Appendix
14 Appendix
14.1 Conformity Declaration
14
AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 14-i

Appendix d-lab.2, d-lab.2plus, netlab.2plus: Operation
14-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

01 A4d-E PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

01 A4d-E PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

Version Edition Modifications

© 2005 AgfaPhoto GmbH. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

AgfaPhoto is used under license of Agfa-Gevaert AG

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-i

2.4.3 Main Breaker and Ground Fault Interrupter................................................................................. 2-17

0-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

4.3.2 Deleting Paper Widths .........................................................................................................................4-14

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-iii

4.5.16 Setting TFS Density (only for Color Negatives)

0-iv 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

5.2.5 Calibration of a New Paper Configuration in Case of Emulsion Changes

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-v

6.2.1.5 Coding the Paper Magazine ...................................................................................................6-30

0-vi 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

6.7 Saving Images with Autosave ...............................................................................................................................6-99

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-vii

0-viii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

8.5.6 Cleaning the Processing Racks.........................................................................................................8-48

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 0-ix

0-x 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.1 Applied Standards and Rules....................................................................................................................................1-1

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-i

1-ii 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.1 Applied Standards and Rules

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-1

1.2 Explanations for the Operation and Service Manual

Operation Manuals Owner Photo- Technician

Service Manuals Owner Photo- Technician

1-2 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.2.2 Guideline for the User

Installation The machine is delivered by a forwarding company.

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-3

Operation / Service Manual Contents

1.2.3.2 Text styles

1-4 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.2.3.3 Safety notes

Indicates additional information on the respective subject or the possibility of operating

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-5

1.3 Legal Situation

1.3.1 Manufacturer Information

1-6 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.3.3.2 Warranty and Liability

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-7

1.3.3.3 Exclusion of Liability

1.3.4 Appropriate Use

1.3.5 Inappropriate Use

1-8 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.4 Consumables and Spare Parts

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-9

1.6 Safety Notes and Rules

The minilabs are available with the following laser types:

1-10 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.6.3 Handling of Chemicals

The owner (employer)

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-11

1.6.4 Service / Repair Routines

1.6.5 Disposal of the Machine

1-12 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 AgfaPhoto

1.6.6 Warnings and Information Labels on the Machine

d-lab.2 with gas laser (Type 8060/260)

AgfaPhoto 2005-05-01 / PN 04092_01 1-13

d-lab.2 with solid state laser